Sri Garga-samhita

Sri Garga-samhita

Sri Garga-samhita

Chapter Thirteen Sri Uddhavagamana The Arrival of Sri Uddhava

Text 1

Verse text

sri-bahulacva uvaca
agre cakara kim karyam
mathurayam yaduttamah
nivasayitva sva-jnatin
vadaitan muni-sattama

Synonyms

sri-bahulacva uvaca — Sri Bahulacva said ; agre — before ; cakara — did ; kim — what? ; karyam — duty ; mathurayam — in Mathura ; yaduttamah — the best of the Yadavas ; nivasayitva — giving homes ; sva-jnatin — to His relatives ; vada — please tell ; etat — that ; muni-sattama — O best of sages.

Translation

Sri Bahulacva said: After He gave homes in Mathura to His relatives, what did Lord Krsna do then? O best of sages, please tell me that.
Text 2

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
paripurnatamah saksad
bhagavan bhakta-vatsalah
sasmara gokulam dinam

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; paripurnatamah — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; saksat — directly ; bhagavan — the Lord ; bhakta — to the devotees ; vatsalah — affectionate ; sasmara — remembered ; gokulam — Gokula ; dinam — poor ; gosa-gopala-sagkulam — filled with cows and cowherd people.

Translation

gosa-gopala-sagkulam Sri Narada said: Then the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, remembered unhappy Gokula, filled with cows and cowherd people.
Text 3

Verse text

ekadahuya rahasi
sakhayam bhaktam uddhavam
uvaca bhagavan devah
prema-gadgadaya gira

Synonyms

ekada — one day ; ahuya — calling ; rahasi — in private ; sakhayam — His friend ; bhaktam — and devotee ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; uvaca — said ; bhagavan — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; devah — the Lord ; prema-gadgadaya — choked up ; gira — with words.

Translation

One day, calling His devotee and friend Uddhava to a private room, the Supreme Personality of Godhead spoke with words choked with emotion.
Text 4

Verse text

sri-bhagavan uvaca
gaccha cighram vrajam he sakhe sundaram
sri-lata-kunja-punjadibhir manditam
gopa-gopi-ganair gokulam sagkulam

Synonyms

sri-bhagavan uvaca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said ; gaccha — go ; cighram — at once ; vrajam — to Vraja ; he — O ; sakhe — friend ; sundaram — beautiful ; sri-lata-kunja-pu 24jadibhih — with many beautiful forests and flowering vines ; manditam — decorated ; caila — Govardhana Hill ; krsna — the Yamuna ; prabha — glory ; caru — beautiful ; vrndavanam — Vrndavana ; gopa-gopi-ganaih — with many gopas and gopis ; gokulam — Gokula ; sagkulam — filled.

Translation

caila-krsna-prabha-caru-vrndavanam The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Friend, please go at once to beautiful Vraja, which is decorated with many beautiful forest groves and flowering vines, which has beautiful Vrndavana forest glorious with Govardhana Hill and the Yamuna, and which is filled with gopas and gopis.
Text 5

Verse text

eka-patram tu nandaya vai diyatam
va dvitiyam yacoda-kare caiva bhoh
va trtiyam tv idam radhikayai sakhe
tatra gatva hi tan-mandiram sundaram

Synonyms

eka-patram — one letter ; tu — indeed ; nandaya — to Nanda ; vai — indeed ; diyatam — should be given ; va — or ; dvitiyam — a second ; yacoda-kare — in Yacoda's hand ; ca — and ; eva — inded ; bhoh — Oh ; va — or ; trtiyam — a third ; tv — indeed ; idam — this ; radhikayai — to Radha ; sakhe — O friend ; tatra — there ; gatva — having gone ; hi — inded ; tan-mandiram — to the palace ; sundaram — beautiful.

Translation

There please give a letter to King Nanda. Place a second letter in Yacoda's hand. Then, O friend, go to Radha's beautiful palace and give a letter to Radha.
Text 6

Verse text

va caturtham sakhibhyah cicubhyah cubham
kaucalam diyatam patram evam prthak
gopikanam catebhyac ca yuthebhya
unmohitanam ca deyani patrani ca

Synonyms

va — or ; caturtham — a fourth ; sakhibhyah — to the friends ; cicubhyah — boys ; cubham — beautiful ; kaucalam — auspicious ; diyatam — should be given ; patram — letter ; evam — thus ; prthak — one ; gopikanam — of the gopis ; catebhyah — to hundreds ; ca — and ; yuthebhya — groups ; unmohitanam — bewildered with love ; ca — and ; deyani — should be given ; patrani — many letters ; ca — and.

Translation

Give a fourth splendid and auspicious letter to My childhood gopa friends. Give letters to each of the hundreds of groups of gopis bewildered with love for Me.
Text 7

Verse text

me pita nanda-rajo ghrni man-mana
me ca mata yacoda smaraty acu mam
vakya-vrndaih cubhair niti-vit tvam tayor
me param pritim arad dvayor avaha

Synonyms

me — My ; pita — father ; nanda-rajah — King Nanda ; ghrni — kind ; man-mana — his mind fixed on Me ; me — My ; ca — and ; mata — mother ; yacoda — Yacoda ; smarati — remembers ; acu — at once ; mam — Me ; vakya-vrndaih — with many words ; cubhaih — beautiful ; niti-vit — wise ; tvam — you ; tayoh — of them ; me — and ; param — great ; pritim — love ; arat — near ; dvayoh — both ; avaha — bring.

Translation

My kind father, King Nanda, places all his thoughts on Me. My mother, Yacoda, always thinks of Me. You are expert in speaking many graceful words. Please carry My love to them.
Text 8

Verse text

mat-priya radhika mad-viyogatura
manyate mam vina kham jagan mohatah
mad-viyogadhim asya mad-uktaih padair
mocaya tvam bhavan daksino vak-pathe

Synonyms

mat — My ; priya — beloved ; radhika — Radha ; mad-viyogatura — overcome with separation fropm Me ; manyate — thinks ; mam — of Me ; vina — without ; kham — sky ; jagat — the universe ; mohatah — from bewilderment ; mad-viyogadhim — tormented in My absence ; asya — of Her ; mad-uktaih — with My words ; padaih — with words ; mocaya — please release ; tvam — you ; bhavan — you ; daksinah — expert ; vak-pathe — in the path of words.

Translation

Radha, My beloved, is tortured by My absence. In My absence She thinks the entire world is a great expanse of empty sky. Speak My words to Her and free Her from Her suffering in My absence. You are expert in walking on the path of eloquent words.
Text 9

Verse text

gopa-balah sudamadayo mat-priya
mam sakhayam vina te 'pi mohaturah
dehi tesam sukham mitra-vac chri-vraje
sv-alpa-kalena tatragamisyamy aham

Synonyms

gopa-balah — the gopa boys ; sudamadayah — headed by Sudama ; mat-priya — dear to Me ; mam — to Me ; sakhayam — friend ; vina — without ; te — they ; api — also ; mohaturah — bewildered ; dehi — give ; tesam — of the them ; sukham — happiness ; mitra-vat — like a friend ; sri-vraje — in beautiful Vraja ; sv-alpa-kalena — in a little time ; tatra — there ; agamisyami aham — I will come.

Translation

The gopa boys are also very dear to Me. Without Me, their friend, they are bewildered and unhappy. As a friend does, make them happy. Very soon I will return to beautiful Vraja.
Text 10

Verse text

gopika mad-viyogadhi-vegatura
man-manaskac ca mat-prapta-dehasavah
ya mad-arthe ca santyakta-lokabalas
tah katham natra mantrin bibharmi svatah

Synonyms

gopikah — the gopis ; mad-viyogadhi-vegatura — tortured by My absence ; man-manaskah — their thoughts fixed on Me ; ca — and ; mat-prapta — placed in Me ; deha — their bodies ; asavah — and life ; ya — who ; mad-arthe — for My sake ; ca — and ; santyakta — renounced ; loka — the world ; abalah — women ; tah — they ; katham — how? ; na — not ; atra — here ; mantrin — O counselor ; bibharmi — I maintain ; svatah — personally.

Translation

The gopis are tortured by My absence. Their thoyghts are fixed on Me. Their bodies and lives are dedicated to Me. For My sake they have renounced the entire world. Counselor, how can I not protect and maintain them?
Text 11

Verse text

ta asun tyaktum atrodyata uddhava
yabhir adyapi krcchrair ghrtac casavah
mad-viyogadhim asam mad-uktaih padair
mocaya tvam bhavan daksino vak-pathe

Synonyms

tah — they ; asun — life ; tyaktum — to abandon ; atra — here ; udyata — about ; uddhava — O Uddhava ; yabhih — by whom ; adya — now ; api — even ; krcchraih — with difficulty ; ghrtah — held ; ca — and ; asavah — life ; mad-viyogadhim — the torment of being separated from Me ; asam — of them ; mad-uktaih — with My words ; padaih — with words ; mocaya — release ; tvam — you ; bhavan — you ; daksinah — expert ; vak-pathe — on the path of words.

Translation

O Uddhava, they are on the verge of giving up their lives. It is very difficult for them to remain alive. Speak My words to them and free them from their suffering in My absence. You are expert in walking on the path of eloquent words.
Texts 12-14

Verse text

yena purvam vrajad agato 'ham sakhe
tam ratham sacva-sutam ranad-ghantikam
me ca sarupyam adyaiva pitambaram
vaijayantim sahasra-cchadam pagkajam
kundale divya-ratna-prabha-mandite
koti-balarka-diptam manim kaustubham
me maha-nadini caru-vamcim cubham
puspa-yuktam ca yastim jagan-mohinim
candanam sundaram divya-gandhavrtam
barha-malladi-vesam kvanan-nupuram
maulim evam grhanaggade uddhava
gaccha gacchacu cadyaiva mad-vakyatah

Synonyms

yena — by which ; purvam — before ; vrajat — from Vraja ; agatah — come ; aham — I ; sakhe — O friend ; tam — you ; ratham — chariot ; sa — with ; acva — horses ; sutam — and charioteer ; ranad-ghantikam — with tinkling bells ; me — of Me ; ca — and ; sarupyam — the same form ; adya — now ; eva — indeed ; pitambaram — yellow garments ; vaijayantim — a vaijayanti garland ; sahasra-cchadam pagkajam — a thousand-petal lotus. kundale divya-ratna-prabha-mandite koti-balarka-diptam manim kaustubham me maha-nadini caru-vamcim cubham puspa-yuktam ca yastim jagan-mohinim candanam sundaram divya-gandhavrtam barha-malladi-vesam kvanan-nupuram maulim evam grhanaggade uddhava gaccha gacchacu cadyaiva mad-vakyatah

Translation

Take the chariot on which I left Vraja, decorate it with tinkling bells, take a charioteer and horses, take a form like My own, take My yellow garments, vaijayanti garland, thousand-petal lotus, splendid jewel earrings, Kaustubha jewel more glorious than millions of rising suns, beautiful flute filled with sweet music, flower-decorated stick that charms all the worlds, beautiful, splendidly fragrant sandal paste, ornaments of jasmine flowers and peacock feathers, tinkling anklets, crown, and armlets, and then go at once, go now, on My word, to Vraja.
Text 15

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
ity ukta uddhava cighram
namaskrtya krtanjalih
krsnam pradaksini-krtya
ratharudho vrajam yayau

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; iti — thus ; ukta — addressed ; uddhava — Uddhava ; cighram — at once ; namaskrtya — offering obeisances ; krtanjalih — with folded hands ; krsnam — Lord Krsna ; pradaksini-krtya — circumambulating ; ratharudhah — riding on a chariot ; vrajam — to Vraja ; yayau — went.

Translation

Hearing these words, with folded hands Uddhava bowed before Lord Krsna, circumambulated Him, and at once rode on a chariot to Vraja.
Text 16

Verse text

koticah kotico gavah
yatra yatra manoharah

Synonyms

koticah — millions ; koticah — and miullions ; gavah — cows ; yatra — where ; yatra — where ; manoharah — beautiful ; cveta-parvata — white mountains ; sagkaca — splendid ; divya-bhusana-bhusitah — decorated with splendid ornaments.

Translation

cveta-parvata-sagkaca divya-bhusana-bhusitah Wherever he went in Vraja there were millions and millions of beautiful cows glorious as great white mountains and decorated with splendid ornaments.
Text 17

Verse text

payasvinyas tarunyac ca
cila-rupa-gunair yutah
sa-vatsah pita-pucchac ca
vrajantyo bhavya-murtikah

Synonyms

payasvinyah — full of milk ; tarunyah — young ; ca — and ; cila-rupa-gunaih — virtuous ; yutah — endowed ; sa-vatsah — with calves ; pita-pucchah — yellow tails ; ca — and ; vrajantyah — going ; bhavya-murtikah — beautiful forms.

Translation

They were young, virtuous, full of milk, and accompanied by their calves. They were beautiful and their tails were yellow.
Text 18

Verse text

hema-tulya hema-crggyo
hara-malah sphurat-prabhah

Synonyms

ghanta-manjita-jhagkarah — with tinkjling bells and ornamnets ; kigkini-jala-manditah — decorated with a network of tinkling ornaments ; hema-tulya — like gold ; hema-crggyah — with gold horns ; hara-malah — with necklaces and garlands ; sphurat-prabhah — splendid.

Translation

ghanta-manjita-jhagkarah kigkini-jala-manditah They were deocrated with networks of tinkling bells and ornaments and with garlands and necklaces. Their bodies and horns were like gold.
Text 19

Verse text

patalah haritas tamra
pitah cyama vicitritah
dhumrah kokila-varnac ca
yatra gavas tv anekadha

Synonyms

patalah — pink ; haritah — green ; tamra — brown ; pitah — yellow ; cyama — black ; vicitritah — different colors ; dhumrah — smokey ; kokila-varnah — the color of cuckoos ; ca — and ; yatra — where ; gavah — cows ; tv — indeed ; anekadha — many.

Translation

Some cows were pink, some green, some brown, some multi-colored, some yellow, some smoke-colored, and some the color of cuckoos.
Text 20

Verse text

samudra-vad dugdha-dac ca
kuragga-vad vilagghadbhir
go-vatsair manditah cubhah

Synonyms

samudra-vat — like an ocean ; dugdha-dah — giving milk ; ca — and ; taruni-kara-citritah — decorated with girls' handprints ; kuragga-vat — like deer ; vilagghadbhih — leaping ; go-vatsaih — with calves ; manditah — decorated ; cubhah — beautiful and auspicious.

Translation

taruni-kara-citritah They were decorated with pictures of girls' handprints. They gave milk that was like an ocean. They were decorated with calves leaping like deer.
Text 21

Verse text

itas tatac calantac ca
go-ganesu maha-vrsah
yatra dharma-dhurandharah

Synonyms

itas tatah — here and there ; calantah — going ; ca — and ; go-ganesu — among the cows ; maha-vrsah — great bulls ; dirgha — long ; kandhara — shoulders ; crgga — horns ; adhyah — opulent ; yatra — where ; dharma-dhurandharah — carrying the principles of religion.

Translation

dirgha-kandhara-crggadhya Wandering here and there among the cows were great bulls with broad shoulders and long horns, bulls bearing the principles of religion.
Text 22

Verse text

gopala vetra-hastac ca
cyama-vamci-dharah parah
krsna-lilah pragayanto
ragair madana-mohanaih

Synonyms

gopala — gopas ; vetra-hastah — with stick in hand ; ca — and ; cyama-vamci-dharah — holding black flutes ; parah — great ; krsna — of Lord Krsna ; lilah — pastimes ; pragayantah — singing ; ragaih — with ragas ; madana-mohanaih — charming Kamadeva.

Translation

There were many gopas playing black flutes and, with melodies that could charm Kamadeva himself, singing of Lord Krsna's pastimes
Text 23

Verse text

durat tam agatam viksya
jnatva krsnam vrajarbhakah
ucuh parasparam te vai

Synonyms

durat — from far away ; tam — him ; agatam — coming ; viksya — seeing ; jnatva — understanding ; krsnam — Krsna ; vrajarbhakah — the boys of Vraja ; ucuh — said ; parasparam — among themselves ; te — they ; vai — indeed ; krsna-darcana-lalasah — yearning to see Krsna.

Translation

krsna-darcana-lalasah Seeing Uddhava coming, and thinking he was Krsna Himself, the gopa boys, eager to see Krsna, spoke among among themselves.
Text 24

Verse text

sri-gopa ucuh
nanda-sunuh kilayati
sakha yo 'yam na samcayah
megha-cyamah pita-vasah
sragvi kundala-manditah

Synonyms

sri-gopa ucuh — the gopas said ; nanda-sunuh — Nanda's son ; kila — indeed ; ayati — comes ; sakha — friend ; yah — who ; ayam — He ; na — not ; samcayah — doubt ; megha-cyamah — dark as a cloud ; pita-vasah — with yellow garments ; sragvi — garlanded ; kundala-manditah — decorated with earrings.

Translation

The gopas said: Nanda's son is coming. It is our friend Krsna. There is no doubt of it. He is dark as a monsoon cloud. He wears yellow garments. He is decorated with earrings and a garland.
Text 25

Verse text

kaustubhi kundali bibhrat
tad eva mukutam bibhrat

Synonyms

kaustubhi — kaustubha ; kundali — earrings ; bibhrat — carrying ; sahasra-dala-pagkajam — a thousand petal lotus ; tat — that ; eva — indeed ; mukutam — crown ; bibhrat — wearing ; koti-martanda-sannibham — splendid as a million suns.

Translation

sahasra-dala-pagkajam koti-martanda-sannibham He wears earrings and a Kastubha jewel. He holds a thousand-petal lotus. He wears a crown splendid as millions of suns.
Text 26

Verse text

ta evacva rathah so 'yam
balo nasti rathe casminn
ekaki nanda-nandanah

Synonyms

te — they ; eva — indeed ; acvah — horses ; rathah — chariot ; sah — He ; ayam — He ; kigkini-jala-manditah — decorated with a network of tinkling ornaments ; balah — Balarama ; na — not ; asti — is ; rathe — on the chariot ; ca — and ; asmin — in this ; ekaki — alone ; nanda-nandanah — Krsna.

Translation

kigkini-jala-manditah These are the same horses. It is the same chariot decorated with a network of tinkling ornaments. Balarama is not on it. Nanda's son has come alone.
Text 27

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
evam vadanto gopalah
cridamadya videha-rat
krsnakrtim krsna-sakham
ayayuh sarvato ratham

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; evam — thus ; vadantah — saying ; gopalah — the gopas ; cridamadya — headed by Sridama ; videha-rat — O king of Videha ; krsna — of Lord Krsna ; akrtim — the form ; krsna-sakham — Lord Krsna's friend ; ayayuh — came ; sarvatah — from everywhere ; ratham — the chariot.

Translation

Sri Narada said: O king of Videha, speaking in this way, the gopas headed by Sridama surrounded the chariot Krsna's friend, whose form was like Krsna's.
Text 28

Verse text

krsno nastiti vadatah
ko 'yam saksat tad-akrtih
tan namaskrtyaupagavih
parirabhyavadat pathi

Synonyms

krsnah — Krsna ; na — not ; asti — is ; iti — thus ; vadatah — saying ; kah — who? ; ayam — he ; saksat — directly ; tad-akrtih — His form ; tan — to them ; namaskrtya — bowing ; aupagavih — Uddhava ; parirabhya — embracing ; avadat — spoke ; pathi — on the path.

Translation

The gopas said, "He is not Krsna. Who is he? His form is like Krsna's." Then, in the middle of the road, Uddhava bowed before the gopas and embraced them all.
Text 29

Verse text

sri-uddhava uvaca
grhana patram cridaman
krsna-dattam na samcayah
cokam ma kuru gopalaih
kucaly aste harih svayam

Synonyms

sri-uddhava uvaca — Sri Uddhava said ; grhana — take ; patram — this letter ; cridaman — O Sridama ; krsna-dattam — given by Krsna ; na — not ; samcayah — doubt ; cokam — lament ; ma — don't ; kuru — do ; gopalaih — with gopas ; kucali — welfare ; aste — is ; harih — Krsna ; svayam — Himself.

Translation

Sri Uddhava said: O Sridama, please take this letter. Krsna gave it. Of this there is no doubt. Don't lament. Krsna takes a personal interest in the welfare of the gopas.
Text 30

Verse text

yadavanam mahat karyam
krtvatha sa-balah prabhuh
hrasva-kalena catrapi
bhagavan agamisyati

Synonyms

yadavanam — of the Yadavass ; mahat — great ; karyam — deed ; krtva — doing ; atha — then ; sa-balah — with Balarama ; prabhuh — the Lord ; hrasva — short ; kalena — time ; ca — and ; atra — here ; api — also ; bhagavan — the Lord ; agamisyati — will return.

Translation

After He has fulfilled His responsibilities to the Yadavas, Lord Krsna and Balarama will quickly erturn to Vraja.
Text 31

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
pathitva tad-dhasta-patram
cridamadya vrajarbhakah
bhrcam acruni muncantah
prahur gadgadaya gira

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; pathitva — after reading ; tad-dhasta-patram — the letter in his hand ; cridamadya — headed by Sridama ; vrajarbhakah — the boys of Vraja ; bhrcam — greatly ; acruni — tears ; mu 24cantah — shedding ; prahuh — said ; gadgadaya — choked with emotion ; gira — with words.

Translation

Sri Narada said: After reading the letter in their hands, the boys of Vraja burst into tears. Then, their voices choked with emotion, they spoke.
Text 32

Verse text

sri-gopa ucuh
pantheti nirmohini nanda-sunau
tanur vibhutic ca dhanam balam ca
sarva dhiyah krsnam rte vraje nah cunyam prajatam hi jagat samastam

Synonyms

sri-gopah ucuh — the gopas said ; pantha — O traveller ; iti — thus ; nirmohini — free from illusion ; nanda-sunau — Nanda's son ; tanuh — the body ; vibhutih — opulence ; ca — and ; dhanam — wealth ; balam — strength ; ca — and ; sarva — all ; dhiyah — intelligence ; krsnam — Krsna ; rte — without ; vraje — in Vraja ; nah — of us ; cunyam — void ; prajatam — born ; hi — indeed ; jagat — the universe ; samastam — all.

Translation

The gopas said: O traveler, Krsna's body, opulence, wealth, strength, intelligence are never thwarted or bewildered. For us people of Vraja, to be without Krsna is to live in a world that is a desert.
Text 33

Verse text

ksano yugatvam va ghati maha-mate
prayati manvantaratam vrajaukasam
yamac ca kalpam ca dinam vina harim
viyoga-duhkhair dvi-parardhatam gatam

Synonyms

ksanah — a second ; yugatvam — the status of a yuga ; va — or ; ghati — a half-hour ; maha-mate — O noble-hearted one ; prayati — attains ; manvantaratam — the status of a manvantara ; vrajaukasam — of the people of Vraja ; yamah — three hours ; ca — and ; kalpam — a kalpa ; ca — and ; dinam — day ; vina — without ; harim — Krsna ; viyoga-duhkhaih — with the suffering of separation ; dvi-parardhatam — a lifetime of Brahma ; gatam — attains.

Translation

O noble-hearted one, for the people of Vraja suffering in Krsna's absence, a moment has become a yuga, a half-hour has become a manvantara, three hours has become a kalpa, and a day has become a lifetime of Brahma.
Text 34

Verse text

ahar-nicam tam na hi vismaramahe
dusta ghati sa prayayau yaya hi sah
mano harann uddhava no vanaukasam
vayasya-bhavena sada krtagasam

Synonyms

ahar-nicam — day and night ; tam — that ; na — not ; hi — indeed ; vismaramahe — we forget ; dusta — wicked ; ghati — half-hour ; sa — that ; prayayau — goes ; yaya — by which ; hi — inbdeed ; sah — He ; manah — the mind ; harann — stealing ; uddhava — O Uddhava ; nah — of us ; vanaukasam — the people of Vraja ; vayasya-bhavena — with friendship ; sada — always ; krtagasam — sinners.

Translation

Day and night we cannot forget Him. The treacherous half-hours pass, but He does not return. O Uddhava, He has stolen all the thoughts of the people of Vraja. Thinking He was just our friend, we must have offended Him again and again. .pa Chapter Fourteen Sri Nanda-rajoddhava-melana The Meeting of King Nanda and Uddhava
Text 1

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
evam prema-bharan gopan
uvaca prema-samyukta
uddhavo gata-vismayah

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; evam — thus ; prema-bharan — great love ; gopan — the gopas ; sri-krsna — of Sri Krsna ; virahaturan — tormented with separation ; uvaca — said ; prema-samyukta — filled with love ; uddhavah — Uddhava ; gata-vismayah — not astonished.

Translation

chri-krsna-virahaturan Sri Narada said: Uddhava, who dearly loved Lord Krsna, was not surprised to hear all this. Then he spoke to the gopas, who were overcome with love for Krsna and were tornmented by His absence.
Text 2

Verse text

sri-uddhava uvaca
aham sri-krsna-daso 'smi
tat-priyas tad-rahaskarah
bhavatam kucalam drastum
presito harina tvaram

Synonyms

sri-uddhava uvaca — Sri Uddhava said ; aham — I ; sri-krsna-dasah — Sri Krsna's servant ; asmi — am ; tat-priyah — dear to Him ; tad-rahaskarah — His confiant ; bhavatam — of you ; kucalam — auspiciousness ; drastum — to sxee ; presitah — sent ; harina — by Krsna ; tvaram — quickly.

Translation

Sri Uddhava said: I am Sri Krsna's servant. i am His close friend. He sent me here to see if you were happy.
Text 3

Verse text

purim gatvatha haraye
nivedya viraham tu vah
tam prasannam karisyami
tad-agghrau netra-varibhih

Synonyms

purim — to the city ; gatva — having gone ; atha — then ; haraye — to Krsna ; nivedya — speaking ; viraham — separation ; tu — indeed ; vah — of you ; tam — Him ; prasannam — pleased ; karisyami — I will do ; tad-agghrau — His feet ; netra-varibhih — with tears.

Translation

I will return to Mathura City, tell Lord Krsna how you suffer in His absence, and soften His heart by placing my tears at His feet.
Text 4

Verse text

natva harim hi bhavatam
samipam he vrajaukasah
agamisyamy aham cighram
capatho na mrsa mama

Synonyms

natva — boweing ; harim — to Krsna ; hi — indeed ; bhavatam — of you ; samipam — near ; he — O ; vrajaukasah — people of Vraja ; agamisyami — will return ; aham — I ; cighram — quickly ; capathah — of the promise ; na — not ; mrsa — false ; mama — of me.

Translation

O people of Vraja, I will bow down before Lord Krsna and then I will quickly bring Him to you. My promise will not become false.
Text 5

Verse text

yuyam prasanna bhavata
ma cokam kurutatha vai
asmin vraje 'pi gopala
draksyatha sri-patim harim

Synonyms

yuyam — you ; prasanna — pleased ; bhavata — be ; ma — don't ; cokam — lament ; kuruta — do ; atha — then ; vai — indeed ; asmin — in this ; vraje — Vraja ; api — even ; gopala — Gopas ; draksyatha — will see ; sri-patim — the husband of the goddess of fortune ; harim — Lord Krsna.

Translation

Be happy. Don't lament. O gopas, in this land of Vraja you will again see Sri Krsna, the husband of the goddess of fortune.
Text 6

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
evam acvasya gopalan
ratha-stho yadu-nandanah
cridamadyaic ca gopalaih
sahito harsa-puritah
viveca nanda-nagaram
surye sindhu-gate sati

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; evam — thus ; acvasya — comforting ; gopalan — the gopas ; ratha-sthah — on the chariot ; yadu-nandanah — the descendent of Yadu ; cridamadyaih — headed by Sridama ; ca — and ; gopalaih — the gopas ; sahitah — with ; harsa-puritah — filled with joy ; viveca — entered ; nanda-nagaram — Nanda's village ; surye — as the sun ; sindhu-gate sati — was setting in the west.

Translation

Sri Narada said: In this way Uddhava comforted the gopas. Then, as the sun was setting in the west, cheerful Uddhava, accompanied by Sridama and the gopas, entered Nanda's village.
Text 7

Verse text

agatam hy uddhavam crutva
nanda-rajo maha-matih parirabhya muda cighram pujayam asa harsitah

Synonyms

agatam — come ; hi — indeed ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; crutva — hearing ; nanda-rajah — King Nanda ; maha-matih — noble-hearted ; parirabhya — embracing ; muda — joyfully ; cighram — at once ; pujayam asa — worshiped ; harsitah — happy.

Translation

Hearing that he had come, King Nanda happily embraced and worshiped Uddhava.
Text 8

Verse text

kacipu-stham sthitam cantam
uddhavam krta-bhojanam
kacipu-stho nanda-rajah
praha gadgadaya gira

Synonyms

kacipu-stham — on a cushion ; sthitam — seated ; cantam — peaceful ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; krta-bhojanam — havign eaten ; kacipu-sthah — on the cushion ; nanda-rajah — King Nanda ; praha — said ; gadgadaya — choked ; gira — with words.

Translation

When Uddhava was comfortably seated on a soft cushion and fed a nice meal, King Nanda, also seated on a cushion, spoke many words choked with emotion.
Text 9

Verse text

sri-nanda uvaca
kaccit sakha me puri curasena
aste sva-putaih kucali maha-mate
kamse mrte yadava-puggavanam
jatam sakhe saukhyam atah param bhuvi

Synonyms

sri-nanda uvaca — Sri Narada said ; kaccit — something ; sakha — friend ; me — ofg me ; puri — in the towen ; curasena — SuraSENA ; aste — IS ; sva-putraih — with his own sons ; kucali — happy ; maha-mate — O noble-hearted one ; kamse — now that Kamsa ; mrte — is dead ; yadava-puggavanam — of the best of the Yadavas ; jatam — born ; sakhe — O friend ; saukhyam — happiness ; atah param — then ; bhuvi — on the earth.

Translation

Sri Nanda said: O noble-hearted one, are my friend Surasena and his sons happy in Mathura City? Now that Kamsa is dead the Yadavas must be very happy.
Text 10

Verse text

kaccit kadacit sa-balo hi madhavah
smaraty asau va jananim yacomatim
gopala-govardhana-go-ganan vrajam
vrndavanam va pulinam taragginim

Synonyms

kaccit — whether? ; kadacit — sometimes ; sa-balah — with Balarama ; hi — indeed ; madhavah — Krsna ; smarati — remembers ; asau — He ; va — or ; jananim — mother ; yacomatim — Yascoda ; gopala-govardhana-go-ganan — the cows, gopas, and Govardhana Hill ; vrajam — Vraja ; vrndavanam — Vrndavana ; va — or ; pulinam — the shore ; taragginim — of the Yamuna.

Translation

Do Krsna and Balarama sometimes remember Their mother, Yacoda? Do They remember the gopas, the cows, Vraja, Govardhana Hill, Vrndavana forest, and the shore of the Yamuna?
Text 11

Verse text

ha daiva kasmin samaye sva-nandanam
bimbadharam sundaram ambujeksanam
draksyamy aham mandira-catvarajire
'rbhakair luthantam sa-balam muhur muhuh

Synonyms

ha — O ; daiva — destiny ; kasmin — at what? ; samaye — time ; sva-nandanam — own son ; bimbadharam — bimba fruit lips ; sundaram — handsome ; ambujeksanam — lotus eyes ; draksyami — will see ; aham — I ; mandira-catvarajire — in the courtyard ; arbhakaih — with the boys ; luthantam — rolling about ; sa-balam — with Balarama ; muhuh — again ; muhuh — and again.

Translation

O destiny, when will I see my handsome, lotus-eyed, bimba-lip son playing again and again in the courtyard with Balarama and the boys?
Text 12

Verse text

kunjo nikunjo yamuna maha-nadi
govardhano 'ranyam idam vanani
grhair lata-vrksa-gavam ganaih saha
vina mukundam visavat tv idam jagat

Synonyms

kunjo nikunjah — the forest groves ; yamuna — the Yamuna ; maha-nadi — the great river ; govardhanah — Govardhana ; aranyam — forest ; idam — the ; vanani — the forests ; grhaih — with homes ; lata-vrksa-gavam — of trees, vines, and cvows ; ganaih — multitudes ; saha — with ; vina — without ; mukundam — Krsna ; visavat — like poison ; tv — indeed ; idam — this ; jagat — world.

Translation

Without Krsna the groves and gardens, the great Yamuna river, Govardhana Hill, this forest, the other forests, our homes, the cows, trees, and flowering vines, and this entire universe are flooded with poison.
Text 13

Verse text

dhig jivanam me cayanam ca bhojanam
krsnam vina padma-dalayateksanam
candram vina bhumi-tale cakoravaj
jivami tasyagamanacaya bhrcam

Synonyms

dhik — fie ; jivanam — life ; me — my ; cayanam — sleeping ; ca — and ; bhojanam — eating ; krsnam — Krsna ; vina — without ; padma — lotus ; dala — petal ; ayata — large ; iksanam — eyes ; candram — moon ; vina — without ; bhumi-tale — on the earth ; cakoravat — like a cakora bird ; jivami — I live ; tasya — of Him ; agamana — the return ; acaya — with the hope ; bhrcam — great.

Translation

This life of eating and sleeping without Krsna, whose eyes are like great lotus petals. is wretched and miserable. I am like a cakora bird that cannot see the moon. I stay alive only by hoping that Krsna will return.
Text 14

Verse text

hartum bhuvo bharam ativa daivataih
samprarthitam purnatamam maha-mate
jatam satam raksana-tat-param svayam
manye hi krsnam sa-balam parat param

Synonyms

hartum — to do ; bhuvah — of the earth ; bharam — the burden ; ativa — great ; daivataih — by Brahma ; samprarthitam — requested ; purnatamam — most perfect ; maha-mate — O noble-hearted one ; jatam — born ; satam — of the devotees ; raksana-tat-param — for the protection ; svayam — own ; manye — I think ; hi — certainly ; krsnam — Krsna ; sa-balam — with Balarama ; parat — than the greatest ; param — greater.

Translation

I think that Lord Krsna is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest, and that, requested by the demigod Brahma, He has come here with Balarama to protect the devotees and remove the earth's burden.
Text 15

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
samsmrtya samsmrtya harim parecam
babhuva tusnim nava-nanda-rajah
ciro nidhayapy upabarhane sve
hy utkantha-romancita-vihvalaggah

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; samsmrtya — remembering ; samsmrtya — and remembering ; harim — Krsna ; parecam — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; babhuva — became ; tusnim — silence ; nava-nanda-rajah — King Nanda ; cirah — head ; nidhaya — placing ; api — also ; upabarhane — on the cushion ; sve — own ; hi — indeed ; utkantha-romancita-vihvalaggah — the hairs of his body erect with longing.

Translation

Sri Narada said: Thinking again and again of Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, King Nanda became silent. The hairs of his body erect with his longing to see Krsna, he rested his head on a pillow.
Text 16

Verse text

rajams tada krsna-sakhasya pacyatah
cayyam sa-vastram upabarhanantam
krtvardratam praggana acacala

Synonyms

sri-nanda — of Nanda ; netrambuja-vari-santati — th etears ; rajamh — O king ; tada — then ; krsna — of Sri Krsna ; sakhasya — of the friend ; pacyatah — looking ; cayyam — on the couch ; sa-vastram — with his cloth ; upabarhanantam — at the edge of the pillow ; krtva — making ; ardratam — wet ; praggane — - in the courtyard ; acacala — walked.

Translation

sri-nanda-netrambuja-vari-santati As Krsna's friend Uddhava looked on, King Nanda drenched the pillow, his garments, and the chair with tears from his eyes. Then Nanda went into the courtyard.
Text 17

Verse text

crutvoddhavam sri-mathura-puragatam
kapatam etyacu yacomati sati
crnvanty alam svasya sutasya varnanam

Synonyms

crutva — hearing ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; sri-mathura-puragatam — had come from Mathura ; kapatam — at the door ; etya — coming ; acu — at once ; yacomati — Yacoda ; sati — chaste ; crnvanti — hearing ; alam — greatly ; svasya — own ; sutasya — of the son ; varnanam — the sdescription ; sneha — love ; sravat — flowing ; su-stana — from her breasts ; netra-pagkaja — and lotus eyes.

Translation

sneha-sravat-su-stana-netra-pagkaja Hearing that Uddhava had come from Mathura City, saintly Yacoda rushed to the door. Milk flowing from her breasts and tears flowing from her lotus eyes, she overheard the description of her son.
Text 18

Verse text

vihaya lajjam ghrnaya sutasya sa
papraccha sarvam kucalam tadoddhavam
aproksya vastrena drg-acru-santatim
sthite ca nande hari-bhava-vihvale

Synonyms

vihaya — abandoning ; lajjam — shame ; ghrnaya — with tenderness ; sutasya — of her son ; sa — she ; papraccha — asked ; sarvam — all ; kucalam — welfare ; tada — then ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; aproksya — sprinkling ; vastrena — with garments ; drg-acru-santatim — many tears ; sthite — situated ; ca — and ; nande — Nanda ; hari-bhava-vihvale — overcome with love for Krsna.

Translation

Rejecting all shyness, and overcome with love for her son, she asked Uddhava everything about Krsna's well-being. Meanwhile Nanda was overcome with love. He wept, drenching his garments with tears from his eyes.
Text 19

Verse text

kvacit smarati mam krsno
nanda-rajam athapi va
bhrataram nanda-rajasya
sannandam darcanotsukam

Synonyms

sri-yacoda uvaca — Sri Yacoda said ; kvacit — whether? ; smarati — remembers ; mam — me ; krsnah — Krsna ; nanda-rajam — King Nanda ; atha — then ; api — also ; va — or ; bhrataram — brother ; nanda-rajasya — of King Nanda ; sannandam — Sannanda ; darcanotsukam — eager to see Him.

Translation

sri-yacodovaca Sri Yacoda said: Does Krsna remember me? Does He remember King Nanda? Does He remember Nanda's brother, Sannanda, who yearns to see Him?
Text 20

Verse text

nandan navopanandamc ca
vrsabhanun vrajesu sat
yesam aroham asthaya
bala-kelir vane vane

Synonyms

nandan — the Nandas ; nava — the nine ; upanandan — Upanandas ; ca — and ; vrsabhanun — the Vrsabhanus ; vrajesu — in Vraja ; sat — six ; yesam — of whom ; aroham — climbing ; asthaya — staying ; bala-kelih — childhood pastimes ; vane — in forest ; vane — after forest.

Translation

Does He remember the Nandas, the nine Upanandas, and the six Vrsabhanus of Vraja? Doe He remember the boys He played with in forest after forest?
Text 21

Verse text

kanduka-kridaya reme
sanandam nanda-nandanah
tan gopan sneha-samyuktan
kadacit smarati svatah

Synonyms

kanduka-kridaya — withball-games ; reme — enjoyed ; sanandam — with bliss ; nanda-nandanah — Krsna ; tan — them ; gopan — gopas ; sneha-samyuktan — affectionate ; kadacit — sometimes ; smarati — remembers ; svatah — personally.

Translation

Does He sometimes remember the affectionate gopa boys with whom He enjoyed playing ball-games?
Text 22

Verse text

eko 'yam me sutah prapto
na suta bahavac ca me
so 'pi mam jananim dinam
yayau tyaktva dig-antaram

Synonyms

ekah — one ; ayam — H ; me — my ; sutah — son ; praptah — attained ; na — not ; suta — many sons ; bahavah — many ; ca — and ; me — of me ; sah — He ; api — also ; mam — me ; jananim — mother ; dinam — poor ; yayau — goes ; tyaktva — leaving ; dig-antaram — far away.

Translation

I have only one son. I do not have many sons. Abandoning His poor mother, my son has gone away.
Text 23

Verse text

aho kastam snehavatam
durnivaram maha-mate
kim karomi vina putram
katham jivami manada

Synonyms

ahah — O ; kastam — a calamity ; snehavatam — of they who love ; durnivaram — cannot be stopped ; maha-mate — O noble-hearted one ; kim — what? ; karomi — I do ; vina — without ; putram — son ; katham — how? ; jivami — I live ; manada — O respectful one.

Translation

O noble-hearted one, for they who love Him, this is a great calamity. O gentle one, what will I do without my son? How can I live?
Text 24

Verse text

matar mahyam dehi dadhi
matar haiyaggavam navam
evam vadan sa madhuram
hatham cakre sada grhe

Synonyms

matah — O mother ; mahyam — to Me ; dehi — give ; dadhi — yogurt ; matah — mother ; haiyaggavam — butter ; navam — fresh ; evam — thus ; vadan — saying ; sah — He ; madhuram — sweet ; hatham — mischief ; cakre — did ; sada — always ; grhe — in the house.

Translation

"Mother, give Me yogurt. Mother, give Me fresh butter." He would always speak these sweet words, and He would always do mischief in the house.
Text 25

Verse text

madhyahne sa katham krsno
bhojanam kartum arhati
mamatmajo 'yam sri-krsno
jivanam vraja-vasinam vraje dhanam kule dipo mohano bala-lilaya

Synonyms

madhyahne — at midday ; sa — He ; katham — how? ; krsnah — Krsna ; bhojanam — eating ; kartum — to do ; arhati — able ; mama — my ; atmajah — son ; ayam — he ; sri-krsnah — Sri Krsna ; jivanam — the life ; vraja-vasinam — of the people of Vraja ; vraje — in Vraja ; dhanam — the wealth ; kule — in the family ; dipah — the lamp ; mohanah — charming ; bala-lilaya — with childhood pastimes.

Translation

How He could eat at lunchtime! My son, Sri Krsna, is the wealth of Vraja, the life of Vraja's people, and a brilliant lamp shining in His family. He is so sweet and so playful.
Text 26

Verse text

lalanaih palanais tasya
dinam me ksanavad gatam
tad dinam kalpavaj jatam
vinaho nanda-nandanam

Synonyms

lalanaih — with caresses ; palanaih — with protection ; tasya — of Him ; dinam — the day ; me — my ; ksanavat — like a moment ; gatam — gone ; tat — that ; dinam — day ; kalpavat — like a kalpa ; jatam — become ; vina — without ; ahah — O ; nanda-nandanam — Nanda's son.

Translation

Protecting and caressing Him, I thought each day was a single moment. Without Krsna my day is like a kalpa.
Text 27

Verse text

vatsan varayitum krsno
grama-simni nadi-tate
na karito 'rbhakaih sardham
sa caho mathuram gatah

Synonyms

vatsan — the calves ; varayitum — to keep ; krsnah — Sri Krsna ; grama-simni — within the village ; nadi-tate — at the shore of the river ; na — not ; karitah — made ; arbhakaih — the boys ; sardham — with ; sa — He ; ca — and ; ahah — O ; mathuram — Mathura ; gatah — went.

Translation

No longer do Krsna and the boys keep the calves on this side of the river, still close to the village. Now Krsna has gone to Mathura.
Text 28

Verse text

he mohaneti durat tam
agkam nitvatha lalanam
cakara nanda-rajo 'yam
tam vina khinnatam gatah

Synonyms

he — O ; mohana — charming boy ; iti — thus ; durat — from afar ; tam — Him ; agkam — on the lap ; nitva — placing ; atha — then ; lalanam — caress ; cakara — did ; nanda-rajah — King Nanda ; ayam — he ; tam — Him ; vina — without ; khinnatam — sadness ; gatah — attained.

Translation

From far away King Nanda would call "Sweet boy!", place Him on his lap, and caress Him. Without Him, Nanda is filled with sadness.
Text 29

Verse text

aho damna maya baddho
nirmohinyaikada cicuh
bhande bhagni-krte dadhnah
cocami caritam ca tat

Synonyms

ahah — O ; damna — with a rope ; maya — by me ; baddhah — bound ; nirmohinya — careful ; ekada — once ; cicuh — the boy ; bhande — when a pot ; bhagni-krte — broken ; dadhnah — of yogurt ; cocami — I lament ; caritam — the action ; ca — and ; tat — that.

Translation

One day the boy broke a yogurt pot and I carefully tied Him with a rope. Oh, how I regret that.
Text 30

Verse text

tat-pragganam sarva-sabha ca mandiram
dvarac ca vithir vraja-harmya-prsthayah
cunyam samas tam mama jivanam dhig
vina mukundam visavat tv idam jagat

Synonyms

tat-pragganam — the courtyard ; sarva-sabha — the assembly ; ca — and ; mandiram — the palace ; dvarah — the door ; ca — and ; vithih — the path ; vraja-harmya-prsthayah — the palaces of Vraja ; cunyam — empty ; samah — equal ; tam — Him ; mama — my ; jivanam — life ; dhig — alas! ; vina — without ; mukundam — Krsna ; visavat — like poison ; tv — indeed ; idam — this ; jagat — world.

Translation

Without Krsna the courtyard, the assembly-house, my palace, the gateway, the pathway, and all the other palaces of Vraja have become an empty desert. Krsna is my whole life. Without Him this world is like a flood of poison.
Text 31

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
yacoda-nandayor viksya
paramam prema-laksanam
uddhavo nitaram rajan
vismito 'bhud gata-smayah

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; yacoda-nandayoh — of Nanda and Yacoda ; viksya — seeing ; paramam — the great ; prema — of love ; laksanam — symptoms ; uddhavah — Uddhava ; nitaram — greatkly ; rajan — O king ; vismitah — astonished ; abhut — became ; gata-smayah — astonished.

Translation

Sri Narada said: O king, when he saw Nanda's and Yacoda's great love, Uddhava became filled with wonder.
Text 32

Verse text

sri-uddhava uvaca
roma-matram mama tanau
jihva cej jayate tv aho
yuvayos tad api clagham
kartum nalam maha-prabhu

Synonyms

sri-uddhava uvaca — Sri Uddhava said ; roma-matram — hairsd erect ; mama — my ; tanau — on the body ; jihva — the tongue ; cet — if ; jayate — is born ; tv — indeed ; ahah — Oh ; yuvayoh — of you two ; tat — that ; api — also ; clagham — praise ; kartum — to do ; na — not ; alam — enough ; maha-prabhu — O great masters.

Translation

Sri Uddhava said: You two are my masters. Even if the hairs on my body stood erect in ecstasy, my tongue would still not have the power to praise you properly.
Texts 33 and 34

Verse text

paripurnatame saksac
chri-krsne purusottame
idrci ca krta bhaktir
yuvabhyam prema-laksana
sagkhya-yogaic ca durlabha
cacvati yuvayoh prapta
ya bhaktih prema-laksana

Synonyms

paripurnatame — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; saksac — directly ; chri-krsne — Sri Krsna ; purusottame — the Supreme Person ; idrci — like this ; ca — and ; krta — did ; bhaktih — devotion ; yuvabhyam — you both ; prema-laksana — the signs of love ; tirthatana — pilgrimage ; tapah — austerity ; dana — chrity ; sagkhya — sankhya ; yogaih — goga ; ca — and ; durlabha — dificult to attain ; cacvati — eternal ; yuvayoh — of you both ; prapta — attained ; ya — which ; bhaktih — devotion ; prema-laksana — characterized by love.

Translation

tirthatana-tapo-dana- The eternal love and devotion you both feel for Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, cannot be attained by pilgrimages, austerity, charity, sagkhya, or yoga.
Text 35

Verse text

ma cokam kuru re nanda
he yacode vrajecvari
patra-dvayam grhanacu
krsna-dattam na samcayah

Synonyms

ma — don't ; cokam — lament ; kuru — do ; re — O ; nanda — Nanda ; he — O ; yacode — yacoda ; vrajecvari — queen of Vraja ; patra-dvayam — two letters ; grhana — please take ; acu — at once ; krsna-dattam — guiven by Krsna ; na — no ; samcayah — doubt.

Translation

O Nanda, don't lament. O Yacoda, O queen of Vraja, take these two letters. They are letters from Krsna. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 36

Verse text

sahagrajo nanda-sunuh
kucaly aste yadoh puri
yadavanam mahat karyam
krtvatha sa-balah prabhuh
hrasva-kalena catrapi
bhagavan agamisyati

Synonyms

saha — with ; agrajah — His elder brother ; nanda-sunuh — Krsna ; kucali — happy ; aste — is ; yadoh — of the Yadavas ; puri — in the city ; yadavanam — of the Yadavas ; mahat — great ; karyam — duty ; krtva — doing ; atha — then ; sa-balah — with Balarama ; prabhuh — the Lord ; hrasva-kalena — soon ; ca — and ; atra — here ; api — also ; bhagavan — the Lord ; agamisyati — will come.

Translation

Krsna and Balarama are happy in the city of the Yadavas. When Their mission is successfully completed, Krsna and Balarama will return here at once.
Texts 37 and 38

Verse text

paripurnatamam viddhi
sri-krsnam nanda-nandanam kamsadinam vadharthaya bhaktanam raksanaya ca
brahmana prarthitah krsno
'vatatara grhe tava
jata-matro 'dbhutam lilam
cakara sa-balo harih

Synonyms

paripurnatamam — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; viddhi — know ; sri-krsnam — Sri Krsna ; nanda-nandanam — Nanda's son ; kamsadinam — beginning with Kamsa ; vadharthaya — to kill ; bhaktanam — of the devotees ; raksanaya — for protection ; ca — and ; brahmana — by Brahma ; prarthitah — requested ; krsnah — Krsna ; avatatara — descended ; grhe — in the home ; tava — of you ; jata-matrah — born ; adbhutam — wonderful ; lilam — pastimes ; cakara — did ; sa-balah — with Balarama ; harih — Krsna.

Translation

Know that Nanda's son, Krsna, is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead. Requested by the demigod Brahma, and in order to protect the devotees and kill the demons led by Kamsa, He descended to your home. Since the moment of His birth, He and Balarama enjoyed many wonderful pastimes.
Text 39

Verse text

cakatasya nipatanam
trnavarta-nipatac ca

Synonyms

putana — of Putana ; prana-haranam — removing the life ; cakatasya — of the cart ; nipatanam — overturning ; trnavarta — of Trnavarta ; nipatah — the fall ; ca — and ; yamalarjuna — of the yamalarjuna trees ; bha 24janam — the breaking.

Translation

putana-prana-haranam yamalarjuna-bhanjanam He drew out Putana's life, overturned the cart, made Trnavarta fall, and broke the yamalarjuna trees.
Text 40

Verse text

sva-mukhe ca yacodayai
vicva-rupasya darcanam
vrndavane ca bhagavan
go-vatsamc carayan prabhuh

Synonyms

sva-mukhe — in His mouth ; ca — and ; yacodayai — to yacoda ; vicva-rupasya — of the universal form ; darcanam — the sight ; vrndavane — in Vrndavana ; ca — and ; bhagavan — the Lord ; go-vatsan — the cakves ; carayan — herding ; prabhuh — the Lord.

Translation

The Lord showed to Yacoda the universal form in His mouth. The Lord herded the calves in Vrndavana forest.
Text 41

Verse text

vadham cakara gopanam
pacyatam baka-vatsayoh
aghasurasya ca vadho
dhenukasya vimardanam

Synonyms

vadham — the death ; cakara — did ; gopanam — as the gopas ; pacyatam — were watching ; baka-vatsayoh — of Vakasura and Vatsasura ; aghasurasya — of Aghasura ; ca — and ; vadhah — the death ; dhenukasya — of Dhenukasura ; vimardanam — crushing.

Translation

As the gopas watched, He killed Bakasura, Vatsasura, Aghasura, and Dhenukasura.
Text 42

Verse text

mardanam kaliyasyapi
vahni-panam cakara ha
pralambasya vadham paccad
baladevac cakara ha

Synonyms

mardanam — the defeat ; kaliyasya — of Kaliya ; api — also ; vahni — the fire ; panam — drinking ; cakara — did ; ha — indeed ; pralambasya — of Pralamba ; vadham — the killing ; paccat — then ; baladevah — Balarama ; cakara — did ; ha — indeed.

Translation

He defeated Kaliya and then he drank up the forest fire. Then Balarama killed Pralambasura.
Text 43

Verse text

govardhanam samutpatya
hastenaikena lilaya
yusmakam pacyatam bibhrat
puskaram gaja-rad iva

Synonyms

govardhanam — Govardhana Hill ; samutpatya — lifting ; hastena ekena — with one hand ; lilaya — playfully ; yusmakam — of you ; pacyatam — looking ; bibhrat — holding ; puskaram — a lotus ; gaja-rad — the king of elephants ; iva — like

Translation

As you all watched, He playfully lifted Govardhana Hill as the king of elephants lifts a lotus flower.
Text 44

Verse text

cuda-manim sagkhacudaj
jahara jagatam patih
aristasya vadham krtva
kecinam nijaghana ha

Synonyms

cuda-manim — the crest jewel ; sagkhacudat — from Sankhacuda ; jahara — took ; jagatam — of the universes ; patih — the master ; aristasya — of Arista ; vadham — the death ; krtva — doing ; kecinam — Kesi ; nijaghana — killed ; ha — indeed.

Translation

Lord Krsna, the master of the universes, frocibly took Sagkhacuda's crown jewel. Then He killed Keci and Aristasura.
Text 45

Verse text

vyomasuram maha-daityam
mustina tam mamarda ha
tatha vai mathurayam tu
cakre citram maha-mate

Synonyms

vyomasuram — Vyomasura ; maha-daityam — the great demon ; mustina — with fist ; tam — him ; mamarda — killed ; ha — indeed ; tatha — then ; vai — indeed ; mathurayam — in Mathura ; tu — indeed ; cakre — did ; citram — wonder ; maha-mate — O noble-hearted one.

Translation

With His fist He killed the great demon Vyomasura. O noble-hearted one, in Mathura City He did many wonderful deeds.
Text 46

Verse text

vikathyamanam rajakam
karenabhijaghana tam
pracandam kamsa-kodandam
madhyatas tad babhanja ha iksu-dandam yatha nagah sarvesam pacyatam nrnam

Synonyms

vikathyamanam — speaking badly ; rajakam — a washerman ; karena — with a hand ; abhijaghana — killed ; tam — him ; pracandam — great ; kamsa — of Kamsa ; kodandam — the bow ; madhyatah — in the middle ; tat — that ; babhanja — broke ; ha — indeed ; iksu-dandam — like sugarcane ; yatha — as ; nagah — an elephant ; sarvesam — of all ; pacyatam — watching ; nrnam — the people.

Translation

With one hand He killed an insulting washerman. As everyone watched, He broke Kamsa's great bow in the middle as an elephant breaks a stalk of sugarcane.
Text 47

Verse text

dvipam kuvalayapidam
nagayuta-samam bale
cunda-dande saggrhitva
patayam asa bhu-tale

Synonyms

dvipam — the elephant ; kuvalayapidam — Kuvalayapida ; nagayuta-samam — equal to ten thousand other elephants ; bale — in strength ; cunda-dande — the trunk ; saggrhitva — grabbing ; patayam asa — threw ; bhu-tale — to the ground.

Translation

Grabbing the trunk of Kuvalayapida elephant, who was a strong as ten thousand other elephants, Krsna threw it to the ground.
Text 48

Verse text

canuram mustikam kutam
calam tocalam eva ca
patayam asa bhu-prsthe
malla-yudhena madhavah

Synonyms

canuram — Canura ; mustikam — Mustika ; kutam — Kuta ; calam — Sala ; tocalam — Tosala ; eva — indeed ; ca — and ; patayam asa — threw ; bhu-prsthe — to the ground ; malla-yudhena — in wrestling ; madhavah — Lord Krsna.

Translation

As He wrestled with them, Lord Krsna threw Canura, Mustika, Kuta, Sala, and Tocala to the ground.
Texts 49 and 50

Verse text

kamsam madotkatam daityam
naga-laksa-samam bale
mancad grhitva tam krsno
bhramayitva bhujaujasa
patayam asa bhu-prsthe
kamandalum ivarbhakah
ibhopari yatha simhas
tasyopari papata sah

Synonyms

kamsam — Kamsa ; madotkatam — wild with pride ; daityam — demon ; naga-laksa-samam — equal to a hundred thousand elephants ; bale — in strength ; mancat — from the viwewer's box ; grhitva — grabbing ; tam — Him ; krsnah — Krsna ; bhramayitva — whirling ; bhujaujasa — with the power of His arms ; patayam asa — threw ; bhu-prsthe — to the ground ; kamandalum — a kamandalu ; ivarbhakah — like ; ibha — an elephant ; upari — on ; yatha — as ; simhah — a lion ; tasya — him ; upari — on ; papata — fell ; sah — He.

Translation

From the viewer's box Lord Krsna dragged Kamsa, who was as strong as a hundred thousand elephants, whirled around with the power of His arms, and thew him to the ground as a child throws a kamandalu. Then Krsna jumped on him as a lion jumps on an elephant.
Text 51

Verse text

kamsanujamc ca kagkadin
baladevo maha-balah
mamarda mudgarenacu
mrgan vai mrga-rad iva

Synonyms

kamsanujan — Kamsa's younger brothers ; ca — and ; kagkadin — headed by Kanka ; baladevah — Balarama ; maha-balah — very strong ; mamarda — killed ; mudgarena — with a club ; acu — at once ; mrgan — deer ; vai — indeed ; mrga-rad — a lion ; iva — like.

Translation

Then with a club Lord Balarama killed Kamsa's younger brothers, headed by Kagka, as a lion kills a herd of deer.
Text 52

Verse text

gurave daksinam datum
samutpatya maharnave
cagkha-rupam pancajanam
nijaghana harih svayam

Synonyms

gurave — to His guru ; daksinam — kasina ; datum — to giv ; samutpatya — jumping ; maharnave — in the ocean ; cagkha-rupam — teh form of a conch ; pa 24cajanam — Pancajana ; nijaghana — killed ; harih — Krsna ; svayam — Himself.

Translation

Then, so He could offer daksina to His guru, Lord Krsna dove into the ocean and killed Pancajana, who had the form of a conch.
Text 53

Verse text

adbhutani caritrani
caitani sri-harim vina
kah karoti maha-nanda
tasmai sri-haraye namah

Synonyms

adbhutani — wonderful ; caritrani — pastimes ; ca — and ; etani — these ; sri-harim — Sri Krsna ; vina — without ; kah — who? ; karoti — does ; maha-nanda — O great Nanda ; tasmai — to Him ; sri-haraye — Sri Krsna ; namah — obeisances.

Translation

Who but Krsna could perform these wonderful pastimes? O great King Nanda, I offer my respectful obesiances to Sri Krsna. .pa Chapter Fifteen Sri Radha-darcana Seeing Sri Radha
Text 1

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
evam hi nandoddhavayor
hareh kathayatoh katham
vyatita ksanavad rajan
ksanada harsa-vardhini

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; evam — thus ; hi — indeed ; nanda — of Nanda ; uddhavayoh — and Uddhava ; hareh — of Krsna ; kathayatoh — talking ; katham — topics ; vyatita — passed ; ksanavat — like a moment ; rajan — O king ; ksanada — giving a festival ; harsa-vardhini — increasing happiness.

Translation

Sri Narada said: O king, as they talked about Lord Krsna, Nanda and Uddhava enjoyed a great festival of happiness, and the time seemed to pass like a single moment.
Text 2

Verse text

brahme muhurte cotthaya
gopyah sarva grhe grhe
dehaly-agganam alipya
dipams tatra nirupya ca

Synonyms

brahme muhurte — at brahma-muhutra ; ca — and ; utthaya — rising ; gopyah — the gopis ; sarva — all ; grhe — in home ; grhe — after home ; dehali — doorway ; agganam — cortyard ; alipya — anointing ; dipan — lamps ; tatra — there ; nirupya — seeing ; ca — and.

Translation

In each home the gopis rose at brahma-muhurta, anointed the doorways and courtyards, arranged the lamps, . . .
Text 3

Verse text

praksalya hasta-padau ca
methyam netram nidhaya ca
mamanthuh sarvato yuktah
picchilani dadhini tah

Synonyms

praksalya — washing ; hasta-padau — hands and feet ; ca — and ; mathnyam — on the churning stick ; netram — eye ; nidhaya — placing ; ca — and ; mamanthuh — churned ; sarvatah — completely ; yuktah — engaged ; picchilani — cream ; dadhini — yogurt ; tah — they.

Translation

. . . washed their hands and feet, looked for their churning-sticks, and began churning cream and yogurt.
Text 4

Verse text

venibhyo vigata-puspah

Synonyms

netra — the churning rope ; akarsa — pulling ; calat — moving ; bhara — weight ; bhuja — arms ; kagkana — bracelets ; kigkinih — tinkling ornaments ; venibhyah — braids ; vigata — fallen ; puspah — flowers ; sphurat-kundala-manditah — decorated with glistening earrings.

Translation

netrakarsa-calad-bhara- bhuja-kagkana-kigkinih sphurat-kundala-manditah As with their arms they pulled the churning-rope, their bracelets and other ornaments tinkled, their earrings glistened, and flowers fell from their braids.
Texts 5 and 6

Verse text

candra-mukhyah kanja-netras
citra-varnair manoharah
maggalani caritrani
gayantyah prema-samyukta
yatra tatra grhe grhe
ghose ghose cubha gavo
rambhamana itas tatah

Synonyms

candra — moon ; mukhyah — faces ; kanja-netrah — lotus eyes ; citra-varnaih — with various colors ; manoharah — beautiful ; maggalani — auspicious ; caritrani — pastimes ; sri-krsna-baladevayoh — of Sri Krsna and Balarama ; gayantyah — singing ; prema-samyukta — with love ; yatra — where ; tatra — there ; grhe — in home ; grhe — after home ; ghose — in barn ; ghose — after barn ; cubha — beautiful ; gavah — cows ; rambhamana — mooin ; itah — here ; tatah — and there.

Translation

sri-krsna-baladevayoh As in every home they churned, the lotus-eyed, moon-faced, colorfully-dressed, beautiful, affectionate gopis sang with love about the auspicious pastimes of Krsna and Balarama. Then in every barn the beautiful cows began to moo.
Text 7

Verse text

sarvatra gopika-gitam
dadhi-cabdena micritam
vithyam vithyam tatah crnvan
vismitac coddhavo 'bravit

Synonyms

sarvatra — everywhere ; gopika-gitam — the gopis' song ; dadhi-cabdena — with the sound of yougrt ; micritam — mixed ; vithyam — on path ; vithyam — after path ; tatah — then ; crnvan — hearing ; vismitah — astonished ; ca — and ; uddhavah — Uddhava ; abravit — said.

Translation

Hearing on every path the gopis' songs and the sounds of yogurt being churned, Uddhava, filled with wonder, said:
Text 8

Verse text

aho vai nanda-nagare
bhaktir nrtyati yatra ca
evam vadan bahir gramad
yayau snatum nadi-jale

Synonyms

ahah — Oh ; vai — indeed ; nanda-nagare — in nanda's village ; bhaktih — devotion ; nrtyati — dances ; yatra — where ; ca — and ; evam — thus ; vadan — saying ; bahih — out ; gramat — from the village ; yayau — went ; snatum — to bathe ; nadi-jale — in the river water.

Translation

"Love for Krsna dances in Nanda's village." After speaking these words, Uddhava left the village to bathe in the river.
Text 9

Verse text

sri-gopya ucuh
kasyayam adyatra rathah samagato
'kruro 'thava krura utagatah punah
yenaiva nito mathuram maha-purim
sri-nanda-sunur nava-kanja-locanah

Synonyms

sri-gopya ucuh — the gopis said ; kasya — of whom? ; ayam — this ; adya — now ; atra — here ; rathah — chariot ; samagatah — come ; akrurah — Akrura ; athava — or ; krura — cruel ; uta — indeed ; agatah — come ; punah — again ; yena — by whom' eva—indeed ; nitah — taken ; mathuram — to Mathura ; maha-purim — the great city ; sri-nanda-sunuh — Sri Krsna ; nava-ka 24ja-locanah — His eyes new lotus flowers.

Translation

The gopis said: Whose chariot is this? Has cruel Akrura, who took lotus-eyed Krsna to Mathura City returned?
Text 10

Verse text

kasmin ku-kale janani sasarja yam
datum satam snehavatam pratapanam
kadrur yatha naga-cayam visavrtam
hantum vrtha loka-janan itas tatah

Synonyms

kasmin — in what? ; ku-kale — bad time ; janani — mother ; sasarja — created ; yam — whom ; datum — to give ; satam — of the devotees ; snehavatam — loving ; pratapanam — pain ; kadruh — Kadru ; yatha — as ; naga-cayam — snakes ; visavrtam — poisonous ; hantum — to kill ; vrtha — useless ; loka-janan — the people ; itah — here ; tatah — and there.

Translation

At what inauspicious moment did his mother, in order to give pain to the loving devotees, give birth to Akrura? She did it as Kadru, in order randomly to kill people here and there, gave birth to the species of snakes.
Text 11

Verse text

kamsartha-krt kamsa-sakho 'ti-nirghrno
so 'yam punah kim vraja-mandalam gatah
bhartur mrtasyapi hi para-laukikim
asmabhir adyaiva karisyati kriyam

Synonyms

kamsartha — for Kamsa's sake ; krt — doing ; kamsa-sakhah — friend of Kamsa ; ati-nirghrnah — merciless ; so ayam — he ; punah — again ; kim — what? ; vraja-mandalam — to the circle of Vraja ; gatah — gone ; bhartuh — his master ; mrtasya — dead ; api — also ; hi — indeed ; para-laukikim — the next world ; asmabhih — by us ; adya — now ; eva — indeed ; karisyati — will do ; kriyam — act.

Translation

Has Kamsa' cruel friend and servant, Akrura, come again to the circle of Vraja? Will he now perform his dead master Kamsa's funeral rites for us?
Text 12

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
evam vadantyo vraja-gopa-vadhvah
santadya sutam ca mukhe 'ggulibhyam
papracchur arad gata-buddhim artam
tvaram vadaitat kila kasya yanam

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; evam — thus ; vadantyah — speaking ; vraja-gopa-vadhvah — the vraja-gopis ; santadya — hitting ; sutam — the charioteer ; ca — and ; mukhe — on the fice ; aggulibhyam — with fingers ; papracchuh — asked ; arat — near ; gata-buddhim — fool ; artam — pained ; tvaram — at once ; vada — tell ; etat — that ; kila — indeed ; kasya — of whom? ; yanam — chariot.

Translation

Sri Narada said: Speaking these words, and slapping his face, the gopis asked the pained and bewildered charioteer, Whose chariot is this? Tell us at once!"
Texts 13-15

Verse text

ghana-prabham padma-dalayateksanam
krsnakrtim koti-manoja-mohanam
pitambaram satpada-saggha-sagkulam
malam dadhanam nava-vaijayantim
vamci-dharam vetra-karam manoharam
maha-manim kundala-manditanam
sri-krsna-sarupya-dharam tam uddhavam
vilokya sarva nrpa vismitas tato
vijnaya govinda-sakham yayuh purah

Synonyms

ghana-prabham — splendid as a monsson cloud ; padma-dalayateksanam — lotus-petal eyes ; krsnakrtim — a form like Sri Krsna's ; koti-manoja — than millions of Kamadevas ; mohanam — more charming ; pitambaram — yellow garments ; satpada-saggha-sagkulam — filled with bees ; malam — garland ; dadhanam — wearing ; nava — new ; vaijayantim — vaijayanti ; sphurat-sahasra-cchada-padma — a splendid thousand-petal lotus ; panim — in his hand ; vamci-dharam — holding a flute ; vetra-karam — a stick in his hand ; manoharam — handsome ; balarka-koti-dyuti — the splendor of millions of rising suns ; mauli-mandanam — with crown and ornaments ; maha-manim — great jewel ; kundala-manditanam — decorated with earrings ; gaty-akrti-sri-tanu-hasa-su-svaraih — with gentle laughter ; sri-krsna-sarupya-dharam — having a form like Sri Krsna's ; tam — him ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; vilokya — seeing ; sarva — all ; nrpa — O king ; vismitah — astonished ; tatah — then ; vijnaya — knowing ; govinda-sakham — Krsna's friend ; yayuh — went ; purah — in the presence.

Translation

sphurat-sahasra-cchada-padma-panim balarka-koti-dyuti-mauli-mandanam gaty-akrti-sri-tanu-hasa-su-svaraih At that moment seeing Uddhava, splendid as a monsoon cloud, His eyes lotus petals, His form like Sri Krsna's, more handsome than millions of Kamadevas, dressed in yellow garments, wearing a new vaijayanti garland filled with bumblebees, holding in his hands a stick, flute, and thousand-petal lotus, wearing a crown and ornaments glorious as the rising sun, decorated with earrings and a great jewel, and gently laughing, the gopis became filled with wonder. O king, aware that this must be Sri Krsna's friend, they approached him.
Text 16

Verse text

jnatvatha sandeca-haram hareh prabhoh
su-vakya-nitya paramadarena tam
guptam hi prastum kucalam satam pateh
nitvoddhavam tah kadali-vanam gatah

Synonyms

jnatva — knowing ; atha — then ; sandeca-haram — carrying a letter ; hareh — of Krsna ; prabhoh — Lord ; su-vakya-nitya — with a sweet voice ; paramadarena — with great respect ; tam — that ; guptam — confidential ; hi — indeed ; prastum — to ask ; kucalam — the welfare ; satam — of the devotees ; pateh — of the master ; nitva — bringing ; uddhavam — to Uddhava ; tah — to them ; kadali-vanam — in a forest of banana trees ; gatah — went.

Translation

Aware that he was carrying a letter from Lord Krsna, the gopis brought Uddhava to a secluded banana tree forest to ask him with sweet and respectful words about the welfare of Lord Krsna, the master of the devotees.
Text 17

Verse text

yatraiva radha vrsabhanu-nandini
krsna-tate caru-nikunja-mandire
samasthita tad-virahatura bhrcam
kham manyate sa tu jagad dharim vina

Synonyms

yatra — where ; eva — indeed ; radha — Radha ; vrsabhanu-nandini — Vrsabhanu's daughter ; krsna-tate — on the shore of the Yamuna ; caru-nikunja-mandire — in a beautful forest cottage ; samasthita — situated ; tad-virahatura — afllicted with separation ; bhrcam — greatly ; kham — the void ; manyate — considered ; sa — and ; tu — indeed ; jagat — the universe ; harim — Lord Krsna ; vina — without.

Translation

King Vrsabhanu's daughter Radha, who thought the entire universe an empty void in Lord Krsna's absence, was there, in a beautiful forest-cottage by the Yamuna's shore.
Texts 18 and 19

Verse text

rambha-dalaic candana-pagka-sancayam
svatah sudha-racmi-galat-sudha-cayam
etadrcam yat kadali-vanam ca tad
radha-viyoganala-varcasa bhrcam
babhuva sarvam satatam hi bhasmasat
krsnagam acatma-tanum hi raksati

Synonyms

rambha-dalaih — with banana leaves ; candana-pagka-sa 24cayam — with sandal paste ; spharasphurac-citala-megha-mandiram — with cooling clouds ; krsna — of the Yamuna ; calat — moving ; caru — beautiful ; taragga — waves ; sikaram — mist ; svatah — own ; sudha-racmi-galat-sudha-cayam — nectar moonlight ; etadrcam — like this ; yat — that ; kadali-vanam — banana forest ; ca — and ; tat — indeed ; radha-viyoganala-varcasa — with the flames of Radha's feelings of separation ; bhrcam — greatly ; babhuva — became ; sarvam — all ; satatam — always ; hi — indeed ; bhasmasat — into ashes ; krsnagam — Krsna's return ; aca — hope ; atma — own ; tanum — body ; hi — indeed ; raksati — protects.

Translation

spharasphurac-chitala-megha-mandiram krsna-calac-caru-taragga-sikaram There, in the banana-tree forest, in a cooling monsoon-cloud banana-leaf cottage anointed with sandal paste and cooled by nectar moonlight and mist from the Yamuna's graceful and restless waves, Sri Radha was burned by flames of separation from Sri Krsna. Only the hope that Sri Krsna would return kept Her alive.
Text 20

Verse text

crutvoddhavam krsna-sakham samagatam
cakara radha sva-sakhibhir adaram
jalacanadyair madhuparka-maggalaih
sri-krsna krsneti muhur vadanty alam

Synonyms

crutva — hearing ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; krsna-sakham — Krsna's friend ; samagatam — come ; cakara — did ; radha — Radha ; sva-sakhibhih — with Her friends ; adaram — respect ; jalacanadyaih — with water, a seat, and other things ; madhuparka-maggalaih — with madhuparka ; sri-krsna — Sri Krsna ; krsna — Krsna ; iti — thus ; muhuh — again and again ; vadanti — saying ; alam — greatly.

Translation

Hearing that Krsna's friend Uddhava had come, Radha and Her friends greeted him with great respect. She offered him a seat, water, madhuparka, and many other things. Again and again She said, "Sri Krsna! O Sri Krsna!"
Text 21

Verse text

radham hi govinda-viyoga-khinnam
kuhvam yatha candra-kalam tadoddhavah
natam krcaggim krta-hasta-samputah
pradaksini-krtya jagada harsitah

Synonyms

radham — to Radha ; hi — indeed ; govinda-viyoga-khinnam — sufdfering in Krsna's separation ; kuhvam — on the new moon ; yatha — as ; candra-kalam — the crescent moon ; tada — then ; uddhavah — Uddhava ; natam — bowing down ; krcaggim — slender ; krta-hasta-samputah — with folded hands ; pradaksini-krtya — circumambulating ; jagada — spoke ; harsitah — joyful.

Translation

Radha, tormented in separation from Lord Krsna, and now slender as the new moon, bowed before Uddhava. With folded hands Uddhava circumambulated Her and cheerfully spoke.
Text 22

Verse text

sri-uddhava uvaca
sadasti krsnah paripurna-devo
radhe sada tvam paripurna-devi
sri-krsnacandrah krta-nitya-lilo
lilavati tvam krta-nitya-lila

Synonyms

sri-uddhava uvaca — Sri Uddhava said ; sada — always ; asti — is ; krsnah — Krsna ; paripurna-devah — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; radhe — O Radha ; sada — always ; tvam — You ; paripurna-devi — His perfect goddess ; sri-krsnacandrah — Sri Krsna ; krta-nitya-lilah — enjoys eternal pastimes ; lilavati — playful ; tvam — You ; krta-nitya-lila — enjoy transcendental pastimes.

Translation

Sri Uddhava said: Eternally Sri Krsna is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead. Eternally You are His supreme goddess. Eternally Sri Krsna enjoys transcendental pastimes. Eternally You enjoy transcendental pastimes with Him.
Text 23

Verse text

krsno 'sti bhuma tvam asindira sada
brahmasti krsnas tvam asi svara sada
krsnah civas tvam ca civa civartha
visnuh prabhus tvam kila vaisnavi para

Synonyms

krsnah — Krsna ; asti — is ; bhuma — Lord Narayana ; tvam — You ; asi — are ; indira — Goiddess Laksmi ; sada — eternally ; brahma — Brahma ; asti — is ; krsnah — Krsna ; tvam — You ; asi — are ; svara — Sarasvati ; sada — eternally ; krsnah — Krsna ; civah — Siva ; tvam — You ; ca — and ; civa — Parvati ; civartha — auspicious ; visnuh — Lord Visnu ; prabhuh — the Lord ; tvam — You ; kila — indeed ; vaisnavi — the devotee ; para — the best.

Translation

Eternally Krsna is Lord Narayana. Eternally You are Goddess Laksmi. Eternally Krsna is Lord Brahma. Eternally You are Goddess Sarasvati. Eternally Krsna is Lord Siva. Eternally You are Goddess Parvati. Eternally Krsna is the auspicious Supreme Personality of Godhead. Eternally You are His greatest devotee.
Text 24

Verse text

kaumara-sargi harir adi-devata
tvam eva hi jnanamayi smrtih cubha
layambhasa kridana-tat-paro harir
yajno varaho vasudha tvam eva hi

Synonyms

kaumara-sargi — the father of the four Kumaras ; harih — Krsna ; adi-devata — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tvam — You ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed ; jnanamayi — filled with knowledge ; smrtih — trhe Vedas ; cubha — auspicious ; layambhasa — with the water of devastation ; kridana-tat-parah — fond of playing ; harih — Krsna ; yajnah varahah — Yajna varaha ; vasudha — the earth ; tvam — You ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed.

Translation

Krsna is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the father of the four Kumaras. You are the auspicious Sruti-castra. Krsna is Yajna Varaha, who plays on the ocean of devastation. You are the earth goddess.
Text 25

Verse text

devarsi-varyo manasa harih svayam
tvam tatra saksan nija-hasta-vallaki
narayano dharma-suto narena hi
cantis tada tvam jana-canti-karini

Synonyms

devarsi-varyah — the best of the demigod sages ; manasa — by the mind ; harih — Krsna ; svayam — Himself ; tvam — You ; tatra — there ; saksat — directly ; nija-hasta-vallaki — the vina in His hand ; narayanah — Narayana ; dharma-sutah — the son of Dharma ; narena — with Nara ; hi — indeed ; cantih — canti ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; jana-canti-karini — who brings peace to the living entities.

Translation

Krsna is Narada, the best of divine sages. You are the vina in His hand. Krsna is Narayana Rsi, the son of Dharma and the companion of Nara. You are Santi, who bring peace to the living entities.
Text 26

Verse text

krsnas tu saksat kapilo mahaprabhuh
siddhis tvam evasi ca siddha-sevita
dattas tu krsno 'sti maha-municvaro
radhe sada jnanamayi tvam eva hi

Synonyms

krsnah — Krsna ; tu — indeed ; saksat — directly ; kapilah — Kapila ; mahaprabhuh — the Lord ; siddhih — Siddhi ; tvam — You ; eva — indeed ; asi — are ; ca — and ; siddha-sevita — served by the perfect beings ; dattah — Datta ; tu — indeed ; krsnah — Krsna ; asti — is ; maha-municvarah — the king of the

Translation

great sages; radhe - O Radha; sada - always; j 24anamayi - filled with knowledge; tvam - You; eva - indeed; hi - indeed. Krsna is Lord Kapila. You are the mystic perfections served by the Siddhas. Krsna is Dattatreya, the king of the great sages. You are the perfection of transcendental knowledge eternally.
Text 27

Verse text

yajno haris tvam kila daksina harir
urukramas tvam hi sada jayanty atah
prthur yada sarva-nrpecvaro harir
arcis tada tvam nrpa-patta-kamini

Synonyms

yajnah — Yajna ; harih — Krsna ; tvam — You ; kila — indeed ; daksina — Daksina ; harih — Krsna ; urukramah — Urukrama ; tvam — You ; hi — indeed ; sada — eternally ; jayanti — Jayanti ; atah — then ; prthuh — Prthu ; yada — when ; sarva-nrpecvarah — the master of all kings ; harih — Krsna ; arcih — Arci ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; nrpa-patta-kamini — the beautiful queen.

Translation

Krsna is Yajna. You are Daksina. Krsna is Urukrama. You are Jayanti eternally. Krsna is Prthu, the master of all kings. You are beautiful Queen Arci.
Text 28

Verse text

cagkhasuram hantum abhud harir yada
matsyavataras tvam asi crutis tada
kurmo harir madara-sindhu-manthane
netri-krta tvam cubhada hi vasuki

Synonyms

cagkhasuram — Sagkhasura ; hantum — to kill ; abhut — was ; harih — Krsna ; yada — when ; matsyavatarah — the Matsya incarnation ; tvam — You ; asi — are ; crutih — the Vedas ; tada — then ; kurmah — Kurma ; harih — Krsna ; madara-sindhu-manthane — in churning the ocean of milk ; netri-krta — the churning-rope ; tvam — You ; cubhada — auspicious ; hi — indeed ; vasuki — Vasuki.

Translation

When Krsna appeared as Matsyavatara to kill Sagkhasura, You became the Four Vedas. When, during the churning of the milk-ocean, Krsna appeared as Kurma, You became Vasuki, the auspicious churning-rope.
Text 29

Verse text

dhanvantaric carti-haro harih paras
tvam ausadhi divya-sudhamayi cubhe
sri-krsnacandras tu babhuva mohini
tvam mohini tatra jagad-vimohini

Synonyms

dhanvantarih — Dhanvantari ; ca — and ; arti-harah — removing troubles ; harih — Krsna ; parah — Supreme ; tvam — You ; ausadhi — medicine ; divya-sudhamayi — full of transcendental nectar ; cubhe — O beautiful one ; sri-krsnacandrah — Sri Krsna ; tu — indeed ; babhuva — became ; mohini — Mohini ; tvam — You ; mohini — Mohini ; tatra — there ; jagad-vimohini — bewildering the worlds.

Translation

O beautiful one, when Krsna became Dhanvantari, the physician who cures all sufferings, You became His medicine of transcendental nectar. When Krsna became Mohini, You also became Mohini, the beautiful girl that bewilders all the worlds.
Text 30

Verse text

harir nrsimhas tu nrsimha-lilaya
lila tada tvam nija-bhakta-vatsala
babhuva krsnas tu yada hi vamanah
kirtis tada tvam nija-loka-kirtita

Synonyms

harih — Krsna ; nrsimhah — Nrsimha ; tu — indeed ; nrsimha-lilaya — with the pastime of Nrsimha ; lila — the pastime ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; nija-bhakta — His own devotee ; vatsala — affectionate ; babhuva — became ; krsnah — Krsna ; tu — indeed ; yada — when ; hi — indeed ; vamanah — vamana ; kirtih — fame ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; nija-loka-kirtita — glorified by all the worlds.

Translation

When Krsna became Nrsimha You became His man-lion pastimes, which were so kind to His devotee. When Krsna became Vamana, You became His fame, which is chanted by the devotees.
Text 31

Verse text

harir yada bhargava-rupa-dhrk puman
dhara kutharasya tada tvam eva hi
sri-krsnacandro raghu-vamca-candrama
yada tada tvam janakasya nandini

Synonyms

harih — Krsna ; yada — when ; bhargava-rupa-dhrk — the form of Paracurama ; puman — man ; dhara — the sharpness ; kutharasya — of His ax ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed ; sri-krsnacandrah — Sri Krsna ; raghu-vamca-candrama — the moon of the

Translation

Raghu dynasty; yada - when; tada - then; tvam - You; janakasya - of Janaka; nandini - the daughter. When Krsna became Paracurama You became the sharpness of His ax. When Krsna became Rama, the moon of the Raghavas, You became Sita, the daughter of King Janaka.
Text 32

Verse text

sri-cargga-dhanva muni-badarayano
vedanta-krt tvam kila veda-laksana
sagkarsano madhava eva vrsnisu
tvam revati brahma-bhava samasthita

Synonyms

sri-cargga-dhanva — holding the cargga bow ; muni-badarayanah — Vyasa ; vedanta-krt — the author of Vedanta ; tvam — You ; kila — indeed ; veda-laksana — the explanations of the Vedas ; sagkarsanah — Sagkarsana ; madhava — Krsna ; eva — indeed ; vrsnisu — among the Vrsnis ; tvam — You ; revati — Revati ; brahma-bhava — Brahma-bhava ; samasthita — situated.

Translation

When Krsna, who holds the Sargga bow, becomes the sage Vyasa and writes the Vedanta-sutra, You become His commentary on the Vedas. When Krsna becomes Balarama among the Vrsnis, You become Brahma-bhava Revati.
Text 33

Verse text

buddho yada kaunapa-moha-karako
buddhis tada tvam jana-moha-karini
kalki yada dharma-patir bhavisyati
haris tada tvam sukrtir bhavisyati

Synonyms

buddhah — Buddha ; yada — when ; kaunapa-moha-karakah — bewildering the atheists ; buddhih — intelligence ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; jana-moha-karini — bwildering the people ; kalki — Kalki ; yada — when ; dharma-patih — the master of religion ; bhavisyati — will be ; harih — Krsna ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; sukrtih — piety ; bhavisyati — will be.

Translation

When Krsna becomes Buddha and bewilders the atheists, You will become the intelligence by which He bewilders them. When Krsna becomes Kalki, the master of religion, You will become His pious deeds.
Text 34

Verse text

sri-krsnacandro 'sti hi candra-mandale
radhe sada candra-mukhiti candrika
sri-krsna-suryo divi surya-mandale
surya-prabha tvam paridhi-pratisthita

Synonyms

sri-krsnacandrah — Sri Krsna ; asti — is ; hi — indeed ; candra-mandale — in the circle of the moon ; radhe — O Radha ; sada — always ; candra-mukhi — moon-faced ; iti — thus ; candrika — moonlight ; sri-krsna-suryah — the sun of Krsna ; divi — in the sky ; surya-mandale — in the circle of the sun ; surya-prabha — the sunlight ; tvam — You ; paridhi-pratisthita — the effulgence.

Translation

O moon-faced Radha, Sri Krsna is a moon, and You are His moonlight eternally. Sri Krsna is a sun, and You are His sunlight eternally.
Text 35

Verse text

indrah sadaste kila yadavendras
tatraiva radhe tu caci cacicvari
hiranya-reta hi harih parecvaro
hetih sada tvam hi hiranmayi para

Synonyms

indrah — Indra ; sada — always ; aste — is ; kila — indeed ; yadavendrah — the king of the Yadavas ; tatra — there ; eva — indeed ; radhe — O Radha ; tu — indeed ; caci — Saci ; cacicvari — saintly queen ; hiranya-reta — fire ; hi — indeed ; harih — Krsna ; parecvarah — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; hetih — light ; sada — always ; tvam — You ; hi — indeed ; hiranmayi — golden ; para — transcendental.

Translation

Krsna, the king of the Yadavas, is Indra, and You are His saintly queen Saci eternally. Krsna is a fire, and You are eternally His splendid light.
Text 36

Verse text

sri-raja-rajo hi virajate harir
virajase tvam tu nidhau nidhicvari
ksirabdhi-rupi tu haris tvam eva hi
taraggita-ksauma-sita taraggini

Synonyms

sri-raja-rajah — the king pf kings ; hi — indeed ; virajate — shines ; harih — Krsna ; virajase — You shine ; tvam — You ; tu — indeed ; nidhau — in the treasury ; nidhicvari — the queen of Kuvera ; ksirabdhi-rupi — the form of themilk ocean ; tu — indeed ; harih — Krsna ; tvam — You ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed ; taraggini — filled with waves.

Translation

Krsna is Kuvera, and You are the queen of His treasury. Krsna is the ocean of milk, and You are the silk-white waves on the ocean of milk.
Text 37

Verse text

bibhrad vapuh sarva-patir yada yada
tada tada tvam viditanurupini
jagan-mayo brahma-mayo harih svayam
jagan-mayi brahma-mayi tvam eva hi

Synonyms

bibhrat — manifesting ; vapuh — a form ; sarva-patih — the master of all ; yada — when ; yada — when ; tada — then ; tada — then ; tvam — You ; viditanurupini — a corresponding form ; jagan-mayah — who is the universe ; brahma-mayah — who is Brahman ; harih — Krsna ; svayam — personally ; jagan-mayi — become the universe ; brahma-mayi — becomes Brahman ; tvam — You ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed.

Translation

Whenever Lord Krsna, the master of all, assumes another form, You follow Him and assume the form of His companion. When He is the universal form or the impersonal Brahman, You also become the universal form or the impersonal Brahman.
Text 38

Verse text

athaiva so 'yam vraja-raja-nandano
jatasi radhe vrsabhanu-nandini
yabhyam krta sattva-mayi pracantaye
lila-caritrair lalitadi-lilaya

Synonyms

atha — then ; eva — indeed ; sah ayam — He ; vraja-raja-nandanah — the prince of Vraja ; jata — born ; asi — You are ; radhe — O Radha ; vrsabhanu-nandini — the dauighter of King Vrsabhanu ; yabhyam — by both ; krta — done ; sattva-mayi — transcendental goodness ; pracantaye — to pacify ; lila-caritraih — with transcendental pastimes ; lalitadi-lilaya — with playful and charming pastimes.

Translation

Now He is the son of Vraja's king, so now You are born as Vrsabhanu's daughter. With Your charming pastimes You bring peace and happiness to Your devotees.
Text 39

Verse text

krsnah svayam brahma param purano
lila tad-iccha-prakrtis tvam eva
parasparam sandhita-vigrahabhyam
namo yuvabhyam hari-radhikabhyam

Synonyms

krsnah — Krsna ; svayam — personally ; brahma — Brahman ; param — Supreme ; puranah — ancient ; lila — pastimes ; tad-iccha-prakrtih — the potency that fulfills His desires ; tvam — You ; eva — indeed ; parasparam — together ; sandhita-vigrahabhyam — wioth forms ; namah — obeisances ; yuvabhyam — to You ; hari-radhikabhyam — Radha and Krsna.

Translation

Krsna is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, and You are His pastimes and the potency that fulfills His desires. I offer my respectful obeisances to You, Sri Sri Radha and Krsna, the Supreme, whose forms are eternal.
Text 40

Verse text

grhana patram nija-natha-dattam
cokam param ma kuru radhike tvam
hrasvena kalena vidhaya karyam
tatragamisyami tad-ukta-vakyam

Synonyms

grhana — please take ; patram — letter ; nija-natha-dattam — given by Your Lord ; cokam — lament ; param — great ; ma — don't ; kuru — do ; radhike — O Radha ; tvam — You ; hrasvena — soon ; kalena — time ; vidhaya — placing ; karyam — duty ; tatra — there ; agamisyami — I will return ; tad-ukta-vakyam — His words.

Translation

O Radha, please take this letter. Don't lament. Krsna said, "Soon I will finish My duties here. Then I will return."
Text 41

Verse text

grhnidhvam adyaiva catani krsna-
dattani patrani su-maggalani
praty-arpitam yutha-catam ca gopyah
krsna-priyanam vraja-sundarinam

Synonyms

grhnidhvam — please take ; adya — today ; eva — indeed ; catani — hundreds ; krsna — by Krsna ; dattani — given ; patrani — letters ; su-maggalani — very auspoicious ; praty-arpitam — given to each ; yutha-catam — hundred groups ; ca — and ; gopyah — gs ; krsna-priyanam — dear to Krsna ; vraja-sundarinam — of the beautiful girls of Vraja.

Translation

Please also take these hundred very auspicious letters, one for each of the hundred groups of beautiful girls in Vraja. .pa Chapter Sixteen Sri Radha-gopy-acvasana Comforting Sri Radha and the Gopis
Text 1

Verse text

radha patram saggrhitva
ciro netre tatha ca hrt
nidhaya vacayitva tat
smrtva tat-pada-pagkajam

Synonyms

patram — the letter ; saggrhitva — taking ; cirah — head ; netre — eyes ; tatha — so ; ca — and ; hrt — heart ; nidhaya — placing ; vacayitva — reading ; tat — taht ; smrtva — remembering ; tat-pada-pagkajam — His lotus feet.

Translation

Taking the letter, placing it over Her head, eyes, and heart, and remembering Krsna's lotus feet, Radha read the letter aloud.
Text 2

Verse text

ati-prematura rajan
murcham apa param radha
yadavasya prapacyatah

Synonyms

ati-prematura — overcome with love ; rajan — O king ; mocayitva — shedding ; acru-santatim — many tears ; murcham — faintying ; apa — attained ; param — great ; radha — Radha ; yadavasya — as Uddhava ; prapacyatah — watched.

Translation

mocayitvacru-santatim O king, as Uddhava watched, Radha, overcome with love, shed many tears, and then fainted unconscious.
Text 3

Verse text

dvaraih puspa-rasaic ca sa
arcita camarandolaih
punac caitanyatam gatah

Synonyms

kugkumaguru-patira-dvaraih — with kunkuma, aguru, and sandal ; puspa-rasaih — with the nectar of flowers ; ca — and ; sa — She ; arcita — worshiped ; camara — camaras ; andolaih — swinging ; punah — again ; caitanyatam — consciousness ; gatah — attained.

Translation

kugkumaguru-patira- Anointed with kugkuma, aguru, sandal, and flower-nectar, and fanned with camaras, Radha regained consciousness.
Text 4

Verse text

radham kamala-locanam
viksyoddhavas tatah gopyo
mumucuc cacru-santatim

Synonyms

viyoga — of separataion ; sindhu — into an ocean ; sammagnam — plunged ; radham — Radha ; kamala-locanam — lotus-eyed ; viksya — seeing ; uddhavah — Uddhava ; tatah — then ; gopyah — the gopis ; mumucuh — shed ; ca — and ; acru-santatim — many tears.

Translation

viyoga-sindhu-sammagnam Seeing lotus-eyed Radha drowning in an ocean of despair by Lord Krsna's absence, Uddhava and the gopis shed many tears.
Text 5

Verse text

tasam acru-pravahena
rajan vrndavane vane
sadyah kahlara-samyukto
jato lila-sarovarah

Synonyms

tasam — of them ; acru-pravahena — by the stream of tears ; rajan — O king ; vrndavane — in Vrndavana ; vane — forest ; sadyah — at once ; kahlara-samyuktah — with flowers ; jatah — born ; lila-sarovarah — Lila-sarovara.

Translation

O king, from the stream of their tears Lake Lila-sarovara, filled with many lotus flowers, was created at that moment.
Text 6

Verse text

drstva pitva ca su-snatva
crutva cemam katham narah
sri-krsnam prapnuyan nrpa

Synonyms

drstva — seeing ; pitva — drinking ; ca — and ; su-snatva — bathing ; crutva — hearing ; ca — and ; imam — this ; katham — narration ; narah — a person ; karma — of karma ; bandha — from the bondage ; vinirmuktah — freed ; sri-krsnam — Sri Krsna ; prapnuyat — attains ; nrpa — O king.

Translation

karma-bandha-vinirmuktah O king, a person who sees, drinks from, or bathes in that lake, or who listens to this story, becoms free from the bonds of karma and attains Lord Krsna.
Text 7

Verse text

athoddhava-mukhac chrutva
sri-krsnagamanam punah
papracchuh kucalam sarvam
sri-krsnasya mahatmanah

Synonyms

atha — then ; uddhava — of Uddhava ; mukhat — from the mouth ; chrutva — jhearing ; sri-krsna — of Lord Krsna ; agamanam — of the return ; punah — again ; papracchuh — asked ; kucalam — welfare ; sarvam — all ; sri-krsnasya — of Sri Krsna ; mahatmanah — the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

After hearing from Uddhava's mouth that Lord Krsna would return, the gopis asked about Lord Krsna's welfare.
Text 8

Verse text

ananda-dam sri-vraja-raja-nandanam
draksyami kasmin samaye ghana-prabham
ghanam mayuriva samutsuka bhrcam
candram cakoriva tad-iksanotsuka

Synonyms

sri-radha uvaca — Sri Radha said ; ananda-dam — giving bliss ; sri-vraja-raja-nandanam — the prince of Vraja ; draksyami — I will see ; kasmin — at what ; samaye — time ; ghana-prabham — splendid as a monsoon cloud ; ghanam — a cloud ; mayuri — a peacock ; iva — like ; samutsuka — eager ; bhrcam — greatly ; candram — the moon ; cakori — a cakori bird ; iva — like ; tad-iksanotsuka — eager to see.

Translation

sri-radhovaca Sri Radha said: When will I see Vraja's delightful prince splendid as a monsoon cloud? I yearn to see Him as a peacock yearns to see a monsoon cloud or a cakori bird yearns to see the moon.
Text 9

Verse text

kasmin ku-kale viraho babhuva me
yenaiva kau kalpa-samah ksanah ksanah
nicithiniyam dvi-parardha-helanam
karoti govinda-pada-dvayam vina

Synonyms

kasmin — at what? ; ku-kale — wretched time ; virahah — separation ; babhuva — was ; me — of Me ; yena — by which ; eva — indeed ; kau — on the earth ; kalpa-samah — like a kalpa ; ksanah — moment ; ksanah — moment ; nicithini — night ; iyam — the ; dvi-parardha — Brahma's lifetime ; helanam — mocking ; karoti — does ; govinda-pada-dvayam — Lord Krsna's feet ; vina — without.

Translation

Since that painful time when I was separated from Him, every moment has become a kalpa. Without Krsna's feet, every night mocks the span of Brahma's life.
Text 10

Verse text

kaccit kadacid vrajam agamisyati
karoti kim tatra harir vadacu me
adyaiva yatnena dhrtah kilasavah
prasahya niryanti mrsa-giraturah

Synonyms

kaccit — whether? ; kadacit — sometime ; vrajam — to Vraja ; agamisyati — will return ; karoti — does ; kim — what? ; tatra — there ; harih — Krsna ; vada — tell ; acu — at once ; me — to Me ; adya — now ; eva — indeed ; yatnena — with care ; dhrtah — held ; kila — indeed ; asavah — life-breath ; prasahya — forcibly ; niryanti — leaves ; mrsa-gira — by lies ; aturah — troubled.

Translation

Will Krsna return? What does He do there. Please tell Me. With a great struggle I have held onto My life-breath. If you torture it with many lies, it will quickly escape.
Text 11

Verse text

drstva ksanam tvam mama hrc ca citalam
jatam prasannasmi samagate tvayi
yatha prasanna janakatmaja pura
lagka-puram vayu-sute samagate

Synonyms

drstva — seeing ; ksanam — for a moment ; tvam — you ; mama — My ; hrt — heart ; ca — and ; citalam — coolness ; jatam — manifested ; prasanna — satisfied ; asmi — I am ; samagate — attained ; tvayi — you ; yatha — as ; prasanna — satisfied ; janakatmaja — Sita-devi ; pura — in ancient times ; lagka-puram — to the city of Lanka ; vayu-sute — when Hanuman ; samagate — came.

Translation

When I first saw you My feverish heart became cool. Now that you have come, I am happy. I am happy as Sita was happy when Hanuman came to Lagka City.
Text 12

Verse text

acam vidhaya nija-moha-dhanam visrjya
visrjya vakya-gaditam mathuram gato yah
tasyapi patra-likhitam hy amrtam na manye
tam canayasva kila mantra-vidam varistha

Synonyms

acam — hope ; vidhaya — placing ; nija-moha-dhanam — a wealth of illusions ; visrjya — abanonding ; visrjya — abandoning ; vakya-gaditam — words ; mathuram — to Mathura ; gatah — went ; yah — who ; tasya — of Him ; api — also ; patra-likhitam — letter ; hi — indeed ; amrtam — nectar ; na — not ; manye — think ; tam — Him ; ca — and ; anayasva — bring ; kila — indeed ; mantra-vidam — of couselors ; varistha — O best.

Translation

I have given up all hope. I have thrown away a host of illusions. Now that He has gone to Mathura, I do not believe His words. I do not think His letter has words of nectar. O Uddhava, O best of counselors, please bring Him here.
Text 13

Verse text

sri-uddhava uvaca
gatva purim tava param viraham nivedya-
thargham vidhaya nija-netra-jalena radhe
nitva harim tava purah punar agato 'smi
ma cokam adya kuru me capathas tvad-agghreh

Synonyms

sri-uddhava uvaca — Sri Uddhava said ; gatva — having gone ; purim — to the city ; tava — of You ; param — then ; viraham — separation ; nivedya — appealing ; atha — then ; argham — argha ; vidhaya — offering ; nija-netra-jalena — with tears from the eyes ; radhe — O Radha ; nitva — bringing ; harim — Krsna ; tava — of You ; purah — in the presence ; punah — again ; agatah — come ; asmi — I am ; ma — don't ; cokam — lament ; adya — now ; kuru — do ; me — of me ; capathah — the promise ; tvad-agghreh — of Your feet.

Translation

Sri Uddhava said: I will go to Mathura City, describe to Him how You feel in His absence, offer Him arghya with the tears from my eyes, and then, O Radha, I will bring Krsna to You. Please don't lament. I place this promise at Your feet.
Text 14

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
atha prasanna sri-radha
candrakantau mani cubhau
rasa-ragge candra-dattau
uddhavaya dadau nrpa

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; atha — then ; prasanna — satisfied ; sri-radha — Sri Radha ; candrakantau — a candrakanti jewel ; mani — jewel ; cubhau — splendid ; rasa-ragge — in the rasa-dance circle ; candra-dattau — placed by the moon ; uddhavaya — to Uddhava ; dadau — gave ; nrpa — O king.

Translation

Sri Narada said: O king, happy to hear this, Sri Radha gave to Uddhava two candrakanta jewels that moonlight had placed in the rasa-dance arena.
Text 15

Verse text

sahasra-dala-padme dve
datte candramasa pura
uddhavaya dadau radha
prasanna bhakta-vatsala

Synonyms

sahasra-dala-padme — thousand petal lotuses ; dve — two ; datte — placed ; candramasa — by moonlight ; pura — before ; uddhavaya — to uddhava ; dadau — gave ; radha — Radha ; prasanna — satisfied ; bhakta-vatsala — affectionate to the devotees.

Translation

Then Radha, who is kind to the devotees, happily gave Uddhava two thousand-petal lotuses that had also been created by moonlight.
Text 16

Verse text

chatram simhasanam divyam
camare dve manohare
dadau tasmai hari-priya

Synonyms

chatram — parasol ; simhasanam — throne ; divyam — splendid ; camare — camara ; dve — two ; manohare — beautiful ; sri-krsna — of Sri Krsna ; manasa — from the mind ; udbhute — born ; dadau — gave ; tasmai — to him ; hari-priya — Lord Krsna's beloved.

Translation

sri-krsna-manasodbhute Then Krsna's beloved Radha gave to Uddhava a parasol, a a splendid throne, and two beautiful camaras that had been created by Lord Krsna's thoughts.
Text 17

Verse text

aicvaryam jnana-sampannam
sada tava bhavisyati

Synonyms

aicvaryam — opulence ; jnana-sampannam — with knowledge ; sarva-decika-decikam — showing all places ; krsna-samyoga-kartrtvam — bringing the company of Lord Krsna ; sada — always ; tava — of you ; bhavisyati — will be.

Translation

sarva-decika-decikam krsna-samyoga-kartrtvam Then She said to Uddhava, "You will always have a great wealth of transcendental knowledge, knowledge that enables you to meet Lord Krsna."
Text 18

Verse text

bhaktim nirguna-bhavadhyam
jnanam vijnana-sahitam
vairagyam sa dadau punah

Synonyms

bhaktim — devotion ; nirguna-bhavadhyam — opulent with love that is beyond the modes of material nature ; prema-laksana-samyutam — wityh love ; jnanam — knowledge ; vijnana-sahitam — with wisdom ; vairagyam — renunciation ; sa — She ; dadau — gave ; punah — again.

Translation

prema-laksana-samyutam The She gave him devotion beyond the modes of nature, pure love for Krsna, knowledge, wisdom, and renunciation.
Text 19

Verse text

cagkhacuda ca harina-
nitam cuda-manim cubham
candranana dadau tasmai
uddhavaya videha-rat

Synonyms

cagkhacuda — the crest-jewel ; ca — and ; harina — by Krsna ; anitam — brought ; cuda-manim — the crest jewel ; cubham — beautiful ; candranana — moon-faced ; dadau — gave ; tasmai — to him ; uddhavaya — Uddhava ; videha-rat — O king of Videha.

Translation

O king of Videha, then moon-faced Radha gave to Uddhava the beautiful crest-jewel Lord Krsna took from Sagkhacuda.
Text 20

Verse text

tatha gopi-ganah sarve
bhusananam cayam cubham
daduh prasanna he rajann
uddhavaya mahatmane

Synonyms

tatha — then ; gopi-ganah — the gopis ; sarve — all ; bhusananam — of ornaments ; ca — and ; ayam — this ; cubham — beautiful ; daduh — gave ; prasanna — happy ; he — O ; rajann — king ; uddhavaya — to Uddhava ; mahatmane — noble-hearted.

Translation

Then all the gopis happily gave many ornaments to noble-hearted Uddhava.
Text 21

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
crutva vacac copagaveh cubhartham
sukham gatayam kila radhikayam
ucus tam arad vraja-gopa-vadhvah
sadah-sthitam krsna-sakham prthak tah

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; crutva — hearing ; vacah — words ; ca — and ; upagaveh — pf Uddhava ; cubhartham — to make happy ; sukham — happiness ; gatayam — attained ; kila — indeed ; radhikayam — Radha ; ucuh — said ; tam — to him ; arat — near ; vraja-gopa-vadhvah — teh vraja-gopis ; sadah — in the assembly ; sthitam — situated ; krsna-sakham — to Krsna's friend ; prthak — specific ; tah — they.

Translation

Sri Narada said: When She heard Uddhava's comforting words, Sri Radha became happy. Then the Vraja-gopis surrounded Krsna's friend Uddhava and spoke.
Text 22

Verse text

sri-gopya ucuh
yac ca patra-likhitam vadacu nah
kintu tac ca harinoktam adbhutam
tvam paravara-vidam hareh sakha
mantra-vittama tadakrtir mahan

Synonyms

sri-gopya ucuh — the gopis said ; yat — what ; ca — and ; patra-likhitam — letter ; vada — please speak ; acu — at once ; nah — to us ; kintu — however ; tat — that ; ca — and ; harina — by Lord Krsna' uktam—said ; adbhutam — wonderful ; tvam — you ; paravara-vidam — all-knowing ; hareh — of Krsna ; sakha — the friend ; mantra-vittama — O best of counselors ; tadakrtih — His form ; mahan — exalted.

Translation

The gopis said: O best of counselors, You are a very important person. You know everything. Your form is like Krsna's and You are Krsna's personal friend. Please read Krsna's wonderful letter to us.
Text 23

Verse text

sri-uddhava uvaca
yatha smaratha devecam
tatha yusman smaraty asau
anuvelam gopa-vadhvah
pacyato me na samcayah

Synonyms

sri-uddhava uvaca — Sri Uddhava said ; yatha — as ; smaratha — you remember ; devecam — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tatha — so ; yusman — you ; smarati — remembers ; asau — He ; anuvelam — always ; gopa-vadhvah — the gopis ; pacyatah — seeing ; me — of me ; na — not ; samcayah — doubt.

Translation

Sri Uddhava said: As you remember Lord Krsna, so He always remembers you. O gopis, I have seen this myself. There is no doubt of this.
Text 24

Verse text

ekada mam samahuya
smrtva yusman rahas-karah
kathayam asa sandecam
citta-stham nanda-nandanah

Synonyms

ekada — once ; mam — me ; samahuya — calling ; smrtva — remembering ; yusman — you ; rahas-karah — in a private room ; kathayam asa — told ; sandecam — instruction ; citta-stham — in His heart ; nanda-nandanah — Krsna.

Translation

One day Lord Krsna called me to His private room and from His heart dicatated the following letter:.
Text 25

Verse text

sri-bhagavan uvaca
ganesu saktam kila bandhanaya
raktam manah pumsi ca muktaye syat
mano dvayoh karanam ahur araj
jitvatha tat kau vicared asaggah

Synonyms

sri-bhagavan uvaca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said ; ganesu — for the groups ; saktam — attachment ; kila — indeed ; bandhanaya — for bodange ; raktam — affectionate ; manah — the heart ; pumsi — in a person ; ca — and ; muktaye — for liberation ; syat — is ; manah — the heart ; dvayoh — of both ; karanam — the cause ; ahuh — said ; arat — near ; jitva — conquering ; atha — then ; tat — that ; kau — on the earth ; vicaret — considers ; asaggah — without attachment.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Attraction to the modes of material nature lead to bondage, but attraction to the Supreme Personality of Godhead leads to liberation. Thus the mind may be the cause of bondage or the cause of liberation. The wise therefore control the mind and remain unattached to the world of matter.
Text 26

Verse text

yada svayam brahma parat param mam
adhyatma-yogena vicaradena
janati sarvatra gatam viveki

Synonyms

yada — when ; svayam — Himself ; brahma — Brahman ; parat — than the greatest ; param — greater ; mam — Me ; adhyatma-yogena — by spiritual yoga ; vicaradena — expert ; janati — knows ; sarvatra — everywhere ; gatam — gone ; viveki — wise ; tada — then ; vijahyan — should renounce ; manasah — of the mind ; kasayam — attachment to material things ; yavat — as ; ghanah — a cloud ; madhya-gatah — in the middle ; tad-utthitah — risen ; sva-karma-rupam — the form of one's own karma ; na — not ; hi — indeed ; drk — seeing ; prapacyati — sees.

Translation

tada vijahyan manasah kasayam yavad ghano madhya-gatas tad-utthitah sva-karma-rupam na hi drk prapacyati By expertly practicing yoga, a wise person sees Me, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, everywhere, and when he sees Me, his mind is no longer attracted to material things. As one cannot see clouds chased away by the rising sun, so he cannot see the results of his past fruitive acts.
Text 27

Verse text

sthulac ca dure 'smi na tattvato 'gganas
tasmad dhi yogam kurutatra sadhanam
yat sagkhya-bhavaih kila gamyate padam
tad yoga-bhavair api gamyate svatah

Synonyms

sthulat — from the gross ; ca — and ; dure — far ; asmi — I am ; na — not ; tattvatah — in truth ; agganah — O gopis ; tasmat — therefore ; hi — indeed ; yogam — yoga ; kuruta — do ; atra — here ; sadhanam — method ; yat — what ; sagkhya-bhavaih — by sankhya-yoga ; kila — indeed ; gamyate — is attained ; padam — state ; tat — that ; yoga-bhavaih — by yoga ; api — also ; gamyate — is attained ; svatah — spontaneously.

Translation

O gopis, I am not far from this world. You should prasctice yoga. By following the paths of sagkhya or yoga, you will attain Me. .pa Chapter Seventeen Sri Krsna-smarane gopi-vakya The Gopis Describe Their Remembrance of Sri Krsna
Text 1

Verse text

sri-narada uvaca
crutva sri-krsna-sandecam
prasanna gopa-vallabhah
acru-mukhyo baspa-kanthyam
ucur aupagavim nrpa

Synonyms

sri-narada uvaca — Sri Narada said ; crutva — hearing ; sri-krsna-sandecam — Sri Krsna's lketter ; prasanna — happy ; gopa-vallabhah — the gopis ; acru-mukhyah — tears in their faces ; baspa-kanthyam — tears on their necks ; ucuh — said ; aupagavim — to Uddhava ; nrpa — O king.

Translation

Sri Narada said: O king, happy to hear Sri Krsna's letter, and tears streaming down their faces and necks, the gopis spoke.
Text 2

Verse text

sri-goloka-vasinya ucuh
videcam gatavan krsnas
tykatva purva-priyan janan
tad upary alikhad yogam
aho nirmohata-balam

Synonyms

sri-goloka-vasinya ucuh — the residents of Sri Goloka said ; videcam — to a foreign land ; gatavan — gone ; krsnah — Krsna ; tykatva — abandoning ; purva-priyan — those who were formerly dear ot Him ; janan — people ; tat — that ; upari — above ; alikhat — wrote ; yogam — yoga ; ahah — Oh ; nirmohata-balam — the power of freedom from illusion.

Translation

The gopis from Sri Goloka said: Krsna left the people He used to love and went far away. Now He writes us a letter saying yoga makes one free from illusions.
Text 3

Verse text

sri-dvara-palika ucuh
cakore glauh pagkaje 'rko
bhramare pagkajam yatha
catake ca ghanah pritim
na karoti kadacana

Synonyms

sri-dvara-palika ucuh — the doorkeepers said ; cakore — a cakor bird ; glauh — the moon ; pagkaje — a lotus ; arkah — the sun ; bhramare — a bee ; pagkajam — a lotus ; yatha — as ; catake — a cataka bird ; ca — and ; ghanah — a cloud ; pritim — love ; na — not ; karoti — does ; kadacana — ever.

Translation

The gopi doorkeepers said: As the moon never loves the cakora birds, as the sun never loves the lotuses, as the lotus never loves the bumblebees, and as the cloud never loves the cataka birds, so Lord Krsna never loved us.
Text 4

Verse text

sri-crggara-prakara ucuh
candra-mitram cakoro 'sti
sakhyo vahni-kanah sada
vidhatra yad vilikhitam
tan nyunam na bhaved iha

Synonyms

sri-crggara-prakara ucuh — the gopi decorators said ; candra-mitram — the friend of the moon ; cakorah — a cakora bird ; asti — is ; sakhyah — friends ; vahni-kanah — sparks ; sada — always ; vidhatra — by the creator ; yat — what ; vilikhitam — scratched ; tan — that ; nyunam — insignificant ; na — not ; bhavet — is ; iha — here.

Translation

The gopi decorators said: O friends, cakora birds and sparks are always friendly to the moon. That is their destiny, written by fate, and it cannot be cast away.
Text 5

Verse text

sri-cayyopakarika ucuh
vyadho 'pi hatva hi mrgan
smarati tvaram aturah
kataksaih sva-priyan hatva
nirmohi na smared aho

Synonyms

sri-cayyopakarika ucuh — the decorators of the couch said ; vyadhah — a hunter ; api — also ; hatva — having killed ; hi — indeed ; mrgan — deer ; smarati — remembers ; tvaram — quickly ; aturah — agitated ; kataksaih — with sidelong glances ; sva-priyan — dear to him ; hatva — having killed ; nirmohi — unagitated ; na — not ; smaret — remembers ; ahah — Oh.

Translation

The gopi couch-decorators said: Killing a deer, a hunter is excited and remembers his prey. Krsna is different. He killed us with sidelong glances, but now He is peaceful and does not remember us at all.
Text 6

Verse text

sri-parsadakhya ucuh
jatam viraha-jam duhkham
nanyo vetti kadacana
yatha kantaka-viddhaggo
vidvan va viddha-kantakah

Synonyms

sri-parsadakhya ucuh — the g associates said ; jatam — manifested ; viraha-jam — born from separation ; duhkham — suffering ; na — not ; anyah — another ; vetti — knows ; kadacana — ever ; yatha — as ; kantaka-viddhaggah — limbs wounded by throns ; vidvan — a wise man ; va — or ; viddha-kantakah — wounded by thorns.

Translation

The gopi associates said: No one else can understand how we suffer in Krsna's absence. Only a person who has been pricked by thorns can understand the pain of being pricked.
Text 7

Verse text

sri-vrndavana-palika ucuh
animittam prema-saukhyam
animitto hi vetti tat
sa-nimitto na janati
rasam karmendriyam yatha

Synonyms

sri-vrndavana-palika ucuh — the protectors of Sri Vrndavana said ; animittam — causeless ; prema-saukhyam — the happiness of love ; animittah — causeless ; hi — indeed ; vetti — knows ; tat — that ; sa-nimittah — with a cause ; na — not ; janati — knows ; rasam — the taste ; karmendriyam — the working senses ; yatha — as.

Translation

The gopi protectors of Sri Vrndavana said: One who loves selflessly can understand selfless love. A selfish person cannot understand it, as arms and legs cannot understand the sweetness of nectar.
Text 8

Verse text

sri-govardhana-vasinya ucuh
purandhri-prema-krd yo vai
sairandhri-nayako 'bhavat
cailaukobhis tu kim tasya
bahuna kathitena kim

Synonyms

sri-govardhana-vasinya ucuh — - the residents of Sri Govardhana said ; purandhri — for the city girls ; prema — love ; krt — doing ; yah — who ; vai — indeed ; sairandhri-nayakah — the lover of the maidservant ; abhavat — became ; cailaukobhih — by they who live on the hill ; tu — indeed ; kim — what? ; tasya — of Him ; bahuna — more ; kathitena — said ; kim — what?

Translation

The gopis of Govardhana Hill said: Now He loves the girls in Mathura City. Now He loves the maidservant Kubja. Why should He love the girls of Govardhana Hill? What more need we say?
Text 9

Verse text

sri-kunja-vidhayika ucuh
ha madhavi-kunja-punje
sva-drg-laksmi-krto yo vai
tasyeyam cruyate katha

Synonyms

sri-kunja-vidhayika ucuh — the gopis that decorated the forest groves ; ha — O ; madhavi-kunja-pu 24je — in the groves of madhavi vines ; gu 24jat — buzzing ; matta — maddened ; madhuvrate — bees ; sva-drk — own eyes ; laksmi — by the marks ; krtah — done ; yah — who ; vai — indeed ; tasya — of Him ; iyam — thus ; cruyate — is heard ; katha — the topics.

Translation

gunjan-matta-madhuvrate The gopis that decorate the forest groves said: We still see the marks Krsna left in the forest groves of madhavi vines and maddened buzzing bees. We still hear the stories of His pastimes.
Text 10

Verse text

sri-nikunja-vasinya ucuh
vrndavane matta-milinda-punje
canaic calantam sa-balam sa-gopam
sa-godhanam nanda-sutam bhajamah

Synonyms

sri-nikunja-vasinya ucuh — the gopis living in the forest said ; vrndavane — in Vrndavana ; matta-milinda-punje — filled with maddened bees ; kalindaja-tira — on the Yamuna's shore ; kadamba-kunje — in the kadamba forewst ; canaih — slowly ; calantam — walking ; sa-balam — with Balarama ; sa-gopam — with the gopas ; sa-godhanam — with the cows ; nanda-sutam — Krsna ; bhajamah — we worship.

Translation

kalindaja-tira-kadamba-kunje The gopis that stayed in the forest said: We worship Krsna who, accompanied by Balarama, the gopas, and the cows, slowly walked by the Yamuna's shore in Vrndavana's kadamba forest filled with intoxicated bees.
Text 11

Verse text

sri-jahnavi-yutha uvaca
kada tathasmat-samayo bhavisyati
yatha purandhri-samayah pradrcyate
cokam param ma kuruta vrajagganah
sada na kasyapi jayah parajayah

Synonyms

sri-jahnavi-yutha uvaca — the group,of gopis headed by Jahnavi said ; kada — when? ; tatha — then ; asmat — of us ; samayah — the time ; bhavisyati — will be ; yatha — as ; purandhri-samayah — the time of the city girls ; pradrcyate — is seen ; cokam — lament ; param — great ; ma — don't ; kuruta — do ; vrajagganah — O girls of Vraja ; sada — always ; na — not ; kasyapi — of someone ; jayah — the victor ; parajayah — the defeated.

Translation

The group of gopis headed by Sri Jahnavi said: O girls of Vraja, don't lament, saying, "Now is the time for the girls of Mathura City. When will our time come?" The winner and the loser there will always be.
Text 12

Verse text

sri-yamuna-yutha uvaca
vidhatur na daya kincid
yunakti viyunakti yah
bhutani sakalany eva
kridanani yatharbhakah

Synonyms

sri-yamuna-yutha uvaca — the group,of gopis headed by Sri Yamuna said ; vidhatuh — of the creator ; na — not ; daya — mercy ; kincit — at all ; yunakti — brings together ; viyunakti — separates ; yah — who ; bhutani — living entities ; sakalani — all ; eva — indeed ; kridanani — toys ; yatha — as ; arbhakah — a child.

Translation

The group of gopis headed by Sri Yamuna said: The creator Brahma is not kind. He joins and separates the living entities like a child playing with toys.
Text 13

Verse text

sri-rama-yutha uvaca
dasi tv idanim tu kulinatam gata
ku-rupini rupavati babhav aho
catur-dinair dundubhi-nada-karini

Synonyms

sri-rama-yutha uvaca — te group of gopis headed by Sri Rama said ; kubja-pura — crooked before ; adya — now ; rju-samana-vigraha — straight ; dasi — maidservant ; tv — indeed ; idanim — now ; tu — indeed ; gata — attained ; ku-rupini — ugly ; rupavati — beautiful ; babhau — manifested ; ahah — Oh ; catur-dinaih — with four days ; dundubhi-nada-karini — sounding dundubhi drums.

Translation

kubja-puradyarju-samana-vigraha The group of gopis headed by Sri Rama said: The girl Kubja was crooked and now she is straight. She was a lowly maidservant and now she is exalted and worthy of honor. She was ugly and now she is beautiful. For her the victory drums sounded for four days.
Text 14

Verse text

sri-vijaya-yutha ucuh
sada na kasyapi bhuja priyamse
sada vasanto na sada yuva syat
indro na rajyam kurute sadayam
catur-dinair manam alagkarotu

Synonyms

sri-vijaya-yutha ucuh — the groups headed by Vijaya said ; sada — always ; na — not ; kasyapi — of someone ; bhuja — the arms ; priyamse — on the beloved's shoulder ; sada — always ; vasantah — springtime ; na — not ; sada — always ; yuva — youth ; syat — is ; indrah — Indra ; na — not ; rajyam — kingdom ; kurute — does ; sada — always ; ayam — He ; catur-dinaih — with four days ; manam — honor ; alagkarotu — may decorate.

Translation

The groups of gopis headed by Sri Vijaya said: The arm is not on the beloved's shoulder eternally. Springtime is not eternal. Youth is not eternal. Indra does not rule his kingdom eternally. For four days Kubja was glorified.
Text 15

Verse text

sri-lalita-yutha uvaca
rasabhisekam vinivarya manthara
cakara vighnam kila kosale pure
kubjaiva seyam mathura-pure gata
kubjaiva kim kim na karoti gopikah

Synonyms

sri-lalita-yutha uvaca — the groups of gopis headed by Sri Lalita said ; rama — of Rama ; abhisekam — the coronation-bathing ; vinivarya — stopping ; manthara — Manthara ; cakara — did ; vighnam — obstacle ; kila — indeed ; kosale pure — in Ayodhya ; kubja — Kubja ; eva — indeed ; sa iyam — she ; mathura-pure — in Mathura City ; gata — gone ; kubja — Kubja ; eva — indeed ; kim — what? ; kim — what? ; na — not ; karoti — does ; gopikah — the gopis.

Translation

The groups of gopis headed by Sri Lalita said: The girl Kubja in Mathura City had been Manthara in Ayodhya, where she stopped the coronation of Lord Ramacandra. O gopis, what offense had Kubja not committed?
Text 16

Verse text

sri-vicakha-yutha uvaca
go-caranayanucarair vrajantam
prabodhayantam sva-puram viravaih
mattebha-yanam hi vidambayantam
sri-nanda-sunum na hi vismaramah

Synonyms

sri-vicakha-yutha uvaca — the groups of gopis headed by Sri Vicakha said ; go-caranaya — for herding the cows ; anucaraih — - with associates ; vrajantam — walking ; prabodhayantam — waking ; sva-puram — His town ; viravaih — with sounds ; mattebha-yanam — the walking of an intocxicated elephant ; hi — indeed ; vidambayantam — mocking ; sri-nanda-sunum — Sri Krsna ; na — not ; hi — indeed ; vismaramah — we forget.

Translation

The groups of gopis headed by Sri Vicakha said: We have not forgotten Nanda's son, Krsna, who wakened the entire village with the great clamor He made as He went with His friends to herd the cows, His walking mocking the graceful steps of intoxicated elephants.
Text 17

Verse text

sri-maya-yutha uvaca
sagkoca-vithisu pate pragrhya
prasahya dorbhyam hrdaye nidhaya
anyonyam akarsana-harsa-bhitir
grhan harim tam hi kada nayamah

Synonyms

sri-maya-yutha uvaca — the groups of gopis headed by Sri Maya said ; sagkoca-vithisu — on the narrow path ; pate — gone ; pragrhya — taking ; prasahya — forcibly ; dorbhyam — with both arms ; hrdaye — on the heart ; nidhaya — placing ; anyonyam — together ; akarsana — pulling ; bhitih — fear ; grhan — to the homes ; harim — Krsna ; tam — Him ; hi — indeed ; kada — when? ; nayamah — we lead.

Translation

The groups of gopis headed by Sri Maya said: When will we ambush Krsna on the narrow path and with both arms forcibly hold Him to our hearts? When, happy and frightened, will we take Him to our homes?
Text 18

Verse text

sri-asta-sakhya ucuh
viksya nanda-sutam agga sundaram
netram adya na jagad vipacyati
nanda-raja-tanaye purim sthite
kim bhavisyati vadacu nas tvaram

Synonyms

sri-asta-sakhyah ucuh — the eight gopi friends said ; viksya — seeing ; nanda-sutam — Krsna ; agga — O noble one ; sundaram — handsome ; netram — the eye ; adya — now ; na — not ; jagat — the universe ; vipacyati — sees ; nanda-raja-tanaye — on Krsna ; purim — the city ; sthite — situated ; kim — what? ; bhavisyati — will be ; vada — please tell ; acu — at once ; nah — to us ; tvaram — quickly.

Translation

The eight gopi friends said: Today our eyes see only the handsome son of King Nanda and they cannot see anything of the material world. Now that Krsna is in Mathura City, what will happen next? O gentle Uddhava, please tell us at once.
Text 19

Verse text

sri-sodaca-sakhya ucuh
venu-nada-madhura-dhvanim vane
sannicamya kusumesu-vardhanam
crotra-yugmam iha nah crnoti no
vicva-gitam uta va yacah param

Synonyms

sri-sodaca-sakhya ucuh — the sixteen gopi friends said ; venu-nada-madhura-dhvanim — the sweet sound of the flute ; vane — in the forest ; sannicamya — hearing ; kusumesu-vardhanam — increasing amorous desires ; crotra-yugmam — ears ; iha — here ; nah — of us ; crnoti — hear ; nah — not ; vicva-gitam — the son of the world ; uta — indeed ; va — or ; yacah — fame ; param — great.

Translation

The sixteen gopi friends said: When they hear the sweet musaic of Krsna's flute in the forest, our ears cannot hear any other music in the entire world. Our ears do not think any other music is sweet and glorious.
Text 20

Verse text

sri-dvatrimcat-sakhya ucuh
pritya sva-mitram hi ripum nayena
lubdham dhanaic ca dvijam adarena
gurum pranamai rasikam rasena
nirmohinam kena vaci-karoti

Synonyms

sri-dvatrimcat-sakhya ucuh — the thirty-two gopi freinds said ; pritya — - with love ; sva-mitram — own friend ; hi — indeed ; ripum — enemy ; nayena — by leading ; lubdham — greedy ; dhanaih — with wealth ; ca — also ; dvijam — a brahmana ; adarena — with respect ; gurum — a guru ; pranamai — bow ; rasikam — nectarean ; rasena — with nectar ; nirmohinam — not bewildered ; kena — by what? ; vaci-karoti — bring under control.

Translation

The thirty-two gopi friends said: With love one makes a friend into a submissive servant. With superior logic one makes a friend into a submissive servant. With money one makes a greedy miser into a submissive servant. With worship and honor one makes a brahmana into a submissive servant. With bowing down again and again one makes a guru into a submissive servant. With beautiful things sweet as nectar one makes a person searching after nectar into a submissive servant. With what does one make a person who can never be bewildered into a submissive servant?
Text 21

Verse text

sri-cruti-rupa ucuh
yaj-jagaradisu bhavesu param hy ahetur
hetusvid asya vicaranti gunac ca yena
naitad vicanti mahad-indriya-deva-sagghas
tasmai namo 'gnim iva vistrta-visphuliggah

Synonyms

sri-cruti-rupa ucuh — the gopis that had been Personified Vedas said ; yaj-jagaradisu — beginning with wakefulness ; bhavesu — in the states of being ; param — supreme ; hi — indeed ; ahetuh — causeless ; hetusvit — cause ; asya — of Him ; vicaranti — consider ; gunah — the modes ; ca — and ; yena — by whom ; na — not ; etat — this ; vicanti — enter ; mahat — mahat-tattva ; indriya — senses ; deva — demigods ; sagghah — groups ; tasmai — to Him ; namah — obeisances ; agnim — fire ; iva — like ; vistrta-visphuliggah — sparks.

Translation

The gopis that had been Personified Vedas said: We offer our respectful obeisances to Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the cause of wakefulness, dream, and sleep, but nothing outside of Himself is the cause of Him. Pushed by Him, the modes of material nature act. The mahat-tattva, senses, and demigods have no power over Him. He is a blazing fire and all things that exist are sparks from Him.
Text 22

Verse text

sri-rsi-rupa ucuh
naivecitum prabhur ayam balinam baliyan
maya na cabda uta no visayi-karoti
tad brahma purnam amrtam paramam pracantam
cuddham parat parataram caranam gatah smah

Synonyms

sri-rsi-rupa ucuh — the gopis that had been sages said ; na — not ; eva — indeed ; icitum — to dominate ; prabhuh — the Lord ; ayam — He ; balinam — of the strong ; baliyan — the strongest ; maya — illusion ; na — not ; cabda — sound ; uta — indeed ; nah — not ; visayi-karoti — brings into the range pf perception ; tat — that ; brahma — Brahman ; purnam — perfect ; amrtam — eternal ; paramam — supreme ; pracantam — peaceful ; cuddham — pure ; parat — than the greatest ; parataram — greater ; caranam — shelter ; gatah — attain ; smah — we.

Translation

The gopis that had been sages said; The strongest of the strongcannot defeat Him. Material illusion cannot bewilder Him. The Vedas cannot bring Him within their grasp. He is the perfect, complete, eternal, sweet, peaceful, and pure Supreme Personality of Godhead, greater than the greatest. We take shelter of Him.
Text 23

Verse text

sri-devaggana ucuh
aveca-purna-sahitac ca parasya yasya
sargadayah kila bhavanti tam eva krsnam
purnat param tu paripurnatamam natah smah

Synonyms

sri-devaggana ucuh — the gopis that had been demigoddesses said ; amca — amsa ; amcakamcaka — amsamsa ; kala — kala ; adi — beginning ; avatara — incarnations ; vrndaih — with multitudes ; aveca — avesa ; purna — purna ; sahitah — with ; ca — and ; parasya — of the Supreme ; yasya — of whom ; sargadayah — beginning with creation ; kila — indeed ; bhavanti — are ; tam — to Him ; eva — indeed ; krsnam — Krsna ; purnat — than the most perfect ; param — more perfect ; tu — indeed ; paripurnatamam — the most perfect ; natah — bowing down ; smah — we are.

Translation

amcamcakamcaka-kalady-avatara-vrndair The gopis that had been demigoddesses said: The amca, amcamca, kala, aveca, purna, and other incarnations of Godhead come from Him. The creation, maintenance, and destruction of the material universes come from Him. We bow down before Him, Sri Krsna, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead, more perfect than the perfect.
Text 24

Verse text

sri-yajna-sita ucuh
criman-nikunja-latika-kusumakaro 'yam
sri-radhika-hrdaya-kantha-vibhusano 'yam
sri-rasa-mandala-patir vraja-mandaleco
brahmanda-mandala-mahi-paripalako 'yam

Synonyms

sri-yajna-sita ucuh — the Yajna-sitas said ; criman-nikunja-latika-kusumakarah — a forest garden of flowering vines ; ayam — He ; sri-radhika — of Sri Radha ; hrdaya — on the heart ; kantha — and neck ; vibhusanah — the ornament ; ayam — He ; sri-rasa-mandala-patih — the master of the rasa-dance circle ; vraja-mandalecah — the master of the circle of Vraja ; brahmanda-mandala-mahi-paripalakah — the maintainer of the circle of all the universes ; ayam — He.

Translation

The Yajna-sitas said; He stays in a beautiful forest garden of flowering vines. He is an ornament on Sri Radha's neck and heart. He is the master of the circle of Vraja. He is the master of the rasa-dance circle. He is the protector of the circle of the universes.
Text 25

Verse text

sri-rama-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh
yo gopika-sakala-yutham alancakara
vrndavanam ca nija-pada-rajobhir adrim
yah sarva-loka-vibhavaya babhuva bhumau
tam bhuri-lilam uragendra-bhujam bhajamah

Synonyms

sri-rama-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh — the gopis that had been residents of Rama-Vaikuntha said ; yah — who ; gopika-sakala-yutham — all the groups of gopis ; ala 24cakara — decorates ; vrndavanam — Vrndavana ; ca — and ; nija-pada-rajobhih — with the dust of His feet ; adrim — the hill ; yah — who ; sarva-loka-vibhavaya — for the gl ; babhuva — was ; bhumau — on the earth ; tam — Him ; bhuri-lilam — enjoying transcendental pastimes ; bhujam — His arms ; bhajamah — we worship.

Translation

The gopis that had been residents of Rama-Vaikuntha said: We worship Lord Krsna, whose arms are like two snake-kings, who decorated Vrndavana, Govardhana Hill, and all the gopis with the dust of His feet, and who to show His glories to all the worlds enjoyed many transcendental pastimes on the earth.
Text 26

Verse text

sri-cvetadvipa-sakhi-jana ucuh
yatha cilindhram cicur acramo gajah
sva-puskarenaiva ca puskaram girim
dhrtva babhau sri-vraja-raja-nandanah
krpakaro 'sau na hi vismrtah kvacit

Synonyms

sri-cvetadvipa-sakhi-jana ucuh — the gopis that had been friends of the goddess of fortune on Svetadvipa said ; yatha — as ; cilindhram — a mushroom ; cicuh — boy ; acramah — shelter ; gajah — elephant ; sva-puskarena — with a lotus ; eva — indeed ; ca — and ; puskaram — a lotus ; girim — hill ; dhrtva — holding ; babhau — manifested ; sri-vraja-raja-nandanah — the prince of Vraja ; krpakarah — kind ; asau — He ; na — not ; hi — indeed ; vismrtah — forgotten ; kvacit — ever.

Translation

The gopis that had been friends of the goddess of fortune on Svetadvipa said: We have not forgotten compassionate Sri Krsna, the prince of Vraja, who, as a child lifts a mushroom or an elephant lifts a lotus in its tongue, lifted Govardhana Hill.
Text 27

Verse text

sri-urdhva-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh
cyama-varnamaye netre
jagac chyamam vipacyatah
na dvaitam drcyate yasam
tabhih kim yoga-sevanam

Synonyms

sri-urdhva-vaikuntha-vasinya ucuh — the gopis that had been residents of Urdhva-Vaikuntha said ; cyama-varnamaye — black ; netre — eyes ; jagac-chyamam — black ; vipacyatah — seeing ; na — not ; dvaitam — different ; drcyate — is seen ; yasam — of whom ; tabhih — by them ; kim — what? ; yoga-sevanam — practice of yoga.

Translation

The gopis that had been residents of Urdhva-Vaikuntha said: When the eyes are covered with darkness they see the entire universe is dark. In that darkness, the eyes can clearly see that everything is all one and there is no duality. What use do we have for this darkness of impersonalist yoga?
Text 28

Verse text

sri-lokacala-vasinya ucuh
sneha-paco drdho chinno
na cchinno harina vina
chittva tam mathuram pragan
naga-pasam yatha khagah

Synonyms

sri-lokacala-vasinya ucuh — the gopis that had been residents of Lokacala said ; sneha — of love ; pacah — the rope ; drdhah — firm ; chinnah — broken ; na — not ; cchinnah — broken ; harina — by Krsna ; vina — without ; chittva — breaking ; tam — that ; mathuram — to Mathura ; pragan — went ; naga-pasam — snake-noose ; yatha — as ; khagah — Garuda.

Translation

The gopis that had been residents of Lokacala said: Only Krsna can cut the noose of love. No one but Him can cut it. As Garuda cuts a noose of snakes, Krsna should have cut the noose of our love before He went to Mathura City.
Text 29

Verse text

sri-ajita-padacrita ucuh
krsne lagnam netra-yugmam
dhavad daca-dicantaram
aho na lagnam kutrapi
padma-lagno yatha hy alih

Synonyms

sri-ajita-padacrita ucuh — the gopis that had taken shelter of Lord Ajita's feet said ; krsne — on Lord Krsna ; lagnam — resting ; netra-yugmam — eyes ; dhavat — running ; daca-dicantaram — in the ten directions ; ahah — Oh ; na — not ; lagnam — resting ; kutrapi — anywhere ; padma-lagnah — resting on a lotus ; yatha — as ; hi — indeed ; alih — a bee.

Translation

The gopis that had taken shelter of Lord Ajita's feet said: Not going anywhere else in the ten directions, our eyes rest on Krsna as a bumblebee rests on a lotus.
Text 30

Verse text

sri-sakhya ucuh
karpanyena yaco hanti
krudha guna-ganodayam
dhanani vyasanair lokah
kapatenaiva mitratam

Synonyms

sri-sakhya ucuh — the gopis that had been friends of ther goddess of fortune said ; karpanyena — by being in a pitiable condition ; yacah — fame ; hanti — kills ; krudha — by anger ; guna-ganodayam — virtues ; dhanani — wealth ; vyasanaih — by calamities ; lokah — the world ; kapatena — by treachery ; eva — indeed ; mitratam — friendship.

Translation

The gopis that had been friends of the goddess of fortune said: Being in a wretched condition destroys one's fame. Anger destroys virtues. Misfortune destroys wealth. Treachery destroys friendship.
Text 31

Verse text

sri-maithila ucuh
dhanam dattva tanum rakset
tanum dattva trapam vyadhat
dhanam tanum trapam dadyan
mitra-karyartham eva hi

Synonyms

sri-maithila ucuh — the gopis that had been the women of Mithila said ; dhanam — wealth ; dattva — giving ; tanum — body ; rakset — should protect ; tanum — body ; dattva — giving ; vyadhat — gives ; dhanam — wealth ; tanum — body ; trapam — modesty ; dadyat — may guve ; mitra-karyartham — for friendship ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed.

Translation

The gopis that had been the women of Mithila said: By paying money one may protect his body, and by renouncing this body one may preserve his good reputation. For the sake of a friend one may give away his money, body, and good reputation.
Text 32

Verse text

sri-kaucala ucuh
na ko 'pi janati viyoga-jam dasam
jivam vina vaktum alam na sapi hi
bhuyad uro-bana-bhinnam aran
mabhut kadapi priya-viprayojanam

Synonyms

sri-kaucala ucuh — the gopis that had been women of Kocala said ; na — not ; ko 'pi — anyone ; janati — knows ; viyoga-jam — born of separation ; dasam — condition ; jivam — life ; vina — without ; vaktum — to speak ; alam — greatly ; na — no ; sapi — any woman ; hi — indeed ; bhuyat — may be ; uro-bana-bhinnam — her chest pierced by an arrow ; aran — near ; ma — not ; abhut — may be ; kadapi — ever ; priya-viprayojanam — separation from the beloved.

Translation

The gopis that had been women of Kocala said: Only a person whose heart has been broken by the arrow of separation can understand or describe the sufferings of a lover separated from the beloved.
Text 33

Verse text

sri-ayodhya-pura-vasinya ucuh
krtva niracam vinidhaya cacam
jagama cacam mathura-purasya
yogam ca tasyopari calikhan no
nirmohinam cittam aho vicitram

Synonyms

sri-ayodhya-pura-vasinya ucuh — the gopis that had been the women of Ayodhya said ; krtva — having done ; niracam — hopelessness ; vinidhaya — placing ; ca — and ; acam — hope ; jagama — went ; ca — and ; acam — in the direction ; mathura-purasya — of Mathura City ; yogam — meeting ; ca — and ; tasya — of Him ; upari — over ; ca — and ; alikhant — wrote ; nah — not ; nirmohinam — of the peaceful ; cittam — the heart ; ahah — Oh ; vicitram — wonderful.

Translation

The gopis that had been the women of Ayodhya said: First He gave us no hope, then He gave us hope, then he went to Mathura City. Now He writes that we will meet again. Are not the hearts of they who do not love wonderful to see?
Text 34

Verse text

sri-pulindika ucuh
enam varam kartum ativa vihvalam
samagatam curpanakham pura vane
yah karayam asa virupinim balat
saumitrina tena tu vah krpa katham

Synonyms

sri-pulindika ucuh — the gopis that had been Pulindas said ; enam — Him ; varam — beloved ; kartum — to make ; ativa — very ; vihvalam — agitated ; samagatam — attained ; curpanakham — Surpanakha ; pura — before ; vane — in the forest ; yah — who ; karayam asa — made ; virupinim — disfigured ; balat — forcibly ; saumitrina — by Laksmana ; tena — by Him ; tu — indeed ; vah — of you ; krpa — the mercy ; katham — how?

Translation

The gopis that had been Pulindas said: When Surpanakha fell in love with Him and yearned to marry Him, He made Laksmana disfigure her. He was not kind then. Why should He be kind now?
Text 35

Verse text

sri-sutala-vasinya ucuh
bhaktam balim satya-param ca bhur idam
nitva balim yah kupito babandha ha
aho katham tasya karoti sevanam
maya-bator vamana-rupa-dharinah

Synonyms

sri-sutala-vasinya ucuh — the gopis that had been the women of Sutalaloka said ; bhaktam — devotee ; balim — Bali ; satya-param — truthful ; ca — and ; bhuh — earth ; idam — this ; nitva — bringing ; balim — offering ; yah — who ; kupitah — angry ; babandha — bound ; ha — indeed ; ahah — Oh ; katham — how? ; tasya — of Him ; karoti — does ; sevanam — service ; maya-batoh — pretending to be a small brahmana boy ; vamana-rupa-dharinah — manifesting the form of Lord Vamana.

Translation

The gopis that had been the women of Sutalaloka said: When the sincere devotee Bali Maharaja offered Him the entire world, Krsna became angry and tightly bound Bali with many ropes. That is the result of worshiping Him. Why would anyone worship this person, who deviously pretended to be a brahmacari?
Text 36

Verse text

sri-jalandharya ucuh
purati-kastam pragate 'surottame
kayadhave bhakta-vare tato hy ayam
bhutva nrsimhah krtavan sahayam
aho para nisthurata pradrcyate

Synonyms

sri-jalandharya ucuh — the gopis that had been Jalandharis said ; pura — previously ; ati-kastam — great calamity ; pragate — attained ; asurottame — the great demon ; kayadhave — to Prahlada ; bhakta-vare — the great devotee ; tatah — then ; hi — indeed ; ayam — He ; bhutva — becoming ; nrsimhah — Nrsimha ; krtavan — did ; sahayam — help ; ahah — Oh ; para — great ; nisthurata — cruelty ; pradrcyate — is seen.

Translation

The gopis that had been Jalandharis said: When the great demon Hiranyakacipu tortured the great devotee Prahlada, Krsna appeared as Nrsimha, saved Prahlada, and was very cruel to Hiranyakacipu.
Text 37

Verse text

sri-bhumi-gopya ucuh
aho 'ti-nirmohi-janasya citram
param caritram gaditum na yogyam
mukhena canyad dhrdi bhavyam anyad
devo na janati kuto manusyah

Synonyms

sri-bhumi-gopya ucuh — the Bhumi-gopis said ; ahah — Oh ; ati-nirmohi-janasya — of one who is peaceful ; citram — wonderful ; param — great ; caritram — activities ; gaditum — to speak ; na — not ; yogyam — proper ; mukhena — with the mouth ; ca — and ; anyat — another ; hrdi — in the heart ; bhavyam — will be ; anyat — another ; devah — the demigod ; na — not ; janati — understands ; kutah — where? ; manusyah — humans.

Translation

The Bhumi-gopis said: No one can describe with his mouth or understand with his heart the surprising activities of Krsna, who is never bewildered by feelings of love. If even the great demigods cannot understand His activities, how can mere human beings understandthem? Chapter Eighteen Śrī Gopī-vākye Uddhavāgamana Uddhava Hears the Gopīs' Words and Returns to Mathurā
Text 1

Verse text

śrī-barhiṣmatī-bhavā ūcuḥ
aho layābdhau kṛpayā harir yaṁ
uddhṛtya vārāha-tanur mahātmā
tam anvadhāvad dhṛta-siñjinī-śaro
bhūtvā dayāluḥ pṛthur ādi-rājaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-barhiṣmatī-bhavā ūcuḥ — the gopīs that had been the women of Barhiṣmatī-pura said: ahaḥ—Oh ; layābdhau — on the ocean of devastation ; kṛpayā — with mercy ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; yam — whom ; uddhṛtya — lifting ; vārāha-tanuḥ — the form of Varāha ; mahātmā — great soul ; tam — her ; anvadhāvat — following ; dhṛta-siñjinī-śaraḥ — placing the arrow to the bowstring ; bhūtvā — doing ; dayāluḥ — merciful ; pṛthuḥ — Pṛthu ; ādi-rājaḥ — the great king.

Translation

The gopīs that had been the women of Barhiṣmatī-pura said: Kṛṣṇa was Varāha, who rescued the earth from the waters of devastation. Kṛṣṇa was the great and merciful king Pṛthu who, placing an arrow on His bowtsring, protected the earth.
Text 2

Verse text

śrī-latā-gopya ūcuḥ
svayaṁ sudhāṁ vā na vibhajya pūrvaṁ
dhanvantarir viśva-bhiṣāṅ mahātmā
tad-baddha-vaireṣu surāsureṣu
bhūtvātha yoṣit pradadau kali-priyaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-latā-gopya ūcuḥ — the gopīs that had been flowering vines said ; svayam — personally ; sudhām — nectar ; vā — or ; na — not ; vibhajya — distributing ; pūrvam — before ; dhanvantariḥ — Dhanvantari ; viśva-bhiṣāk — the doctor of the universe ; mahātmā — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tad-baddha-vaireṣu — inimical ; surāsureṣu — demigods and demons ; bhūtvā — becoming ; atha — then ; yoṣit — a woman ; pradadau — gave ; kali-priyaḥ — fond of quarreling.

Translation

The gopīs that had been flowering vines said: In ancient times Kṛṣṇa became Dhanvantari, the universal physician who brought, but did not distribute, nectar. When the demigods and demons quarreled, Kṛṣṇa, who sometimes likes a quarrel, became the girl Mohinī and gave the nectar to the demigods.
Text 3

Verse text

śrī-nāgendra-kanyā ūcuḥ
athecchatīm enam aho varaṁ hariḥ
samāgatāṁ śūrpaṇakhāṁ mahāvane
cakāra saumitra-sakhaḥ kurūpiṇīṁ
aho kṛtaṁ tasya tayā kim apriyam

Synonyms

śrī-nāgendra-kanyā ūcuḥ — the snakes princesses said ; atha — then ; icchatīm — desiring ; enam — Him ; ahaḥ — indeed ; varam — husband ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; samāgatām — approached ; śūrpaṇakhām — Surpanakha ; mahāvane — in Mahāvana ; cakāra — did ; saumitra-sakhaḥ — trhe friend of Lakṣmaṇa ; ahaḥ — Oh ; kṛtam — did ; tasya — of Him ; tayā — by her ; kim — what? ; apriyam — not dear.

Translation

The gopīs that had been snake-princesses said: When Kṛṣṇa was Rāmacandra, and Śūrpaṇakhā wished to marry Him, Rāmacandra, the friend of Lakṣmaṇa, disfigured her. What bad thing did she do to deserve that punishment?
Text 4

Verse text

śrī-samudra-kanyā ūcuḥ
nityaṁ gṛha-śataṁ yānti
dātrī duḥkhaṁ sukhaṁ janān
svīyā kathaṁ suśīlā ca
cañcalāsmin kathaṁ sthitā

Synonyms

śrī-samudra-kanyā ūcuḥ — the daughters of the ocean said ; nityam — always ; gṛha-śatam — a hundred homes ; yānti — goes ; dātrī — the giver ; duḥkham — sufferinbgs ; sukham — happiness ; janān — to the people ; svīya — own ; katham — how? ; suśīlā — good ; ca — and ; cañcalā — restless ; asmin — in this ; katham — how? ; sthitā — situated.

Translation

The gopīs that had been daughters of the ocean said: Why does Kṛṣṇa's saintly beloved, the goddess of fortune, bring happiness or suffering to hundreds of homes every day? Why, even though she is rstless and fickle, does she always stay by His side?
Text 5

Verse text

śrī-apsara ūcuḥ
asya prītyā karṇa-nāse
gate vai rāvaṇa-svasuḥ
tyajantu vārtāṁ tenāpi
bhavatīnāṁ kṛpā kṛtā

Synonyms

śrī-apsara ūcuḥ — te gopīs that had been apsarās said ; asya — of Him ; pritya — with love ; karṇa-nāse — ears and nose ; gate — gone ; vai — indeed ; rāvaṇa-svasuḥ — Surpanakha ; tyajantu — may abanond ; vārtām — news ; tena — by Him ; api — also ; bhavatīnām — of you all ; kṛpā — mercy ; kṛtā — done.

Translation

The gopīs that had been apsarās said: Śūrpaṇakhā lovingly approached Him and He responded by cutting off her ears and nose. Kṛṣṇa is not kind.
Text 6

Verse text

śrī-divyā ūcuḥ
sarveśvaro baliṁ nītvā
baliṁ baddhvā dayā-paraḥ
adhaḥ kṣipan mukti-nāthas
citraṁ tat kathayābhavat

Synonyms

śrī-divyā ūcuḥ — the divya-gopīs said ; sarveśvaraḥ — the master of all ; balim — offering ; nītvā — bringing ; balim — Bali ; baddhvā — binding ; dayā-paraḥ — kind ; adhaḥ — below ; kṣipan — throwing ; mukti-nāthaḥ — the master of liberation ; citram — wonderful ; tat — that ; kathayā — with the story ; abhavat — was.

Translation

The divya-gopīs said: Even though Kṛṣṇa is the merciful Supreme Personality of Godhead, He tied up Bali Mahārāja, who was making an offering to Him. Even though Kṛṣṇa is the master that gives liberation, He threw Bali down to the lower worlds. This is all very surprising.
Text 7

Verse text

śrī-ādivyā ūcuḥ
śatarūpā-yutaṁ śāntaṁ
tapasy antaṁ manuṁ purā
daityair badhaṁ gataṁ paścād
rarakṣāsau dayā-nidhiḥ

Synonyms

śrī-ādivyā ūcuḥ — the ādivya-gopīs said ; śatarūpāyutam — wuth Śatarūpā ; śāntam — peaceful ; tapasi — ausperity ; antam — end ; manum — Manu ; purā — before ; daityaiḥ — by the demons ; badham — stopped ; gatam — gone ; paścāt — after ; rarakṣa — protected ; asau — He ; dayā-nidhiḥ — an ocean of mercy.

Translation

The ādivya-gopīs said: Kṛṣṇa protected Manu and Śatarūpā when, as they were peacefully performing austerities, the demons attacked them.
Text 8

Verse text

śrī-sattva-vṛttaya ūcuḥ
pūrvaṁ kaṣṭa-gataṁ bhaktaṁ
dhruvaṁ kāyādhavaṁ ca vai
paścād rarakṣa kṛpayā
na pūrvaṁ dīna-vatsalaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-sattva-vṛttaya ūcuḥ — the sattva-vṛtti-gopīs said ; pūrvam — before ; kaṣṭa-gatam — suffering ; bhaktam — devotee ; dhruvam — Dhruva ; kāyādhavam — Prahlāda ; ca — and ; vai — indeed ; paścāt — then ; rarakṣa — protected ; kṛpayā — with mercy ; na — not ; pūrvam — before ; dīna-vatsalaḥ — kind to the distressed.

Translation

The sattva-vṛtti-gopīs said: Although Kṛṣṇa, who is kind to the distressed, protected Dhruva and Prahlāda from many calamities, now He will not protect us..
Text 9

Verse text

śrī-rajo-vṛttaya ūcuḥ
barīṣāṇāṁ satāṁ hariḥ
satyaṁ parīkṣan pradadau
punar bhāgavatīṁ śriyam

Synonyms

śrī-rajo-vṛttaya ūcuḥ — the rajo-vṛtti-gopīs said ; rukmāṅgada — Rukmangada ; hariścandra — Hariscandra ; ambarīṣāṇām — and Ambarisa ; satām — devotees ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; satyam — true ; parīkṣan — seeing ; pradadau — gave ; punaḥ — again ; bhāgavatīm — of the Lord ; śriyam — opulence.

Translation

rukmāṅgada-hariścandrām- The rajo-vṛtti-gopīs said: When He saw that they were His sincere devotees, Lord Kṛṣṇa gave His own transcendental opulences to Rukmāṅgada, Hariścandra, and Ambarīṣa.
Text 10

Verse text

śrī-tamo-vṛttaya ūcuḥ
vṛndā yena chalaṁ prāptā
chalinā balinā purā
chalamayyā balinyādyā
kubjayā chalito hy ayam

Synonyms

śrī-tamo-vṛttaya ūcuḥ — the tamo-vṛtti gopīs said ; vṛndā — Vrnda ; yena — by whom ; chalam — trick ; prāptā — attained ; chalinā — by a trick ; balinā — by Bali ; purā — before ; chalamayyā — treacerous ; balinyādyā — headed by Balini ; kubjayā — by Kubjā ; chalitaḥ — cheated ; hi — indeed ; ayam — He.

Translation

The tamo-vṛtti gopīs said: Kṛṣṇa cheated many others in the past. He cheated Bali Mahārāja and He also cheated Kubjā.
Text 11

Verse text

kṛpāṇī hy ekato vakrā
ghātayantī janān bahūn
kim u kubjā tri-vakrā ca
śrī-kṛṣṇena tri-bhaṅginā

Synonyms

kṛpāṇī — a dagger ; hi — indeed ; ekataḥ — by one ; vakrā — crooked ; ghātayanti — struck ; janān — people ; bahūn — many ; kim — what? ; u — indeed ; kubjā — Kubjā ; tri-vakrā — crooked in three places ; ca — and ; śrī-kṛṣṇena — by Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; tri-bhaṅginā — bent in three places.

Translation

A single crooked sword can kill many straight people. Why, then, would Kṛṣṇa, who is Himself bent in three places, not cheat Kubjā, who was also crooked in three places?
Text 12

Verse text

paśyantīnāṁ kṛṣṇa-mārgaṁ
netre duḥkhaṁ gate bhṛśam
avadhīḥ pāda-vīkṣepaṁ
vāmanasya karoti hi

Synonyms

paśyantīnām — looking ; kṛṣṇa-mārgam — on the poath of Kṛṣṇa ; netre — eyes ; duḥkham — sufcferings ; gate — attained ; bhṛśam — greatly ; avadhīḥ — up to ; pāda-vīkṣepam — the kicking ; vāmanasya — of Vāmana ; karoti — does ; hi — indeed.

Translation

Hoping for Kṛṣṇa to come, we stared at the path, trying to look as far as possible into the distance, even up to the place where Lord Vāmana kicked a hole in the covering of the universe.
Text 13

Verse text

pītatvaṁ tvag-gatā pādau
śaithilyaṁ pragatau ca naḥ
mano vibhramatām ugraṁ
mādhave mādhavaṁ vinā

Synonyms

pītatvam — yellowness ; tvak — -skin ; gatā — attained ; pādau — feet ; śaithilyam — slackness ; pragatau — attauined ; ca — and ; naḥ — of us ; manaḥ — the mind ; vibhramatām — bewilderment ; ugram — terrible ; mādhave — in the springtime ; mādhavam — Kṛṣṇa ; vinā — without.

Translation

In Kṛṣṇa's absence our skin has turned yellow, our steps are unsteady, and our thoughts disoriented.
Text 14

Verse text

āgataṁ tam uṣaḥ-kṣaṇe
ha daiva kasmin samaye
drakṣyāmo nanda-nandanam

Synonyms

sapatnī — rival ; hāra — necklace ; cihna — mark ; āḍhyam — enriched ; āgatam — come ; tam — Him ; uṣaḥ-kṣaṇe — at dawn ; ha — indeed ; daiva — O destiny ; kasmin — at what? ; samaye — time ; drakṣyāmaḥ — we will see ; nanda-nandanam — Nanda's son.

Translation

sapatnī-hāra-cihnāḍhyaṁ O destiny, when will we again see Nanda's son, bearing the marks and necklace of our rival as he comes to us at dawn?
Text 15

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
iti kṛṣṇaṁ cintayantyo
gopībhiḥ prema-vihvalāḥ
utkaṇṭhitās tā rurudur
mūrchitā dhāraṇīṁ gatāḥ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; itit — thus ; kṛṣṇam — about transcendental ; cintayantyaḥ — thinking ; gopībhiḥ — by the gopīs ; prema — with love ; vihvalāḥ — overcome ; utkaṇṭhitāḥ — yearning ; tā — they ; ruruduḥ — wept ; mūrchitā — fainting ; dhāraṇīm — to the ground ; gatāḥ — fell.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: Thinking of Kṛṣṇa in this way, the gopīs became overwhelmed with love for Kṛṣṇa. Yearning to meet Him again, they wept, and then they fell unconscious to the ground.
Text 16

Verse text

pṛthak pṛthak samāśvāsya
vacobhir naya-naipuṇaiḥ
sambodhya gopikā sarvāḥ
prāha rādhāṁ tadoddhavaḥ

Synonyms

pṛthak pṛthak — each one ; samāśvāsya — comnforting ; vacobhiḥ — with words ; naya-naipuṇaiḥ — expert ; sambodhya — awakening ; gopikā — the gopīs ; sarvāḥ — all ; prāha — said ; rādhām — to Rādhā ; tadā — then ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava.

Translation

After reviving all the gopīs and comforting each one with eloquent words, Uddhava spoke to Rādhā.
Text 17

Verse text

śrī-uddhava uvāca
paripūrṇatame kṛṣṇe
gantum ājṣāṁ dehi mahyaṁ
namas tubhyaṁ vrajeśvari

Synonyms

śrī-uddhava uvāca — Śrī Uddhava said ; paripūrṇatame — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kṛṣṇe — Kṛṣṇa ; vṛṣabhānu-varātmaje — King Vṛṣabhānu's daughter ; gantum — to go ; ājṣām — the order ; dehi — please give ; mahyam — to me ; namaḥ — obeisances ; tubhyam — to You ; vrajeśvari — O queen of Vraja.

Translation

vṛṣabhānu-varātmaje Śrī Uddhava said: O supreme goddess, O most exalted one, O daughter of King Vṛṣabhānu, please give me permission to depart. O queen of Vraja, I offer my respectful obeisances to You.
Text 18

Verse text

pratipatraṁ dehi śubhe
śrī-kṛṣṇāya mahātmane
tena taṁ ca praṇamyāśu
samāneṣye tavāntikam

Synonyms

pratipatram — a letter in reply ; dehi — please give ; śubhe — O beautiful one ; śrī-kṛṣṇāya — for Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; mahātmane — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tena — by that ; tam — Him ; ca — and ; praṇamya — bowing ; āśu — at once ; samāneṣye — I will bring ; tava — of you ; antikam — nearness.

Translation

O beautiful one, please give me a letter for Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. I will bow down before Him and then I will bring Him to You at once.
Text 19

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
atha rādhā lekhanīṁ ca
nītvā patraṁ maṣes tvaraṁ
samācāraṁ cintayanti
tāvad aśrūni suśruvuḥ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; atha — then ; rādhā — Rādhā ; lekhanīm — a pen ; ca — and ; nītvā — bringing ; patram — a cup ; maṣeḥ — of ink ; tvaram — at once ; samācāram — activity ; cintayanti — thinking ; tāvat — then ; aśrūni — tears ; suśruvuḥ — flowed.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: Then Rādhā took a pen and a jar of ink. As She thought of what to write, tears flowed from Her eyes.
Text 20

Verse text

yad yat patraṁ samānītaṁ
rādhayā lekhanī-yutam
tat tad ardrī-kṛtaṁ jātaṁ

Synonyms

yad yat — whatever ; patram — letter ; samānītam — done ; rādhayā — by Rādhā ; lekhanī-yutam — with the pen ; tat tat — that ; ardrī-kṛtam — melted ; jātam — manifested ; nayanāmbuja-vāribhiḥ — with the tears from Her eyes.

Translation

nayanāmbuja-vāribhiḥ Whatever Rādhā wrote with Her pen was at once washed away by the tears from Her eyes.
Text 21

Verse text

aśru-pravāhaṁ muñcantīṁ
uddhavo vismayan prāha
rādhāṁ kamala-locanām

Synonyms

aśru-pravāham — a stream of tears ; muñcantīm — shedding ; kṛṣṇa-darśana-lālasām — yearning to see Kṛṣṇa ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava ; vismayan — astonished ; prāha — said ; rādhām — to Rādhā ; kamala-locanām — lotus-eyed.

Translation

kṛṣṇa-darśana-lālasām Filled with wonder, Uddhava spoke to lotus-eyed Rādhā who, yearning to see Kṛṣṇa, shed streams of tears.
Text 22

Verse text

śrī-uddhava uvāca
kathaṁ likhasi rādhe tvaṁ
kathaṁ duḥkhaṁ karoṣi hi
sarvaṁ tasmai vadiṣyāmi
vyathāṁ tval-lekhanaṁ vinā

Synonyms

śrī-uddhava uvāca — Śrī Uddhava said ; katham — who? ; likhasi — write ; rādhe — O Rādhā ; tvam — You ; katham — how? ; duḥkham — suffering ; karoṣi — You do ; hi — indeed ; sarvam — all ; tasmai — to Him ; vadiṣyāmi — I will tell ; vyathām — the suffering ; tval-lekhanam — Your writing ; vinā — without.

Translation

Śrī Uddhava said: O Rādhā, why must You write? Why must You be unhappy in this way? Even without You writing a letter, I will tell Kṛṣṇa everything of Your distress.
Text 23

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
iti śrutvā vacas tasya
rādhayā gata-bādhayā
sarvābhir gopikābhiś ca
pūjito 'bhūt tadoddhavaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; iti — thus ; śrutvā — hearing ; vacaḥ — words ; tasya — of him ; rādhayā — by Rādhā ; gata — gone ; bādhayā — distress ; sarvābhiḥ — by all ; gopikābhiḥ — the gopīs ; ca — and ; pūjitaḥ — worshiped ; abhūt — became ; tadā — then ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: Hearing these words, Rādhā became relieved. Then all the gopīs worshiped Uddhava.
Text 24

Verse text

natvā pradakṣiṇī-kṛtya
rādhāṁ rāseśvarīṁ param
gopī-gaṇam anujṣāpya
natvā natvā punaḥ punaḥ

Synonyms

natvā — bowing ; pradakṣiṇī-kṛtya — circumambulating ; rādhām — Rādhā ; rāseśvarīm — the queen of the rasa-dance ; param — great ; gopī-gaṇam — the gopīs ; anujṣāpya — taking permission ; natvā — bowing ; natvā — and bowing ; punaḥ — again ; punaḥ — and again.

Translation

Then He bowed down before Śrī Rādhā, the queen of the rāsa-dance, and then He circumambulated Her. Then He bowed down again and again and again and again before all the gopīs and asked them for permission to depart.
Text 25

Verse text

ratham āruhya divyābhaṁ
gata-bhṛtyābhimāno 'sau
sandhyāyāṁ nandam āyayau

Synonyms

ratham — the chariot ; āruhya — mounting ; divyābham — splendid ; ratna-bhūṣaṇa-bhūṣitam — decorated with jewels ; gata — gone ; bhṛtya — of being a servant ; abhimānaḥ — pride ; asau — he ; sandhyāyām — at sunrise ; nandam — to Nanda ; āyayau — went.

Translation

ratna-bhūṣaṇa-bhūṣitam Mounting his splendid jewel chariot, and his pride in being a great servant of Lord Kṛṣṇa now gone, Uddhava came at sunrise to Nanda's home.
Text 26

Verse text

mārtaṇḍa udayaṁ prāpte
natvā gopīṁ yaśomatīm
nanda-rājam anujṣāpya
nava-nandāṁs tadoddhavaḥ

Synonyms

mārtaṇḍa — the sun ; udayam — rising ; prāpte — attained ; natvā — bowing ; gopīm — to the gopī ; yaśomatīm — Yaśodā ; nanda-rājam — to King Nanda ; anujṣāpya — taking permission ; nava-nandān — the nine Nandas ; tadā — then ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava.

Translation

As the sun rose, uddhava bowed down before the gopī Yaśoda, King Nanda, and the nine Nandas. Then Uddhava asked for permission to depart.
Text 27

Verse text

vṛṣabhānūpanandāṁś ca
samanujṣāpya lokataḥ
tathā kṛṣṇa-sakhīn sarvān
ratham āruhya nirgataḥ

Synonyms

vṛṣabhānu — the Vṛṣabhānus ; upandān — the Upanandas ; ca — and ; samanujṣāpya — taking permission ; lokataḥ — completely ; tathā — then ; kṛṣṇa-sakhīn — Kṛṣṇa's friends ; sarvān — all ; ratham — chariot ; āruhya — climbing ; nirgataḥ — left.

Translation

Taking permission from the Vṛṣabhānus, the Upanandas, and all of Lord Kṛṣṇa's friends, Uddhava mounted his chariot and left.
Text 28

Verse text

dūraṁ tam anugāḥ sarve
gopā gopī-gaṇās tathā
sa nivṛttyātha tān snehād
uddhavo mathurāṁ yayau

Synonyms

dūram — far ; tam — him ; anugāḥ — following ; sarve — all ; gopā — the gopas ; gopī-gaṇāḥ — the gopīs ; tathā — then ; sa — he ; nivṛttya — turning away ; atha — then ; tān — from them ; snehāt — out of love ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava ; mathurām — to Mathurā ; yayau — went.

Translation

The gopas and gopī followed him for a long time. Then, out of love for them leaving them behind, Uddhava went to Mathurā.
Text 29

Verse text

ekānte cākṣaya-vaṭe
kṛṣṇā-tīre manohare
natvā kṛṣṇaṁ parikramya
prema-gadgadayā girā prāha sravan-netra-padma
uddhavo buddhi-sattamaḥ

Synonyms

ekānte — solitary ; ca — and ; akṣaya-vaṭe — an immortal banyan tree ; kṛṣṇā-tīre — on the Yamunā's shore ; manohare — beautiful ; natvā — bowing ; kṛṣṇam — to Lord Kṛṣṇa ; parikramya — circumambulating ; prema-gadgadayā — choked with love ; girā — with words ; prāha — said ; sravan-netra-padmaḥ — tears flowing from his lotus eyes ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava ; buddhi-sattamaḥ — the best of the wise.

Translation

Under an immortal banyan tree by the Yamunā's beautiful shore, Uddhava bowed down and before Lord Kṛṣṇa and then circumambulated Him. Tears flowing from his lotus eyes, Uddhava, the best of the wise, spoke in a voice choked with love.
Text 30

Verse text

śrī-uddhava uvāca
kiṁ deva kathanīyaṁ me
bhavato 'śeṣa-sākṣiṇaḥ
vidhatsva śaṁ rādhikāyā
gopīnāṁ dehi darśanam

Synonyms

śrī-uddhava uvāca — Śrī Uddhava said ; kim — what? ; deva — O Lord ; kathanīyam — may be said ; me — by me ; bhavataḥ — of You ; aśeṣa — of all ; sākṣiṇaḥ — the witness ; vidhatsva — please give ; śam — happiness ; rādhikāyā — of Rādhā ; gopīnām — of the gopīs ; dehi — give ; darśanam — the sight.

Translation

Śrī Uddhava said: O Lord, what can I say to You, the witness that sees everything? Please give happiness to Rādhā and the gopīs. Please allow them to see You.
Text 31

Verse text

śrī-kṛṣṇaṁ deva-deveśaṁ
samāneṣye tavāntikam
itthaṁ vākyaṁ ca me bhūtaṁ
rakṣa rakṣa kṛpā-nidhe

Synonyms

śrī-kṛṣṇam — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; deva-deveśam — the master of the masters of the demigods ; samāneṣye — I will bring ; tavāntikam — to You ; ittham — thus ; vākyam — the words ; ca — and ; me — of me ; bhūtam — were ; rakṣa — please protect ; rakṣa — please protect ; kṛpā-nidhe — O ocean of mercy.

Translation

I said to Rādhā, "I will bring Lord Kṛṣṇa, the master of the masters of the demigods, to You." O ocean of mercy, please protect, protect my words.
Text 32

Verse text

prahlāda-rukmāṅgadayoḥ pratijṣāṁ
baleś ca khatvaṅga-nṛpasya sākṣāt
yathāmbarīṣa-dhruvayos tathā me
kṛtā ca bhakteśvara rakṣa rakṣa

Synonyms

prahlāda — of Prahlāda ; rukmāṅgadayoḥ — of Rakumāṅgada ; pratijṣām — the promise ; baleḥ — of Bali ; ca — and ; khatvaṅga-nṛpasya — of King Khatvanga ; sākṣāt — directly ; yathā — as ; ambarīṣa — of Ambarisa ; dhruvayoḥ — pf Dhruva ; tathā — so ; me — of me ; kṛtā — done ; ca — and ; bhakteśvara — O king of the devotees ; rakṣa — protect ; rakṣa — protect.

Translation

O master of the devotees, as You protected the promises of Prahlāda, Rukmāṅgada, Bali, King Khaṭvaṅga, Ambarīṣa, and Dhruva, please protect, please protect the promise I made. .pa Chapter Nineteen Śrī Kṛṣṇāgamanotsava The Festival on Śrī Kṛṣṇa Return
Text 1

Verse text

itthaṁ niśamya bhaktasya
vacanaṁ bhakta-vatsalaḥ
smṛtvā vākyaṁ sva-kathitaṁ
gantuṁ cakre 'cyuto matim

Synonyms

ittham — thus ; niśamya — hearing ; bhaktasya — of His devotee ; vacanam — the words ; bhakta-vatsalaḥ — kind to the devotees ; smṛtvā — remembering ; vākyam — words ; sva-kathitam — spoken by Himself ; gantum — to go ; cakre — did ; acyutaḥ — the infallible Lord ; matim — His mind.

Translation

Listening to the words of His devotee, and remembering His own promise, Lord Kṛṣṇa, the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead, who loves His devotees, made up His mind to go to Vraja.
Texts 2 and 3

Verse text

baladevaṁ sthāpyitvā
kārya-bhāreṣu sarvataḥ
hemāḍhyaṁ kiṅkiṇī-jālaṁ
ratham āruhya sūryābhaṁ
uddhavena samanvitaḥ
bhaktānāṁ darśanaṁ dātuṁ
prāyayau nanda-gokulam

Synonyms

baladevam — Balarāma ; sthāpyitvā — placing ; kārya-bhāreṣu — in the duties ; sarvataḥ — in all respects ; hemāḍhyam — opulent with gold ; kiṅkiṇī-jālam — a network of tinkling ornaments ; cañcala — eager to go ; aśva — horses ; niyojitam — yoked ; ratham — chariot ; āruhya — mounting ; sūryābham — splendid as the sun ; uddhavena — with Uddhava ; samanvitaḥ — with ; bhaktānām — of the devotees ; darśanam — the sight ; dātum — to give ; prāyayau — went ; nanda-gokulam — to Nanda's Gokula.

Translation

cañcalāśva-niyojitam Entrusting all His duties to Balarāma, and mounting a chariot rich with tinkling golden ornaments and yoked to eager horses, Kṛṣṇa went with Uddhava to Nanda's Gokula to meet His devotees.
Text 4

Verse text

govardhanaṁ gokulaṁ ca
paśyan vṛndāvanaṁ vanam
prāpto 'bhūt puline kṛṣṇo
kṛṣṇā-tīre manohare

Synonyms

govardhanam — Govardhana ; gokulam — Gokula ; ca — and ; paśyan — seeing ; vṛndāvanam — Vṛndāvana ; vanam — forest ; prāptaḥ — attained ; abhūt — did ; puline — on the shore ; kṛṣṇaḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; kṛṣṇā-tīre — on the Yamunā's shore ; manohare — beautiful.

Translation

Seeing Govardhana and Gokula as He went, Kṛṣṇa came to the Yamunā's beautiful shore by Vṛndāvana forest.
Text 5

Verse text

koṭiśaḥ koṭiśo gāvo
dṛṣṭvā kṛṣṇaṁ vrajādhipam
ādhāvantyaḥ sarvatas taṁ

Synonyms

koṭiśaḥ — millions ; koṭiśaḥ — and millions ; gāvaḥ — of cows ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; kṛṣṇam — Kṛṣṇa ; vrajādhipam — the king of Vraja ; ādhāvantyaḥ — running ; sarvataḥ — everywhere ; tam — Him ; sneha — out of love ; snuta — flowing ; payodharāh — —udders.

Translation

sneha-snuta-payodharāḥ As soon as they saw Him, from all directions millions and millions of cows, milk dripping from their udders out of love, ran to Kṛṣṇa, the king of Vraja.
Texts 6 and 7

Verse text

udāsya-karṇa-vālāṁś ca
rambhamānāḥ sa-vatsakāḥ
mukhe kavala-samyuktā
aśru-mukhyo gata-vyathāḥ
sa-rathaṁ sāruṇaṁ sāśvaṁ
śarad-arkaṁ yathā ghanāḥ
rurudhus taṁ rathaṁ rājann
uddhavasya prapaśyataḥ

Synonyms

ut — raised ; āsya — faces ; karṇa — ears ; vālāḥ — tails ; ca — and ; rambhamānāḥ — mooing ; sa-vatsakāḥ — with calves ; mukhe — in the mouth ; kavala-samyuktā — with a mouthful ; aśru-mukhyaḥ — tears in their eyes ; gata-vyathāḥ — their unhappinesses gone ; sa-ratham — with his chariot ; sāruṇam — with the aruṇas ; sāśvam — with his horses ; śarad-arkam — the autumn sun ; yathā — as ; ghanaḥ — clouds ; rurudhuḥ — stopped ; tam — that ; ratham — chariot ; rājann — O king ; uddhavasya — as Uddhava ; prapaśyataḥ — looked.

Translation

As Uddhava watched, the mooing cows and calves, their faces, ears, and tails erect, the cud still in their mouths, and their sufferings now gone, blocked the chariot, as autumn clouds block the sun-god, riding in his chariot pulled by many horses and accompanied by the aruṇas.
Text 8

Verse text

śrī-gopālo haris tāsāṁ
vadan nāma pṛthak pṛthak
śrī-hastena tad-aṅgāni
spṛśan harṣaṁ jagāma ha

Synonyms

śrī-gopālaḥ — the protector of the cows ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; tāsām — of them ; vadan — saying ; nāma — the name ; pṛthak — one ; pṛthak — by one ; śrī-hastena — with His hand ; tad-aṅgāni — their bodies ; spṛśan — touching ; harṣam — happiness ; jagāma — attained ; ha — indeed.

Translation

Then Lord Kṛṣṇa, the protector of the cows, called each cow by name. Touching them with His glorious hand, He became happy.
Text 9

Verse text

tat-samīpe gavāṁ vṛndaṁ
gataṁ vīkṣya vrajārbhakāḥ
śrīdāmādyā vismitāś ca
dūrād ūcuḥ parasparam

Synonyms

tat-samīpe — near Him ; gavām — of cows ; vṛndam — the multitude ; gatam — gone ; vīkṣya — seeing ; vrajārbhakāḥ — the boys of Vraja ; śrīdāmādyā — headed by Śrīdāmā ; vismitāḥ — surprised ; ca — and ; dūrāt — from afar ; ūcuḥ — said ; parasparam — among themselves.

Translation

Seeing the cows clustered around the chariot, the gopas headed by Śrīdāmā became filled with wonder and spoke among themselves.
Text 10

Verse text

śrī-gopā ūcuḥ
rathaṁ sa-kumbha-dhvaja-vāyu-vegaṁ
su-kāṁsya-patra-dhvani-niḥsvanaṁ tam
śatāśva-yuktaṁ śata-sūrya-śobhaṁ
gāvaḥ kathaṁ vā rurudhuḥ sakhāyaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-gopā ūcuḥ — the gopas said ; ratham — chariot ; sa-kumbha — with a canopy ; dhvaja — flag ; vāyu — wind ; vegam — fast ; su-kaṁsya-patra-dhvani-niḥsvanam — making a rumbling sound ; tam — that ; śatāśva-yuktam — with a hundred horses ; śata-sūrya-śobham — splendid as a hundred suns ; gāvaḥ — cows ; katham — how? ; vā — or ; rurudhuḥ — stopped ; sakhāyaḥ — O friends.

Translation

The gopas said: O friends, how is it possible that these cows have stopped such a chariot decorated with with canopy and flag, splendid as a hundred suns, and making a great rumbling sound as, pulled by a hundred horses, it goes as fast as the wind?
Text 11

Verse text

anyo na cāsmin hi gavāṁ praharṣaṇair
āyāti kintu vraja-rāja-nandanaḥ
sphuranti cāṅgāni hi dakṣiṇāni naḥ
śrī-nīlakaṇṭhaḥ pratanoti toraṇam

Synonyms

anyaḥ — another ; na — not ; ca — and ; asmin — in this ; hi — indeed ; gavām — of cows ; praharṣaṇaiḥ — with the joys ; āyāti — goes ; kintu — however ; vraja-rāja-nandanaḥ — the prince of Vraja ; sphuranti — trembles ; ca — and ; aṅgāni — the limbs ; hi — indeed ; dakṣiṇāni — right ; naḥ — of us ; śrī-nīlakaṇṭhaḥ — the peacock ; pratanoti — extends ; toraṇam — arched gateway.

Translation

This is none other than Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the prince of Vraja, that has come. The cows are filled with happiness. Our bodies tremble on the left side, an auspicious sign. The peacock has made an arch for Kṛṣṇa to pass under.
Text 12

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
itthaṁ vicārya manasā
gopāḥ sarve samāgatāḥ
dadṛśur mādhavaṁ mitraṁ
gataṁ vastu yathā janāḥ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; ittham — thus ; vicārya — considering ; manasā — with the mind ; gopāḥ — teh gopas ; sarve — all ; samāgatāḥ — cane ; dadṛśuḥ — saw ; mādhavam — Kṛṣṇa ; mitram — friend ; gatam — come ; vastu — in truth ; yathā — as ; janāḥ — the people.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: Thinking in this way, all the gopas went and saw their friend Kṛṣṇa. They gazed on Him as people who have suddenly realized the truth.
Text 13

Verse text

avaplutya rathāt kṛṣṇaḥ
paripūrṇatamaḥ svayam
puro nidhāya tān sarvān
dorbhyāṁ tat-prema-vihvalaḥ

Synonyms

avaplutya — jumping ; rathāt — from the chariot ; kṛṣṇaḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; paripūrṇatamaḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; svayam — Himself ; puraḥ — before ; nidhāya — placing ; tān — them ; sarvān — all ; dorbhyām — with both arms ; tat-prema-vihvalah — overcome with love.

Translation

The Lord Kṛṣṇa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, jumped from the chariot and, overcome with love, embraced them all.
Text 14

Verse text

muñcan netrābja-vārīṇi
parirebhe pṛthak pṛthak
aho bhakteś ca māhātmyaṁ
vaktuṁ ko 'sti mahī-tale

Synonyms

muñcan — shedding ; netrābja-vārīṇi — tears from His lotus eyes ; parirebhe — rembaced ; pṛthak — one ; pṛthak — by one ; ahaḥ — Oh ; bhakteḥ — of devotion ; ca — and ; māhātmyam — the glory ; vaktum — to say ; kaḥ — who? ; asti — is ; mahī-tale — on the earth.

Translation

Shedding tears from His lotus eyes, He embraced them all, one by one. Who in this world can describe the love they all felt?
Text 15

Verse text

te sarve rurudur gopā
muñcanto 'śrūni maithila
pravaktuṁ na samārthāḥ śrī-

Synonyms

te — they ; sarve — all ; ruruduḥ — wept ; gopā — gopas ; muñcantaḥ — shedding ; aśrūni — tears ; maithila — O king of Mithilā ; pravaktum — to speak ; na — not ; samārthāḥ — able ; śrī-kṛṣṇa-vikṣepa-vihvalāḥ — overcome with love for Śrī Kṛṣṇa.

Translation

kṛṣṇa-vikṣepa-vihvalāḥ O king of Mithilā, all the gopas wept, shedding tears. Trembling with love for Kṛṣṇa, they could not speak.
Text 16

Verse text

paripūrṇatamaḥ sākṣād
devo madhurayā girā
āśvāsayām āsa natān

Synonyms

paripūrṇatamaḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; sākṣāt — directly ; devaḥ — the Lord ; madhurayā — with sweet ; girā — words ; āśvāsayām āsa — comforted ; natān — bowed down ; prema — of love ; ānanda — with the bliss ; samakulān — overcome.

Translation

premānanda-samakulān With sweet words the Supreme Personality of Godhead comforted the gopas, who were all overwhelmed with the bliss of love.
Text 17

Verse text

uddhavo preṣito vaktuṁ
śrī-kṛṣṇenārbhakaiḥ saha
āgataṁ kathayām āsa
śrī-kṛṣṇaṁ nanda-paṭṭane

Synonyms

uddhavaḥ — Uddhava ; preṣitaḥ — sent ; vaktum — to speak ; śrī-kṛṣṇena — with Kṛṣṇa ; arbhakaiḥ — the boys ; saha — with ; āgatam — come ; kathayām āsa — told ; śrī-kṛṣṇam — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; nanda-paṭṭane — in Nanda's village.

Translation

Then Kṛṣṇa and the boys sent Uddhava into Nanda's village to say that Śrī Kṛṣṇa had returned.
Text 18

Verse text

śrutvāgataṁ nanda-sūnuṁ
śrī-kṛṣṇaṁ gopa-vallabham
ānetuṁ nirgatāḥ sarve

Synonyms

śrutvā — hearing ; āgatam — returned ; nanda-sūnum — Nanda's son ; śrī-kṛṣṇam — Kṛṣṇa ; gopa-vallabham — the dear friend of the gopas ; ānetum — to bring ; nirgatāḥ — left ; sarve — a ; paripūrṇa-manorathāḥ — their desires fulfilled.

Translation

paripūrṇa-manorathāḥ Hearing that Kṛṣṇa, the son of Nanda and the dear friend of the gopas, had returned, everyone, now their desires all fuflilled, left the village to escort Him back.
Text 19

Verse text

bherī-mṛdaṅgaiḥ paṭahaiḥ kala-svanair
āpūrṇa-kumbhair dvija-veda-ghoṣaṇaiḥ gandhākṣatair maṅgala-lāja-miśritaiḥ
śrī-nanda-rājo 'bhiyayau yaśodayā

Synonyms

bherī-mṛdaṅgaiḥ — with bheris and mrdangas ; paṭahaiḥ — with patahas ; kala-svanaiḥ — with the sweet sounds ; āpūrṇa-kumbhaiḥ — with full pots ; dvija — brāhmaṇas ; veda — of the Vedas ; ghoṣaṇaiḥ — with sounds ; gandha — fragrances ; akṣataiḥ — unhusked grains of rice ; maṅgala — auspicious ; lāja — with fried grains ; miśritaiḥ — mixed ; śrī-nanda-rājaḥ — King Nanda ; abhiyayau — went ; yaśodayā — with Yaśodā.

Translation

Accompanied by the sweet sounds of bherīs, mṛdaṅgas, paṭahas, and brāhmaṇas chanting Vedic mantras, and bringing full waterpots and auspicious fried rice mixed with raw and unhusked rice, King Nanda and Yaśodā-devī came to meet Kṛṣṇa.
Text 20

Verse text

tataḥ puraskṛtya madonnataṁ gajaṁ
samāyayau śrī-vṛṣabhānu-mukhyo
bhāvān kṛtis tatra kalāvatī-yutaḥ

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; puraskṛtya — coming before ; mada — intoxicated ; unnatam — great ; gajam — elephant ; sindūra-śuṇḍā-dhṛta — its trunk anointed with red sindura ; hema-śṛṅkhalam — with gold ornaments ; samāyayau — came ; śrī-vṛṣabhānu-mukhyaḥ — King Vṛṣabhānu ; bhāvān — bring ; kṛtiḥ — piety ; tatra — there ; kalāvatī-yutāḥ — with Kalāvati.

Translation

sindūra-śuṇḍā-dhṛta-hema-śṛṅkhalam With a great intoxicated elephant shackled with golden links and its trunk decorated with red sindūra preceding them, King Vṛṣabhānu and his queen Kalāvati also came to meet Kṛṣṇa.
Text 21

Verse text

nandopānandā vṛṣabhānavaś ca
gopāś ca vṛddhās taruṇārbhakāś ca
vinirgatāḥ pūrṇa-manorathās te

Synonyms

nandopānandā — the Nandas and Upanandas ; vṛṣabhānavaḥ — the Vṛṣabhānus ; ca — and ; gopāḥ — the gopas ; ca — and ; vṛddhāḥ — adult ; taruṇa — youths ; arbhakāḥ — boys ; ca — and ; srak — gfarlands ; veṇu — flutes ; guñjā — gunjas ; paripiccha — peacock feathers ; yuktā — with ; vinirgatāḥ — came ; pūrṇa-manorathāḥ — their desires fulfilled ; te — they.

Translation

srag-veṇu-guñjā-paripiccha-yuktā Carrying garlands, flutes, guñjā, and peacock feathers, and their desires now fulfilled, the young, adolescent, and adult gopas also came to meet Kṛṣṇa.
Text 22

Verse text

gāyanta ārān nṛpa-nanda-nandanaṁ
nṛtyanta ācālita-pīta-vāsasaḥ
vaṁśī-dharā vetra-viṣāṇa-pāṇayaḥ
praharṣitā darśana-lālasā bhṛśam

Synonyms

gāyantaḥ — singing ; ārān — near ; nṛpa-nanda-nandanam — the son of King Nanda ; nṛtyantaḥ — dancing ; ācālita — moving ; pīta — yellow ; vāsasaḥ — garments ; vaṁśī-dharā — holding a flute ; vetra — a stick ; viṣāṇa — a buffalo horn bugle ; pāṇayaḥ — in hand ; praharṣitā — delighted ; darśana-lālasā — yearning to see Him ; bhṛśam — greatly.

Translation

Flutes, sticks, and bugles in their hands, very happy, and eager to see Kṛṣṇa, the gopas sang and danced, shaking their yellow garments.
Text 23

Verse text

sakhī-mukhebhyo harim āgataṁ paraṁ
niśamya rādhā-śayanāt samutthitā
tābhyaḥ sva-bhūṣāḥ pradadau praharṣitā
prītā sva-gandhiṁ nava-padminī yathā

Synonyms

sakhī-mukhebhyaḥ — from the mouths of Her gopī friends ; harim — to Kṛṣṇa ; āgatam — come ; param — great ; niśamya — hearing ; rādhā — Rādhā ; śayanāt — from bed ; samutthitā — risen ; tābhyaḥ — to them ; sva-bhūṣāḥ — own ornaments ; pradadau — gave ; praharṣitā — happy ; prītā — pleased ; sva-gandhim — own scent ; nava-padminī — a new lotus ; yathā — as.

Translation

Hearing from Her friends' mouths that Kṛṣṇa had returned, Rādhā at once rose from bed and, pleased with them as a new lotus is pleased with its own sweet fragrance, at once gave them Her own ornaments.
Text 24

Verse text

dva-triṁśad aṣṭau kila ṣoḍaśa dve
yūthair yutā maithila gopikānām
āruhya rādhā śibikāṁ manojṣāṁ
samāyayau śrīdhara-darśanārtham

Synonyms

dva-triṁśat — thirty-two ; aṣṭau — eight ; kila — indeed ; ṣoḍaśa — sixteen ; dve — two ; yūthaiḥ — groups ; yutā — endowed ; maithila — O king of Mithilā ; gopikānām — of gopīs ; āruhya — climbing ; rādhā — Rādhā ; śibikām — a palanquin ; manojṣām — beautiful ; samāyayau — went ; śrīdhara-darśanārtham — to see Lord Kṛṣṇa, the husband of the godess of fortune.

Translation

O king of Mithilā, accompanied by thirty-two, eight, and sixteen groups of gopīs, Rādhā rode on a beautiful palanquin to see Lord Kṛṣṇa, the husband of the goddess of fortune.
Text 25

Verse text

tathā hi gopyaḥ kila koṭiśaś ca
tyaktvātha sarvaṁ sva-gṛhasya kṛtyam
vyatyasta-vastrābharaṇā nṛpeśa
samāyayuḥ prema-calan-mano-'ṅgāḥ

Synonyms

tathā — then ; hi — indeed ; gopyaḥ — gopīs ; kila — indeed ; koṭisaḥ — millions ; ca — and ; tyaktvā — abandoning ; atha — then ; sarvam — everything ; sva-gṛhasya — of their own homes ; kṛtyam — the duties ; vyatyasta — in disarray ; vastra — garments ; ābharaṇāḥ — and ornaments ; nṛpeśa — O king ; samāyayuḥ — came ; prema — with love ; calat — trembling ; manaḥ — hearts ; aṅgāḥ — and limbs.

Translation

O king of kings, leaving their household duties undone, their garments and ornaments in disarray, and their hearts and limbs trembling with love, millions of gopīs came to meet Kṛṣṇa.
Text 26

Verse text

sarvaṁ vrajaṁ pādapa-go-mṛga-dvijaṁ
premāturaṁ vīkṣya samāgataṁ kim u
śrī-nanda-rājaṁ pitaraṁ ca mātaraṁ
nanāma kṛṣṇaḥ kṛta-mastakāñjaliḥ

Synonyms

sarvam — all ; vrajam — Vraja ; pādapa — trees ; gaḥ — cows ; mṛga — deer ; dvijam — and birds ; premāturam — overcome with love ; vīkṣya — seeing ; samāgatam — come ; kim u — how much more? ; śrī-nanda-rājam — King Nanda ; pitaram — father ; ca — and ; mātaram — mother ; nanāma — bowed down ; kṛṣṇaḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; kṛta-mastakāñjaliḥ — placing folded hands to His forehead.

Translation

Kṛṣṇa glanced at the trees, cows, deer, birds, and all the living entities in Vraja. Filled with love, they had come to meet Him. Seeing His father King Nanda and His mother Yaśodā, Lord Kṛṣṇa placed His folded palms to His forehead and bowed down before them.
Text 27

Verse text

śrī-nanda-rājas tanayaṁ cirāgataṁ
pragṛhya dorbhyāṁ hṛdaye nidhāya tam
saṁsnāpayām āsa su-netrajair jalair
yaśodayā prāpta-manorathaś cirāt

Synonyms

śrī-nanda-rājaḥ — King Nanda ; tanayam — his son ; cira — after a long time ; āgatam — come ; pragṛhya — embracing ; dorbhyām — with both arms ; hṛdaye — to his heart ; nidhāya — placing ; tam — Him ; saṁsnāpayām āsa — bathed ; su-netrajaiḥ — with tears from his eyes ; jalaiḥ — with water ; yaśodayā — with Yaśodā ; prāpta — attained ; manorathaḥ — desires ; cirāt — long cherished.

Translation

Their long-cherished desire now fulfilled, King Nanda and Queen Yaśodā embraced their long-absent son, with both arms holding Him to their hearts. They bathed Him with tears from their eyes.
Text 28

Verse text

nandopānandān vṛṣabhānu-vṛddhān
sarvaṁ namaskṛtya ca tat-kṛtāśīḥ
tathā vayasyaiś ca parasparaṁ vā
laghūṁś ca hasta-grahaṇaiḥ sthito 'bhūt

Synonyms

nandopānandān — the Nandas and Upanandas ; vṛṣabhānu-vṛddhān — the great Vṛṣabhānus ; sarvam — all ; namaskṛtya — bvowing down ; ca — and ; tat-kṛtāśīḥ — their blessings ; tathā — then ; vayasyaiḥ — with His friends ; ca — and ; parasparam — together ; vā — or ; laghūn — younger ; ca — and ; hasta — hands ; grahaṇaiḥ — holding ; sthitaḥ — stood ; abhūt — was.

Translation

Lord Kṛṣṇa bowed down before the Nandas, Upanandas, and Vṛṣabhānus and respectfully received their blessings. Then He grasped the hands of the boys His age and younger.
Text 29

Verse text

tataḥ samāruhya rathaṁ hariḥ svayaṁ
nidhāya nandaṁ ca gaje yaśodayā
nandopanandaiḥ sahito gavāṁ gaṇaiḥ
śrī-nanda-rājasya puraṁ viveśa saḥ

Synonyms

tataḥ — thern ; samāruhya — mounting ; ratham — the chariot ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; svayam — Himself ; nidhāya — placing ; nandam — Nanda ; ca — and ; gaje — on the elephant ; yaśodayā — with Yaśodā ; nandopanandaiḥ — with the Nandas and Upanandas ; sahitaḥ — with ; gavām — of tyhe cows ; gaṇaiḥ — with the multitudes ; śrī-nanda-rājasya — of King Nanda ; puram — to village ; viveśa — entered ; saḥ — He.

Translation

Placing King Nanda and Queen Yaśodā on the elephant, and Himself mounting the chariot, in the company of the Nandas, Upanandas, and the great multitude of cows, Lord Kṛṣṇa entered King Nanda's village.
Text 30

Verse text

tadaiva devāḥ kila puṣpa-varṣaṁ
ācāra-lājān pura-gopikāś ca
pracakrire tatra jayeti maṅgalaṁ
śabdaṁ ca gopā gṛham āgate harau

Synonyms

tadā — then ; eva — indeed ; devāḥ — the demigods ; kila — indeed ; puṣpa-varṣam — a shower of flowers ; ācāra-lājān — rice ; pura-gopikāḥ — the gopīs ; ca — and ; pracakrire — did ; tatra — there ; jaya — victory ; iti — thus ; maṅgalam — auspiciousness ; śabdam — sound ; ca — and ; gopā — the gopas ; gṛham — home ; āgate — came ; harau — Lord Kṛṣṇa.

Translation

As Kṛṣṇa returned to His home the demigods showered flowers, the gopīs showered grains of rice, and the gopas made a great auspicious sound of "Victory!"
Text 31

Verse text

dhanyaḥ sakhā te param uddhavo 'yaṁ
anena sākṣāt kila darśito 'tra
tvaṁ jīvanaṁ gopa-janasya gopā
ūcur girā gadgadayedam ārtāḥ

Synonyms

dhanyaḥ — fortunate ; sakhā — friend ; te — they ; param — then ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava ; ayam — he ; anena — by him ; sākṣāt — directly ; kila — indeed ; darśitaḥ — shown ; atra — here ; tvam — You ; jīvanam — the life ; gopa-janasya — of the gopas ; gopā — the gopas ; ūcuḥ — said ; girā — with words ; gadgadayā — choked with emotion ; idam — this ; ārtāḥ — overcome.

Translation

With voices choked with emotion, the gopas said to Kṛṣṇa, "Your friend Uddhava is a great saint. He has shown to us You, the life of all the gopas."
Text 32

Verse text

idaṁ mayā te kathitaṁ nṛpeśa
punar vraje hy āgamanaṁ hareś ca
kim icchasi śrotum atho surāsuraiḥ
paraṁ caritraṁ śubhadaṁ vicitram

Synonyms

idam — this ; mayā — by me ; te — to you ; kathitam — spoken ; nṛpeśa — O kin gof kings ; punaḥ — again ; vraje — in Vraja ; hi — indeed ; āgamanam — coming ; hareḥ — of Kṛṣṇa ; ca — and ; kim — what? ; icchasi — you wish ; śrotum — to hear ; athaḥ — then ; surāsuraiḥ — by the demigods and demons ; param — transcendental ; caritram — pastimes ; śubhadam — auspicious ; vicitram — wonderful.

Translation

O king of kings, now I have described to you Lord Kṛṣṇa's return to Vraja. Lord Kṛṣṇa's wonderful and transcendental pastimes brings auspiciousness to both the demigods and demons. What more do you wish to hear? .pa Chapter Twenty Śrī Rāsotsave Ṛbhu-mokṣa The Liberation of Ṛbhu Muni During the Rāsa-dance Festival
Text 1

Verse text

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca
agre cakāra kiṁ sākṣād
bhagavān vraja-maṇḍale
rādhāyai gopikābhyāś ca
kathaṁsvid darśanaṁ dadau

Synonyms

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca — Śrī Bahulāśva said ; agre — before ; cakāra — did ; kim — what? ; sākṣāt — directly ; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; vraja-maṇḍale — in the circle of Vraja ; rādhāyai — to Rādhā ; gopikābhyāḥ — to the gopīs ; ca — and ; kathaṁsvit — somehow ; darśanam — sight ; dadau — gave.

Translation

Śrī Bahulāśva said: What did the Supreme Lord do in the circle of Vraja? How did He meet with Rādhā and the gopīs?
Text 2

Verse text

gopī-manorathaṁ kṛtvā
mathurām ājagāma ha
etan me brūhi viprendra
tvaṁ parāvara-vittamaḥ

Synonyms

gopī — of the gopīs ; manoratham — the desire ; kṛtvā — fulfilling ; mathurām — to Mathurā ; ājagāma — retyurned ; ha — indeed ; etan — that ; me — to me ; brūhi — please tell ; viprendra — O king of the brāhmaṇas ; tvam — you ; parāvara-vittamaḥ — the best of the all-knowing.

Translation

The Lord fulfilled the gopīs' desires and then returned to Mathurā. You are the best of the wise. O king of the brāhmaṇas, please tell me this.
Text 3

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
sandhyāyāṁ rādhayāhūtaḥ
śrī-kṛṣṇo bhagavān svayam
ekānte śītalaṁ śaśvaj
jagāma kadalī-vanam

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; sandhyāyām — at sunset ; rādhayā — by Rādhā ; āhūtaḥ — ca ; śrī-kṛṣṇaḥ — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; svayam — personally ; ekānte — in s private place ; śītalam — cool ; śaśvat — always ; jagāma — went ; kadalī-vanam — the forest of banana trees.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: Called there by Rādhā, Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, went at sunset to a secluded and always pleasantly cool banana-tree forest.
Text 4

Verse text

kṛṣṇā-marut-sīkaraṁ ca

Synonyms

sphāra-sphuran-megha-gṛham — the home of a great and splendid cloud ; rambhā — banana trees ; candana — sandal ; carcitam — anointed ; kṛṣṇā — of the Yamunā ; marut — breeze ; sīkaram — mist ; ca — and ; sudhā-raśmi-galat-sudhām — bringing the sweetest nectar of the moon.

Translation

sphāra-sphuran-megha-gṛhaṁ rambhā-candana-carcitam sudhāraśmi-galat-sudhām That forest was like a palace that had great splendid clouds for a roof and banana trees for sandal-anointed walls. A breeze filled that place with mist from the Yamunā and the moonlight filled it with the sweetest nectar.
Text 5

Verse text

etādṛśaṁ vanaṁ rādhā
bhasmī-bhūtaṁ hi satataṁ
kṛṣṇāśā tāṁ hi rakṣati

Synonyms

etadṛśam — like this ; vanam — the forest ; rādhā — Rādhā ; viyogānala-varcasā — with the flames of separation ; bhasmī-bhūtam — burned to ashes ; hi — indeed ; satatam — always ; kṛṣṇāśā — the hop to attain Kṛṣṇa ; tām — Her ; hi — indeed ; rakṣati — protects.

Translation

viyogānala-varcasā Rādhā would many times have burned that forest to ashes with the flames of Her distress in Lord Kṛṣṇa's absence. It was only the hope that She would again meet Kṛṣṇa that prevented Her.
Text 6

Verse text

tatraiva sarve gopīnāṁ
śata-yūthāḥ samāgatāḥ
tasyai nivedanaṁ cakrur
mādhavāgamanasya hi

Synonyms

tatra — there ; eva — indeed ; sarve — all ; gopīnām — of the gs ; śata-yūthāḥ — a hundred groups ; samāgatāḥ — came ; tasyai — to Her ; nivedanam — information ; cakruḥ — did ; mādhavāgamanasya — of Kṛṣṇa's arrival ; hi — indeed.

Translation

Then a hundred groups of gopīs came there and informed Her that Kṛṣṇa had come.
Text 7

Verse text

utthāya sahasā sākṣād
ānetum āyayau kṛṣṇaṁ
sakhībhiḥ parivāritā

Synonyms

utthāya — rising ; sahasā — at once ; sākṣāt — directly ; vṛṣabhānu-varātmajā — Rādhā, the daughter of King Vṛṣabhānu ; ānetum — to bring ; āyayau — came ; kṛṣṇam — to Kṛṣṇa ; sakhībhiḥ — with friends ; parivāritā — accompanied.

Translation

vṛṣabhānu-varātmajā Śrī Rādhā, the daughter of King Vṛṣabhānu, stood up at once. Accompanied by Her friends, She went to meet Kṛṣṇa.
Text 8

Verse text

dadāv āsana-padyārghān
upacārān manoharān
vadantī sādaraṁ vākyaṁ
kuśalaṁ kuśalādhikā

Synonyms

dadau — gave ; āsana — a seat ; padya — padya ; arghān — argha ; upacārān — offerings ; manoharān — beautiful ; vadantī — saying ; sādaram — with respect ; vākyam — words ; kuśalam — beautiful ; kuśalādhikā — beautiful.

Translation

Speaking sweet and reverential words, sublimely beautiful Rādhā gave Him a seat and offered Him padya, arghya, and many kinds of beautiful offerings.
Text 9

Verse text

mādhurya-hāriṇaṁ harim
dṛṣṭvā rādhā jahau duḥkhaṁ
brahma jṣātvā guṇaṁ yathā

Synonyms

yuva — youthful ; kandarpa — Kāmadevas ; koṭīnām — of millions ; mādhurya-hāriṇam — eclipsing the charm ; harim — Kṛṣṇa ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; rādhā — Rādhā ; jahau — abandoned ; duḥkham — unhappiness ; brahma — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; jṣātvā — understanding ; guṇam — the modes of nature ; yathā — as.

Translation

yuva-kandarpa-koṭīnāṁ Gazing at Lord Kṛṣṇa, who eclipses the charms of many millions of youthful Kāmadevas, Rādhā became free of all distress. She was like a yogī who, at last understanding the nature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, becomes free from the influence of the the material modes of nature.
Text 10

Verse text

prasannā tatra śṛṅgāraṁ
akarot kīrti-nandinī
tayā no 'kāri śṛṅgāraḥ
panthe kṛṣṇe gate sati

Synonyms

prasannā — pleased ; tatra — there ; śṛṅgāram — decoration ; akarot — did ; kīrti-nandinī — Rādhā ; tayā — by Her ; naḥ — not ; akāri — did ; śṛṅgāraḥ — decoration ; panthe — on the path ; kṛṣṇe — when Kṛṣṇa ; gate sati — went.

Translation

Śrī Rādhā, the daughter of Kīrti-devī, was very happy. She had nicely decorated Herself. She had not decorated Herself since Kṛṣṇa left, traveling on the road to Mathurā.
Text 11

Verse text

na candanaṁ ca tāmbūlaṁ
bhojanaṁ ca sudhā-samam
na kṛtaṁ divya-śayanaṁ
hasyaṁ vā na kṛtaṁ kvacit

Synonyms

na — not ; candanam — sandal paste ; ca — and ; tāmbūlam — betelnuts ; bhojanam — nice food ; ca — and ; sudhā-samam — like nectar ; na — not ; kṛtam — done ; divya-śayanam — a nice bed ; hasyam — joking ; vā — or ; na — not ; kṛtam — done ; kvacit — ever.

Translation

In Lord Kṛṣṇa's absence She never anointed Herself with sandal paste, chewed betelnuts, ate food sweet as nectar, slept on a comfortable bed, or joked and laughed.
Text 12

Verse text

paripūrṇatamaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ
ānandāśrūni muñcantī
prāha gadgadayā girā

Synonyms

paripūrṇatamam — the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kṛṣṇam — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; paripūrṇatama-priyā — the beloved of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; ānandāśrūni — tears of happiness ; muñcantī — shedding ; prāha — spoke ; gadgadayā — choked up ; girā — with words.

Translation

paripūrṇatama-priyā Shedding tears of bliss, Śrī Rādhā, the beloved of the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, spoke words choked with emotion to Lord Kṛṣṇa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Text 13

Verse text

kiyad dūre yadu-purī
nāgataṁ kiṁ karoṣi hi
kiṁ vande 'haṁ raho duḥkhaṁ
bhavato 'śeṣa-sākṣiṇaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-rādhā uvāca — Śrī Rādhā said ; kiyat — how? ; dūre — far ; yadu-purī — the city of the Yādavas ; na — not ; āgatam — come ; kim — whether? ; karoṣi — You do ; hi — indeed ; kim — whether ; vande — I offer obeisances ; aham — I ; rahaḥ — in a secluded place ; duḥkham — suffering ; bhavataḥ — of You ; aśeṣa — of all ; sākṣiṇaḥ — the witness.

Translation

śrī-rādhovāca Śrī Rādhā said: Why did You stay so long in the city of the Yādavas? Why did You not come sooner? Why again and again in a secluded place did I have to bow down before You and pray to You, who are the witness that sees everything?
Text 14

Verse text

damayantī ca maithilī
nāsty atra kāṁ puraskṛtya
vade 'haṁ virahaṁ ripum

Synonyms

saudāsa-rāja-mahiṣī — the queen of King Saudasa ; damayantī — Damayanti ; ca — and ; maithilī — Sītā-devī ; na — not ; asti — is ; atra — here ; kām — what? ; puraskṛtya — before ; vade — speak ; aham — I ; viraham — separation ; ripum — enemy.

Translation

saudāsa-rāja-mahiṣī Neither Sītā-devī, Damayantī, nor Saudāsa-rājṣī suffered as I suffered. What words can I speak to describe the implacable enemy that was My separation from You?
Text 15

Verse text

mat-samānāśrayā gopyo
gadituṁ na kṣamāḥ kvacit
mayūrīva ghanaṁ navam

Synonyms

mat-samāna — like me ; āśrayā — taken shelter ; gopyaḥ — gopīs ; gaditum — to speak ; na — not ; kṣamāḥ — able ; kvacit — at all ; sarat — autumn ; candra — moon ; cakorī — cakori bird ; iva — like ; mayūrī — peahen ; iva — like ; ghanam — a cloud ; navam — new.

Translation

sarac-candra-cakorīva The other gopīs, like Me, also could not describe that enemy of separation. I was like a cakorī bird yearning for the moon, or a peahen yearning for the new monsoon cloud.
Text 16

Verse text

śrī-vṛndāvana-candraṁ tvāṁ
ghana-śyāmaṁ samutsahe
tava sākhyoddhavenāśu
dhanyena tvaṁ pradarśitaḥ anyaḥ ko 'pi vraje nāsti yasya premṇā tvam āgataḥ

Synonyms

śrī-vṛndāvana — of Śrī Vṛndāvana ; candram — the moon ; tvām — You ; ghana-śyāmam — dark as a cloud ; samutsahe — eager ; tava — of You ; sakhya — with the friend ; uddhavena — Uddhava ; āśu — at once ; dhanyena — saintly ; tvam — You ; pradarśitaḥ — showed ; anyaḥ — another ; ko 'pi — someone ; vraje — in Vraja ; na — not ; asti — is ; yasya — of whom ; premṇā — the love ; tvam — You ; āgataḥ — returned.

Translation

I yearned to see You, splendid as a dark cloud, the moon of beautiful Vṛndāvana forest, and Your saintly friend Uddhava showed You to Me. No one in Vraja is his equal. His love brought You back.
Text 17

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
evaṁ vadantīṁ satataṁ rudantīṁ
parāṁ priyāṁ vīkṣya ghṛṇāturāṅgaḥ
āśvāsayām āsa nayena sadyaḥ
pragṛhya dorbhyāṁ sravad-ambu-netraḥ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; evam — thus ; vadantīm — speaking ; satatam — again and again ; rudantīm — weeping ; parām — greatly ; priyām — beloved ; vīkṣya — seeing ; ghṛṇāturāṅgaḥ — all the limbs of His body filled with compassion ; āśvāsayām āsa — comforted ; nayena — with logic ; sadyaḥ — at once ; pragṛhya — embracing ; dorbhyām — with both arms ; sravad-ambu-netraḥ — tears flowing from His eyes.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: As Rādhā spoke in this way and wept, Lord Kṛṣṇa gazed at Her, His dearest beloved. Every limb of His body filled with compassion for Her, He comforted Her with eloquent words. Tears streaming from His eyes, He embraced Her with both arms.
Text 18

Verse text

śrī-bhagavān uvāca
mā śokaṁ kuru rādhe tvaṁ
tvat-prītyāhaṁ samāgataḥ
āvayor bheda-rahitaṁ
tejaś caikaṁ dvidhā janaiḥ

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said ; mā — don't ; śokam — lament ; kuru — do ; rādhe — O Rādhā ; tvam — You ; tvat-prītyā — with love for You ; aham — I ; samāgataḥ — come ; āvayoḥ — of Us ; bheda-rahitam — without difference ; tejaḥ — fiure ; ca — and ; ekam — one ; dvidhā — in two ; janaiḥ — by the people.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: O Rādhā, don't lament. Out of love for You, I have come. You and I are not different. We are a single fire the people mistake for two different flames.
Text 19

Verse text

yathā hi dugdha-dhāvalye
tathāvāṁ sarvadā śubhe
yatrāhaṁ tvaṁ sadā tatra
viśleṣo na hi cāvayoḥ

Synonyms

yathā — as ; hi — indeed ; dugdha — milk ; dhāvalye — and whiteness ; tathā — so ; avām — We ; sarvadā — always ; śubhe — O beautiful one ; yatra — where ; aham — I ; tvam — You ; sadā — always ; tatra — there ; viśleṣaḥ — separation ; na — not ; hi — indeed ; ca — and ; āvayoḥ — of Us.

Translation

O beautiful one, as milk and its whiteness are always together, so are We always together. Wherever I am, You are also there. We can never be separated.
Text 20

Verse text

pūrṇaṁ brahma paraṁ cāhaṁ
taṭa-sthā tvaṁ jagat-prasūḥ
viśleṣa āvayor madhye
mṛṣā jṣānena paśya sat

Synonyms

pūrṇaṁ brahma param — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; ca — and ; aham — I ; taṭa-sthā — My potency ; tvam — You ; jagat-prasūḥ — the mother of the universes ; viśleṣaḥ — separation ; āvayoḥ — of Us ; madhye — in the middle ; mṛṣā — false ; jṣānena — by knowledge ; paśya — please see ; sat — the truth.

Translation

I am the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead and You are My potency. What seems to be Our separation is a lie. Please see the truth.
Texts 21-23

Verse text

yathākāśa-sthito nityaṁ
vāyuḥ sarvatra-go mahān
tathā jalaṁ sūkṣma-rūpaṁ
tejo vyaptaṁ yathaidhaṣī
antar bahir yathā pṛthvī
pṛthag-bhūta varānane
tathā vikāra-rahito
malavat tri-guṇair aham
tathā tvaṁ paśya mad-bhāvaṁ
sadānando bhavet tataḥ
ahaṁ mameti bhāvena
dvitīyo 'sti varānane

Synonyms

yathā — as much as ; ākāśa-sthitaḥ — situated in space ; nityam — always ; vāyuḥ — wind ; sarvatra-gaḥ — blowing everywhere ; mahān — great ; tathā — similarly ; jalam — water ; sūkṣma-rūpam — in the subtle form of mist ; tejaḥ — fire ; vyaptam — all-pervading ; yathā — as ; edhaṣī — in firewood ; antaḥ — within ; bahiḥ — and without ; yathā — as ; pṛthvī — the earth ; pṛthag-bhūta — in the form of atoms ; varānane — O girl with the beautiful face ; tathā — so ; vikāra-rahitaḥ — without change ; malavat — like the material world ; tri-guṇaiḥ — with the three modes ; aham — I am ; tathā — so ; tvam — You ; paśya — see ; mad-bhāvam — My nature ; sadānandaḥ — eternal bliss ; bhavet — will be ; tataḥ — then ; aham — I ; mama — mine ; iti — thus ; bhāvena — with the nature ; dvitīyaḥ — second ; asti — is ; varānane — O girl with the beautiful face.

Translation

O girl with the beautiful face, as the mighty wind is present everywhere in ethereal space, as water is present everywhere in mist, as fire is present everywhere in firewood, as atoms are present everywhere in earth, and as the modes of nature are present everywhere in the material world, so I, the unchanging Supreme Personality of Godhead, am present everywhere. Look at My real nature and You will be blissful always. O girl with the beautiful face, if You think of "I" and Mine", then We will be separated.
Text 24

Verse text

yāvad ghano madhya-gatas tad utthitaḥ
svaṁ rūpam arkaṁ na hi dṛk prapaśyati
tāvat parātmānam asau prādhāna-jair
guṇais tathā teṣu gateṣu paśyati

Synonyms

yāvat — as ; ghanaḥ — a cloud ; madhya-gataḥ — in the midst ; tat — that ; utthitaḥ — risen ; svam — own ; rūpam — form ; arkam — sun ; na — not ; hi — indeed ; dṛk — eyes ; prapaśyati — see ; tāvat — so ; parātmānam — the Supersoul ; asau — He ; prādhāna-jaiḥ — manifested from pradhana ; guṇaiḥ — with the modes ; tathā — so ; teṣu — among them ; gateṣu — gone ; paśyati — sees.

Translation

As one cannot see the sun when there are clouds in the sky, so one cannot see the all-pervading Supreme Personality of Godhead when one stands among the three modes of material nature.
Text 25

Verse text

guṇeṣu saktaṁ kila bandhanāya
raktaṁ manaḥ puṁsi ca muktaye syāt
mano dvayoḥ kāraṇam āhur ārāj
jitvātha tat kau vicared asaṅgaḥ

Synonyms

guṇeṣu — for the modes ; saktam — attachment ; kila — kindeed ; bandhanāya — for bondage ; raktam — attachment ; manaḥ — of the heart ; puṁsi — fro the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; ca — and ; muktaye — for liberation ; syāt — is ; manaḥ — the heart ; dvayoḥ — of both ; kāraṇam — the cause ; āhuḥ — said ; ārāj — near ; jitvā — conquering ; atha — then ; tat — that ; kau — on the earth ; vicaret — should consider ; asaṅgaḥ — without contact.

Translation

The mind's attraction to the modes of material nature leads to bondage. The mind's attraction to the Supreme Personality of Godhead leads to liberation. In this way the mind is the source of both bondage and liberation. Therefore one should defeat the attraction to matter and live aloof from material things.
Text 26

Verse text

sarvaṁ hi bhāvaṁ manasaḥ parasparaṁ
na hy ekato bhāmini jāyate tataḥ
premaiva kartavyam aho mayi svataḥ
premṇā samānaṁ bhuvi nāsti kiñcit

Synonyms

sarvam — all ; hi — indeed ; bhāvam — nature ; manasaḥ — of the mind ; parasparam — mutual ; na — not ; hi — indeed ; ekataḥ — alone ; bhāmini — O beautiful one ; jāyate — is born ; tataḥ — then ; prema — love ; eva — certainly ; kartavyam — should be done ; ahaḥ — Oh ; mayi — for Me ; svataḥ — personally ; premṇā — with love ; samānam — equal ; bhuvi — in the world ; na — not ; asti — is ; kiñcit — anything.

Translation

O beautiful one, love does not exist by itself. It must have an object. One should love Me. In this world nothing is equal to love for Me.
Text 27

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
iti vākyaṁ hareḥ śrutvā
prasannā kīrti-nandinī
gopikābhiḥ samaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ
pūjayām āsa mādhavam

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; iti — thus ; vākyam — the words ; hareḥ — of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; śrutvā — hearing ; prasannā — happy ; kīrti-nandinī — Kīrti's daughter Rādhā ; gopikābhiḥ — gopīs ; samam — with ; kṛṣṇam — to Kṛṣṇa ; pūjayām āsa — worshiped ; mādhavam — the husband of the goddess of fortune.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: Happy to hear these words, Śrī Rādhā and the gopīs worshiped Lord Kṛṣṇa, the husband of the goddess of fortune.
Text 28

Verse text

atha rātryāṁ hariḥ sākṣāt
kārttikyāṁ rāsa-maṇḍale
gatvā nanāda muralīṁ
gopībhī rādhayā saha

Synonyms

atha — then ; rātryām — at night ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; sākṣāt — directly ; kārttikyām — in the moth of Karttika ; rāsa-maṇḍale — in the rasa dance circle ; gatvā — going ; nanāda — sounded ; muralīm — His flute ; gopībhī — the gopīs ; rādhayā — and Rādhā ; saha — with.

Translation

During the month of Kārttika entering the rāsa-dance circle with Rādhā and the gopīs, Lord Kṛṣṇa played His flute.
Text 29

Verse text

yamunā-nikaṭe rājan
rādhayā rādhikā-patiḥ
ramābhiḥ sundarībhiś ca
rāsa-raṅge rarāja ha

Synonyms

yamunā-nikaṭe — near the Yamunā ; rājan — O king ; rādhayā — with Rādhā ; rādhikā-patiḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; ramābhiḥ — with the gopīs ; sundarībhiḥ — beautiful ; ca — and ; rāsa-raṅge — in the rasa-dance arena ; rarāja — shone ; ha — indeed.

Translation

O king, in the rāsa-dance circle by the Yamunā's shore, Lord Kṛṣṇa, the master of Śrī Rādhā, appeared very splendid and glorious in the company of Śrī Rādhā and the beautiful gopīs.
Text 30

Verse text

yāvatīr gopikā rāse
tāvad rūpa-dharo hariḥ
reme vṛndāvane divye
harir vṛndāvaneśvaraḥ

Synonyms

yāvatīḥ — as many ; gopikā — gopīs ; rāse — in the rasa danbce ; tāvat — so many ; rūpa-dharaḥ — forms ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; reme — enjioyed ; vṛndāvane — in Vṛndāvana ; divye — transcendental ; hariḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; vṛndāvaneśvaraḥ — the master if Vṛndāvana.

Translation

Expanding Himself into as many forms as there were gopīs, Lord Kṛṣṇa, the master of Vṛndāvana, enjoyed pastimes in the splendid and transcendental forest of Vṛndāvana.
Text 31

Verse text

pītāmbaraḥ padma-dhārī

Synonyms

kvaṇan-nūpura-mañjīraḥ — tinkling anklets and ornaments ; vana-mālā-virājitaḥ — splendid with forest garland ; pītāmbaraḥ — yellow garments ; padma-dhārī — holding a lotus ; prabhātārka-kirīṭa-dhṛk — with a crown splendid as the rising sun.

Translation

kvaṇan-nūpura-mañjīro vana-mālā-virājitaḥ prabhātārka-kirīṭa-dhṛk Wearing tinkling anklets and ornaments, yellow garments, a splendid forest garland, and a crown glorious as the rising sun, Lord Kṛṣṇa held a lotus in His hand.
Text 32

Verse text

vetra-bhṛd vādayan vaṁśīṁ
naṭa-veṣo ghana-dyutiḥ

Synonyms

vidyut — lighting ; latā — vine ; sphurat-prodyat — splendid ; hema-kuṇḍala-maṇḍitaḥ — decorated with gold earrings ; vetra-bhṛt — holding a stick ; vādayan — playing ; vaṁśīm — flute ; naṭa-veṣaḥ — dressed as a dancer ; ghana-dyutiḥ — splendid as a cloud.

Translation

vidyul-latā-sphurat-prodyad- dhema-kuṇḍala-maṇḍitaḥ Dark as a monsoon cloud, decorated with golden earrings splendid as vines of lightning, dressed as a dancer, and holding a stick, Lord Kṛṣṇa played His flute.
Text 33

Verse text

rarāja rādhayā rāse
yathā ratyā ratīśvaraḥ

Synonyms

sphurat-kaustubha-ratnāḍhyaḥ — glorious with a glistening Kaustubha jewel ; pracalat-snigdha-kuṇḍalaḥ — with moving locks of glistenign hair ; rarāja — shone ; rādhayā — with Rādhā ; rāse — in the rasa dance ; yathā — as ; ratyā — with rati ; ratīśvaraḥ — Kāmadeva.

Translation

sphurat-kaustubha-ratnāḍhyaḥ pracalat-snigdha-kuṇḍalaḥ Glorious with a glistening Kaustubha jewel and moving glistening locks of hair, Lord Kṛṣṇa was splendidly manifest in the rāsa dance, as Kāmadeva is splendidly manifest with Rati.
Text 34

Verse text

śacyā śakro yathā svarge
ghanaś cañcalayā yathā
vṛndayā vṛndakāraṇye
tathā vṛndāvaneśvaraḥ

Synonyms

śacyā — with śaci ; śakraḥ — Indra ; yathā — as ; svarge — in Svargaloka ; ghanaḥ — a cloud ; cañcalayā — with lightning ; yathā — as ; vṛndayā — woth Vṛndā ; vṛndakāraṇye — in Vṛndāvana ; tathā — so ; vṛndāvaneśvaraḥ — the king of Vṛndāvana.

Translation

As in Svargaloka Indra is manifest with Śacī, and as a cloud is manifest with a lightning flash, so in Vṛndāvana forest Lord Kṛṣṇa was splendidly manifest with Śrī Rādhā.
Text 35

Verse text

vṛndāvanaṁ ca pulinaṁ
vanāny upavanāni ca
paśyan gopī-gaṇaiḥ sārdhaṁ
giriṁ govardhanaṁ yayau

Synonyms

vṛndāvanam — Vṛndāvana ; ca — and ; pulinam — the shore ; vanāni — forests ; upavanāni — gardens ; ca — and ; paśyan — seeing ; gopī-gaṇaiḥ — with the gopīs ; sārdham — with ; girim — hill ; govardhanam — Govardhana ; yayau — went.

Translation

Gazing at Vṛndāvana forest, the Yamunā's shore, and many forests and gardens as They went, Śrī Kṛṣṇa and the gopīs came to Govardhana Hill.
Text 36

Verse text

gopīnāṁ śata-yūthānāṁ
mānaṁ vīkṣya vrajeśvaraḥ
bhagavān rādhayā sākaṁ

Synonyms

gopīnām — of the gopīs ; śata-yūthānām — of a hundred groups ; mānam — the pride ; vīkṣya — seeing ; vrajeśvaraḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; bhagavān — the Lord ; rādhayā — Rādhā ; sākam — with ; tatra — there ; eva — indeed ; antaradhīyata — disappeared.

Translation

tatraivāntaradhīyata When He saw that the hundred groups of gopīs had become proud, taking Śrī Rādhā with Him, Lord Kṛṣṇa suddenly disappeared.
Text 37

Verse text

atha govardhanād dūre
sundaraṁ yojana-trayam
sa yayau rohitācalam

Synonyms

atha — then ; govardhanāt — from Govardhana ; dūre — far ; sundaram — handsome ; yojana-trayam — 34 miles ; śrīkhaṇḍa — of sandal ; gandha-samyuktam — with the scent ; sa — He ; yayau — went ; rohitācalam — to Mount Rohita.

Translation

śrīkhaṇḍa-gandha-samyuktaṁ Then Lord Kṛṣṇa went to beautiful Mount Rohita, which was fragrant with sandal trees and was thirty-four miles away from Govardhana Hill.
Text 38

Verse text

latā-kuñja-nikuñjāś ca
paśyan jalpaṁs tayā saha
vicacāra girau ramye

Synonyms

latā-kuñja-nikuñjāḥ — forests filled with flowering vines ; ca — and ; paśyan — seeing ; jalpan — conbversing ; tayā — with Her ; saha — with ; vicacāra — went ; girau — on the mountain ; ramye — beautiful ; kāñcanī-latikā — pf golden vines ; alaye — in a place.

Translation

kāñcanī-latikālaye Gazing at forest gardens of flowering vines, and conversing as they went, Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa came to a place of golden vines on that beautiful mountain.
Text 39

Verse text

tatra deva-saro ramyaṁ
badrī-nāthena nirmitam

Synonyms

tatra — there ; deva-saraḥ — deva-sarovara ; ramyam — beautiful ; badrī-nāthena — by Nārāyaṇa ṛṣi ; nirmitam — built ; pāṭhīna — pathinas ; kūrma — turtles ; nakra — corcodiles ; ādi — beginning with ; haṁsa — swans ; sārasa — cranes ; saṅkulam — filled.

Translation

pāṭhīna-kūrma-nakrādi- haṁsa-sārasa-saṅkulam At that place was Deva-sarovara, a lake created by nārāyaṇa Ṛṣi, which was filled with pāṭhīnas, turtles, crocodiles, swans, cranes, and many other creatures.
Text 40

Verse text

sahasra-dala-padmaiś ca
maṇḍitaṁ tad itas tataḥ

Synonyms

sahasra-dala-padmaiḥ — with thousand-petal lotuses ; ca — and ; maṇḍitam — decorated ; tat — that ; itaḥ — here ; tataḥ — and there ; bhramara — bees ; dhvani — sound ; samyuktam — with ; puṁs-kokila-ruta-vratam — the cooing of cuckoos.

Translation

bhramara-dhvani-samyuktaṁ puṁs-kokila-ruta-vratam It was decorated with many thousand-petal lotuses. Here and there were the sounds of humming bees and cooing cuckoos.
Text 41

Verse text

tat-tīraṁ manda-mārutam
ramayā rādhayā sārdhaṁ
mādhavo niṣasāda ha

Synonyms

vikasat-padma-gandhāḍhyam — opulent with the scent of blossoming lotus flowers ; tat-tīram — on that shore ; manda-mārutam — a gentle breeze ; ramayā — the goddess of fortune ; rādhayā — with Rādhā ; sārdham — with ; mādhavaḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; niṣasāda — sat down ; ha — indeed.

Translation

vikasat-padma-gandhāḍhyaṁ On the lakeshore filled with the scent of blossoming lotuses and cooled by a gentle breeze, Lord Kṛṣṇa sat down with the goddess of fortune, Śrī Rādhā.
Text 42

Verse text

tat-tīraṁ pratapasyantaṁ
ṛbhūṁ nāma mahā-munim
pādaikena sthitaṁ śaśvac

Synonyms

tat-tīram — on that shore ; pratapasyantam — performing austeritiesd ; ṛbhūm — Ṛbhu ; nāma — named ; mahā-munim — a great sage ; pāda — foot ; ekena — with one ; sthitam — standing ; śaśvac — always ; chrī-kṛṣṇa-dhyāna-tat-param — rapt in meditation on Lord Kṛṣṇa.

Translation

chrī-kṛṣṇa-dhyāna-tat-param On that lakeshore was a great sage named Ṛbhu, who for a long time had been performing austerities, standing there on one foot, his thoughts rapt in meditation on Lord Kṛṣṇa.
Text 43

Verse text

ṣaṣṭi-varṣa-śatāni ca
nirannaṁ nirjalaṁ śāntaṁ śrī-kṛṣṇas taṁ dadarśa ha

Synonyms

ṣaṣṭi-varṣa-sahasrāṇi — sixty thousand years ; ṣaṣṭi-varṣa-śatāni — six thousand years ; ca — and ; nirannam — without food ; nirjalam — without water ; śāntaṁ — peaceful ; śrī-kṛṣṇaḥ — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; tam — him ; dadarśa — saw ; ha — indeed.

Translation

ṣaṣṭi-varṣa-sahasrāṇi Then Lord Kṛṣṇa glanced at that sage, who had peacefully stood there without food or water for sixty-six thousand years.
Text 44

Verse text

papraccha vīkṣya taṁ rādhā
hasantī prāha mādhavam
māhātmyaṁ kuru bhakto 'yaṁ
paśya bhaktiṁ mahā-muneḥ

Synonyms

papraccha — asked ; vīkṣya — seeing ; tam — him ; rādhā — Rādhā ; hasantī — laughing ; prāha — said ; mādhavam — to Kṛṣṇa ; māhātmyam — the glory ; kuru — please do ; bhaktaḥ — the devotee ; ayam — him ; paśya — look ; bhaktim — devotion ; mahā-muneḥ — of the great sage.

Translation

Looking at the sage, Śrī Rādhā smiled and said to Lord Kṛṣṇa, "Please describe the glories of this sage. He is Your devotee. Look at the devotion of this great sage."
Text 45

Verse text

he ṛbho iti kṛṣṇena
proktam uccair vacaḥ śubham
na śrutaṁ tena kiñcid vā
caramaṁ prāpitena vai

Synonyms

he ṛbhaḥ — O Ṛbhu ; iti — thus ; kṛṣṇena — by Lord Kṛṣṇa ; proktam — addressed ; uccaiḥ — loudly ; vacaḥ — words ; śubham — beautiful ; na — not ; śrutam — heard ; tena — by him ; kiñcit — something ; vā — or ; caramam — the verge of death ; prāpitena — attained ; vai — indeed.

Translation

When in a loud a sonorous voice, Lord Kṛṣṇa called, O Ṛbhu!" the sage could not hear anything, for he was on the verge of death.
Text 46

Verse text

haris tadā tad-dhṛdayād
babhūvāśu tirohitaḥ
dhyānād gataṁ hariṁ vīkṣya
munīndraś cāti-vismitaḥ

Synonyms

hariḥ — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; tadā — then ; tad-dhṛdayāt — from his heart ; babhūva — was ; āśu — suddenly ; tirohitaḥ — disappeared ; dhyānāt — from the meditation ; gatam — gone ; harim — Kṛṣṇa ; vīkṣya — seeing ; munīndraḥ — the king of sages ; ca — and ; ati-vismitaḥ — astonished.

Translation

Then Lord Kṛṣṇa suddenly left the sage's heart. When he saw that Lord Kṛṣṇa had suddenly left his meditation, the sage was astonished.
Text 47

Verse text

netre unmilya dadṛśe
śrī-kṛṣṇaṁ rādhayāgataṁ
ghanaṁ cañcalayevāḍhyaṁ
rañjayantaṁ diśo daśa

Synonyms

netre — eyes ; unmilya — opening ; dadṛśe — saw ; śrī-kṛṣṇam — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; rādhayā — witn Rādhā ; āgatam — come ; ghanam — a cloud ; cañcalayā — with a lightning flash ; iva — like ; āḍhyam — opulent ; rañjayantam — filling with light ; diśaḥ — the directions ; daśa — ten.

Translation

Opening his eyes, the sage saw that, glorious as a monsoon cloud and a lightning flash, and filling the ten directions with light, Śrī Śrī Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa had come before him.
Text 48

Verse text

utthāya sadyo hari-bhakti-tat-paraḥ
pradakṣiṇī-kṛtya hariṁ sa-rādhikam
praṇamya mūrdhnā nipapāta pādayor
uvāca kṛṣṇaṁ bahu-gadgadākṣaraḥ

Synonyms

utthāya — rising ; sadyaḥ — at once ; hari-bhakti-tat-paraḥ — filled with devotion ; pradakṣiṇī-kṛtya — circumambulating ; harim — Kṛṣṇa ; sa-rādhikam — with Rādhā ; praṇamya — bowing down ; mūrdhnā — with his head ; nipapāta — fell ; pādayoḥ — at the feet ; uvāca — said ; kṛṣṇam — to Kṛṣṇa ; bahu-gadgadākṣaraḥ — his words choked with emotion.

Translation

At once standing up, the devotee-sage circumambulated Śrī Śrī Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa, bowed his head before them, and fell at Their feet. Then, with faltering words he spoke to Lord Kṛṣṇa.
Text 49

Verse text

śrī-ṛbhur uvāca
namaḥ kṛṣṇāya kṛṣṇayai
rādhāyai mādhavāya ca
paripūrṇatamayai ca
paripūrṇatamāya ca

Synonyms

śrī-ṛbhur uvāca — Śrī Ṛbhu said ; namaḥ — obeisances ; kṛṣṇāya — to Kṛṣṇa ; kṛṣṇayai — to Kṛṣṇa's beloved ; rādhāyai — Rādhā ; mādhavāya — to the husband of the goddess of fortune ; ca — and ; paripūrṇatamayai — to the supreme goddess ; ca — and ; paripūrṇatamāya — to the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; ca — and.

Translation

Śrī Ṛbhu said: I offer my respectful obeisances to Śrī Kṛṣṇa and to Śrī Kṛṣṇa's beloved. I offer my respectful obeisances to Śrī Rādhā and Śrī Rādhā's lover. I offer my respectful obeisances to the Supreme Goddess and the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Text 50

Verse text

ghana-śyāmāya devāya
śyāmayai satataṁ namaḥ
rāseśvarāya satataṁ
rāseśvaryai namo namaḥ

Synonyms

ghana-śyāmāya — dark as a monsoon cloud ; devāya — to the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; śyāmayai — beautiful Rādhā ; satatam — always ; namaḥ — obeiaances ; rāseśvarāya — to the king of the rasa dance ; satatam — always ; rāseśvaryai — to the queen of the rasa dance ; namaḥ — obeisances ; namaḥ — obeisances.

Translation

Eternally I offer my respectful obeisances to beautiful Śrī Rādhā and to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kṛṣṇa dark as a monsoon cloud. Eternally I offer my respectful obeisances to the queen of the rāsa-dance. Eternally I offer my respectful obeisances to the king of the rāsa-dance.
Text 51

Verse text

līlāvatyai namo namaḥ
asaṅkhyāṇḍādhidevyai cā-
saṅkhyāṇḍa-nidhaye namaḥ

Synonyms

goloka — Goloka ; atīta — transcendental ; līlāya — pastimes ; līlāvatyai — playful ; namaḥ — obeisances ; namaḥ — obeisances ; asaṅkhyāṇḍādhidevyai — the goddess who rules over countless universes ; ca — and ; asaṅkhyāṇḍa-nidhaye — the Lord who rulkes over countless universes ; namaḥ — obeisances.

Translation

golokātīta-līlāya Obeisances to Lord Kṛṣṇa, who enjoys transcendental pastimes in the realm of Goloka! Obeisances to playful Rādhā! Obeisances to the goddess that rules countless universes! Obeisances to the master that rules countless universes!
Text 52

Verse text

bhū-bhāra-hārāya bhuvaṁ gatābhyāṁ
mac-chāntaye cātra samāgatābhyām
parasparaṁ sandhita-vigrahābhyāṁ
namo yuvābhyāṁ hari-rādhikābhyām

Synonyms

bhū-bhāra-hārāya — to remove the burden of the earth ; bhuvam — to the earth ; gatābhyām — come ; mac-chāntaye — to pacify me ; ca — and ; atra — here ; samāgatābhyām — come ; parasparam — together ; sandhita-vigrahābhyām — transcendental forms ; namaḥ — obeisances ; yuvābhyām — youthful ; hari-rādhikābhyām — Śrī Śrī Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa.

Translation

Obeisances to youthful Śrī Śrī Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa, whose forms are transcendental, who came to the earth to remove it's burden, and who came to this place to make me peaceful.
Text 53

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
ity uktvā kṛṣṇa-pādābje
jahau prāṇān mahā-muniḥ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; iti — thus ; uktvā — saying ; kṛṣṇa-pādābje — at Śrī Kṛṣṇa's lotus feet ; prakṣarad-bāṣpa — shedding tears ; locanaḥ — eyes ; premānanda-samāyuktaḥ — filled with the bliss of love ; jahau — gave up ; prāṇān — his life ; mahā-muniḥ — the great sage.

Translation

prakṣarad-bāṣpa-locanaḥ premānanda-samāyukto Śrī Nārada said: After speaking these words the sage, filled with the bliss of love, and tears streaming from His eyes, fell at Lord Kṛṣṇa's feet and at once gave up his life.
Text 54

Verse text

tadaiva nirgata-jyotir
paribhramad daśa-diśaḥ
śrī-kṛṣṇe līnatāṁ gataḥ

Synonyms

tadā — then ; eva — indeed ; nirgata — left ; jyotiḥ — light ; daśa-sūrya-sama-prabham — splendid as ten suns ; paribhramat — wandering ; daśa-diśaḥ — the ten directions ; śrī-kṛṣṇe — into Lord Kṛṣṇa ; līnatām — merged ; gataḥ — went.

Translation

daśa-sūrya-sama-prabham Then a spark of light splendid as ten suns left the sage's body and, after wandering the ten directions, finally merged into Lord Kṛṣṇa.
Text 55

Verse text

bhaktasya bhaktiṁ śrī-kṛṣṇo
vīkṣya vai prema-lakṣaṇam
ānandāśru-kulaṁ muñcan
premṇā taṁ cājuhāva ha

Synonyms

bhaktasya — of the devotee ; bhaktim — the devotion ; śrī-kṛṣṇaḥ — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; vīkṣya — seeing ; vai — indeed ; prema-lakṣaṇam — with love ; ānandāśru-kulam — tears of bliss ; muñcan — shedding ; premṇā — with love ; tam — him ; ca — and ; ājuhāva — called out ; ha — indeed.

Translation

Seeing the sage's great love and devotion for Him, Lord Kṛṣṇa, shedding tears of bliss, loving called to him.
Text 56

Verse text

punaḥ śrī-kṛṣṇa-pādābjāt
kṛṣṇa-sārūpyavān muniḥ
nirgataḥ koṭi-kandarpa-
sannibho 'ti-natānanaḥ

Synonyms

punaḥ — again ; śrī-kṛṣṇa-pādābjāt — from Śrī Kṛṣṇa's lotus feet ; kṛṣṇa-sārūpyavān — having a transcendental form like Lord Kṛṣṇa's ; muniḥ — the sage ; nirgataḥ — emerged ; koṭi-kandarpa-sannibhaḥ — like millions of Kāmadevas ; ati-natānanaḥ — bowing his head.

Translation

Then the sage suddenly emerged from Lord Kṛṣṇa's lotus feet. Now having a transcendental form like Lord Kṛṣṇa's, a form handsome as millions of Kāmadevas, the sage bowed his head.
Text 57

Verse text

dorbhyāṁ pragṛhya hṛdaye
taṁ nidhāya kṛpākaraḥ
āśvāsya kalyāṇa-karaṁ
karaṁ divyaṁ dadhāra ha

Synonyms

dorbhyām — with both arms ; pragṛhya — embracing ; hṛdaye — to His chest ; tam — him ; nidhāya — placing ; kṛpākaraḥ — merciful ; āśvāsya — comforting ; kalyāṇa-karam — auspicious ; karam — hand ; divyam — transcendental ; dadhāra — held ; ha — certainly.

Translation

With both arms merciful Lord Kṛṣṇa embraced him, holding him to His chest. Lord Kṛṣṇa comforted him and touched him with His auspicious hand.
Text 58

Verse text

pradakṣiṇī-kṛtya hariṁ ca rādhikāṁ
praṇamya cāruhya rathaṁ manoharam
goloka-lokaṁ prayayāv ṛbhur munir
virañjayan maithila maṇḍalaṁ diśām

Synonyms

pradakṣiṇī-kṛtya — circumambulating ; harim — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; ca — and ; rādhikām — Rādhā ; praṇamya — bowing ; ca — and ; āruhya — mounting ; ratham — a chariot ; manoharam — beautiful ; goloka-lokam — to Goloka ; prayayāv — went ; ṛbhuḥ — Ṛbhu ; muniḥ — Muni ; virañjayan — filling with light ; maithila — O king of Mithilā ; maṇḍalam — the circle ; diśam — of the directions.

Translation

After circumambulating Śrī Śrī Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa, Ṛbhu Muni entered a beautiful chariot and went to the realm of Goloka, filling the circle of the directions with light as he went.
Text 59

Verse text

śrī-rādhikā vismayam āgatā bhṛśaṁ
dṛṣṭvā paraṁ muktiṁ ṛbhor mahā-muneḥ
ānanda-vārīṇi vimuñcati ciraṁ
jagāda kṛṣṇaṁ vṛṣabhānu-nandinī

Synonyms

śrī-rādhikā — Śrī Rādhā ; vismayam — wonder ; āgatā — attained ; bhṛśam — greatly ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; param — great ; muktim — liberation ; ṛbhoḥ — of Ṛbhu ; mahā-muneḥ — the great sage ; ānanda-vārīṇi — tears of bliss ; vimuñcati — shed ; ciram — again and again ; jagāda — spoke ; kṛṣṇam — to Kṛṣṇa ; vṛṣabhānu-nandinī — King Vṛṣabhānu's daughter.

Translation

Śrī Rādhā was filled with wonder when She saw the liberation of the great sage Ṛbhu Muni. Again and again shedding tears of joy, Śrī Rādhā, the daughter of King Vṛṣabhānu, spoke to Lord Kṛṣṇa. .pa Chapter Twenty-one Śrī Nāradopākhyāna The Story of Śrī Nārada
Text 1

Verse text

dhanyo 'yaṁ muni-śārdūlas
tvad-bhaktaḥ premavān mahān
tvat-sarūpyaṁ jagāmāsau
tvam apy aśru-mukho yataḥ

Synonyms

śrī-rādhovāca — Śrī Rādhā said ; dhanyaḥ — saintly ; muni-śārdūlaḥ — the tiger of sages ; tvad-bhaktaḥ — with devotion for You ; premavān — filled with love ; mahān — great ; tvat-sarūpyam — a form like Yours ; jagāma — attained ; asau — he ; tvam — You ; api — also ; aśru-mukhaḥ — face filled with tears ; yataḥ — because.

Translation

śrī-rādhovāca Śrī Rādhā said: That tiger of sages was a great devotee, filled with love for You. He was very fortunate. He attained a transcendental form like Yours. Your face was wet with tears of love for him.
Text 2

Verse text

asya deha-kriyāṁ kartuṁ
yogyo 'si vṛjinārdana
tapasā cāsya deho 'yaṁ
prasphuraty amalākṛtiḥ

Synonyms

asya — of him ; deha-kriyām — the duty ; kartum — to do ; yogyaḥ — proper ; asi — is ; vṛjinārdana — O deliverer from evils ; tapasā — by austerity ; ca — and ; asya — of him ; dehaḥ — body ; ayam — this ; prasphurati — manifest ; amalākṛtiḥ — a pure transcendental form.

Translation

O deliverer from evils, that sage must have performed great austerities to have attained a transcendental form like Yours.
Text 3

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
vadantyāṁ tatra rādhāyāṁ
tad-deho 'py abhavat sarit
vahantī pāpa-hantrī ca
dṛśyate rohite girāu

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; vadantyām — speaking ; tatra — there ; rādhāyām — Rādhā ; tad-dehaḥ — that body ; api — also ; abhavat — was ; sarit — stream ; vahantī — flowing ; pāpa-hantrī — killing sins ; ca — and ; dṛśyate — is seen ; rohite girāu — on Mount Rohita.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: As Rādhā was speaking these words, the sage's body became transformed into a stream that killed all sins as it flowed on Mount Rohita.
Text 4

Verse text

tad-dehasyāpi saritaṁ
vīkṣya rādhāti-vismitā
nanda-rājātmajaṁ prāha

Synonyms

tad-dehasya — of his body ; api — also ; saritam — stream ; vīkṣya — seeing ; rādhā — Rādhā ; ati-vismitā — filled with wonder ; nanda-rājātmajam — the son of King Nanda ; prāha — said ; vṛṣabhānu-varātmajā — the daughter of King Vṛṣabhānu.

Translation

vṛṣabhānu-varātmajā Filled with wonder to see the sage's body transformed into a stream, King Vṛṣabhānu's daughter Rādhā spoke to King Nanda's son, Kṛṣṇa.
Text 5

Verse text

kathaṁ jalatvam apanno
deho 'yaṁ vai mahā-muneḥ
etan me saṁśayaṁ deva
chettum arhasy aśeṣataḥ

Synonyms

śrī-rādhā uvāca — Śrī Rādhā said ; katham — why ; jalatvam — water ; apannaḥ — attained ; dehaḥ — body ; vai — indeed ; mahā-muneḥ — of the great sage ; etan — this ; me — of Me ; saṁśayam — doubt ; deva — O Lord ; chettum — to cut ; arhasi — You are able ; aśeṣataḥ — completely.

Translation

śrī-rādhovāca Śrī Rādhā said: Why did this great sage's body become a stream? O Lord, only You can cut apart the bewilderment I feel about this.
Text 6

Verse text

śrī-bhagavān uvāca
prema-lakṣaṇayā bhaktyā
samyuto 'yaṁ munīśvaraḥ
tasmād asya tu deho 'yaṁ
rambhoru dravatāṁ gataḥ

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said ; prema-lakṣaṇayā bhaktyā samyutaḥ — filled with love and devotion ; ayam — he ; munīśvaraḥ — the king of sages ; tasmāt — therefore ; asya — of him ; tu — indeed ; dehaḥ — body ; ayam — this ; rambhoru — O girl whose thighs are like banana trees ; dravatām — liquidity ; gataḥ — attained.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: That king of sages was filled with love and devotion for Me. O girl whose thighs are like banana trees, that is why his body became liquefied.
Text 7

Verse text

dṛṣṭvā tvayā māṁ varadaṁ
harṣito 'bhūn mahā-muniḥ
jalatvaṁ prāpa tad-deho
yathāhaṁ dravatāṁ purā

Synonyms

dṛṣṭvā — having seen ; tvayā — by him ; mām — Me ; varadam — the giver of benedictions ; harṣitaḥ — happy ; abhūt — became ; mahā-muniḥ — the great sage ; jalatvam — liguidity ; prāpa — attained ; tad-dehaḥ — his body ; yathā — as ; aham — I ; dravatām — liquid ; purā — before.

Translation

When that great sage saw Me, he became so happy that his body at once melted and became a liquid, as My own body also became a liquid in the past.
Text 8

Verse text

dravatāṁ tvaṁ kathaṁ prāpto
deva-deva dayā-nidhe
etac citraṁ hi me jātaṁ
sarvaṁ tvaṁ vada vistarāt

Synonyms

śrī-rādhā uvāca — Śrī Rādhā said ; dravatām — liquid ; tvam — You ; katham — how? ; prāptaḥ — attained ; deva-deva — O master of the demigods ; dayā — of mercy ; nidhe — O ocean ; etat — this ; citram — wonderful ; hi — indeed ; me — of Me ; jātam — manifested ; sarvam — all ; tvam — You ; vada — please tell ; vistarāt — in detail.

Translation

śrī-rādhovāca Śrī Rādhā said: O master of the demigods, O ocean of mercy, how did Your body become a liquid? This fills Me with wonder. Please tell Me this story in great detail.
Text 9

Verse text

śrī-bhagavān uvāca
itihāsaṁ purātanam
yasya śravaṇa-mātreṇa
pāpa-hāniḥ paraṁ bhavet

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said ; atra — here ; eva — indeed ; udāharanti — say ; imam — this ; itihāsam — history ; purātanam — ancient ; yasya — of which ; śravaṇa-mātreṇa — simply by hearing ; pāpa-hāniḥ — the destruction of sins ; param — then ; bhavet — becomes.

Translation

atraivodāharantīmaṁ The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: The sages tell the ancient story of this pastime. When one hears it his sins become destroyed.
Text 10

Verse text

yan-nābhi-paṅkajāj jātaḥ
purā brahmā praja-patiḥ
asṛjat prakṛtiṁ śaśvat
tapasā mad-varojitaḥ

Synonyms

yan-nābhi-paṅkajāt — from the lotus navel ; jātaḥ — born ; purā — before ; brahmā — Brahmā ; praja-patiḥ — the progenitor of the living entities ; asṛjat — created ; prakṛtim — material nature ; śaśvat — eternal ; tapasā — by austerity ; mad-varojitaḥ — by My blessings.

Translation

In ancient times Lord Brahmā, the progenitor of the living entities, was born from My lotus navel. He performed austerities, and with My blessings he created the material universe.
Text 11

Verse text

utsaṅgān nārado jajṣe
brahmaṇaḥ sṛjataḥ śubhaḥ
bhakty-unmatto mat-padāni
nijagau paryaṭan mahīm

Synonyms

utsaṅgāt — from within ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; jajṣe — was born ; brahmaṇaḥ — of Brahmā ; sṛjataḥ — creating ; śubhaḥ — auspicious ; bhakty-unmattaḥ — mad with love fro Kṛṣṇa ; mat-padāni — songs about Me ; nijagau — sang ; paryaṭan — wandering ; mahīm — the worlds.

Translation

From the creator Brahmā was born a saintly son named Nārada who, mad with love for Me, wandered the worlds singing songs about Me.
Text 12

Verse text

ekadā nāradaṁ prāha
devo brahmā praja-patiḥ
prajāḥ sṛja mahā-buddhe
vṛthā caṅkramaṇaṁ tyaja

Synonyms

ekadā — one day ; nāradam — to nārada ; prāha — said ; devaḥ — the demigod ; brahmā — Brahmā ; praja-patiḥ — the progenitor of the living entities ; prajāḥ — children ; sṛja — create ; mahā-buddhe — O very intelligent one ; vṛthā — useless ; caṅkramaṇam — wandering ; tyaja — abandon.

Translation

One day Lord Brahmā, the pregenitor of the living entities, said to Nārada, "O very intelligent one, please father many children. Give up this useless wandering."
Text 13

Verse text

nāradas tad-vacaḥ śrutvā
prāhedaṁ jṣāna-tat-paraḥ
na sṛjāmi pitaḥ sṛṣṭiṁ

Synonyms

nāradaḥ — Nasrada ; tad-vacaḥ — his words ; śrutvā — hearing ; prāha — said ; idam — this ; jṣāna-tat-paraḥ — intent on transcendental knowledge ; na — not ; sṛjāmi — I create ; pitaḥ — O father ; sṛṣṭim — creation ; śoka-mohādi-kāriṇīm — the cause of bewilderment and grief.

Translation

śoka-mohādi-kāriṇīm Hearing these words, Nārada said, "Father, I am eager for transcendental knowledge. I will not create children. Creating children is the cause of bewilderment and grief."
Text 14

Verse text

kariṣyāmi harer bhaktiṁ
tvam api sṛṣṭi-racanaṁ
tyaja duḥkhāturo bhṛśam

Synonyms

kariṣyāmi — I will create ; hareḥ — for Lord Kṛṣṇa ; bhaktim — devotion ; tat-kīrtana-samanvitam — chanting His glories ; tvam — You ; api — even ; sṛṣṭi-racanam — the creation of children ; tyaja — abandon ; duḥkhāturaḥ — filled with sufferings ; bhṛśam — greatly.

Translation

tat-kīrtana-samanvitam I will create devotion for Lord Kṛṣṇa and songs about His glories. You should give up the creation of children, which brings only sufferings.
Text 15

Verse text

kruddhā śaśāpa taṁ brahmā
prāha prasphuritādharaḥ
sadā gāna-paraḥ kalpaṁ
gandharvo bhava durmate

Synonyms

kruddhā — angry ; śaśāpa — cursed ; tam — him ; brahmā — Brahmā ; prāha — said ; prasphuritādharaḥ — his lips trembling ; sadā — always ; gāna-paraḥ — intent on singing ; kalpam — for a kalpa ; gandharvaḥ — a Gamndharva ; bhava — become ; durmate — O fool.

Translation

His lips trembling with anger, Brahmā cursed him, Fool, you like to sing. Become a gandharva for a kalpa."
Text 16

Verse text

evaṁ tac-chapato rādhe
gandharva upabarhaṇaḥ
babhūva gandharva-patiḥ
kalpa-mātraṁ surālaye

Synonyms

evam — thus ; tac-chapataḥ — fvrom that curse ; rādhe — O Rādhā ; gandharva — a gandharva ; upabarhaṇaḥ — Upabarhaṇa ; babhūva — became ; gandharva-patiḥ — the leader of the gandharvas ; kalpa-mātram — for a kalpa ; surālaye — in the realm of the demigods.

Translation

O Rādhā, because of this curse Nārada became the gandharva Upabarhaṇa. For one kalpa he was the leader of the gandharvas in the world of the demigods.
Text 17

Verse text

ekadā brahmaṇo loke
strībhiḥ parivṛto gataḥ
sundarīṣu manaḥ kṛtvā
jagau tāla-vivarjitam

Synonyms

ekadā — one day ; brahmaṇaḥ — of Brahmā ; loke — on the planet ; strībhiḥ — with women ; parivṛtaḥ — surrounded ; gataḥ — went ; sundarīṣu — beautiful ; manaḥ — mind ; kṛtvā — doing ; jagau — sang ; tāla-vivarjitam — without a tala rhythm.

Translation

One day, accompanied by many women, he came to Brahmā's planet. His mind thinking of the beautiful women, he sang without a proper tāla rhythm.
Text 18

Verse text

punar brahmā taṁ śaśāpa
tvaṁ śūdro bhava durmate
athāsau brahma-śāpena
dāsī-putro babhūva ha

Synonyms

punaḥ — again ; brahmā — Brahmā ; tam — him ; śaśāpa — cursed ; tvam — you ; śūdraḥ — a sudra ; bhava — become ; durmate — O fool ; atha — then ; asau — he ; brahma-śāpena — by Brahmā's curse ; dāsī-putraḥ — a maidservant's son ; babhūva — became ; ha — indeed.

Translation

Again Brahmā cursed him, "Fool, become a śūdra!" By Brahmā's curse he then became a maidservant's son.
Text 19

Verse text

sat-saṅgena purā rādhe
prāpto 'bhūd brahma-putratāṁ
bhakty-unmatto mat-padāni
nijagau paryaṭan mahīm

Synonyms

sat — with saintly devotees ; saṅgena — by association ; purā — before ; rādhe — O Rādhā ; prāptaḥ — attained ; abhūt — did ; brahma-putratām — the son of Brahmā ; bhakti — with devotion ; unmattaḥ — mad ; mat-padāni — songs about Me ; nijagau — sang ; paryaṭan — wandering ; mahīm — the worlds.

Translation

O Rādhā, again he was born as Brahmā's son, and again, mad with love for Me, he wandered the worlds singing songs about Me.
Text 20

Verse text

munīndro vaiṣṇava-śreṣṭho
mat-priyo jṣāna-bhaskaraḥ
paraṁ bhāgavataḥ sākṣān
nārado man-manāḥ sadā

Synonyms

munīndraḥ — the king of sages ; vaiṣṇava-śreṣṭhaḥ — the best of devotees ; mat-priyaḥ — dear to Me ; jṣāna-bhaskaraḥ — a blazing sun of transcendental knowledge ; param — then ; bhāgavataḥ — a great devotee ; sākṣān — directly ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; man-manāḥ — his thoughts fixed on Me ; sadā — always.

Translation

Nārada became the king of sages and the best of devotees. A blazing sun of transcendental knowledge and a pure devotee very dear to Me, Nārada always meditated on Me.
Text 21

Verse text

ekadā nārado lokān
paśyan vai gāna-tat-paraḥ
ilāvṛtaṁ nāma khaṇḍaṁ
gatavān sarvato gatiḥ

Synonyms

ekadā — one day ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; lokān — the worlds ; paśyan — seeing ; vai — indeed ; gāna-tat-paraḥ — intent on singing ; ilāvṛtam — Ilavrta ; nāma — named ; khaṇḍam — the planet ; gatavān — gone ; sarvataḥ — everywhere ; gatiḥ — going.

Translation

One day, as he was traveling where he wished, seeing many different worlds, and singing many songs, Nārada came to the place named Ilāvṛta-varṣa.
Text 22

Verse text

yatra jambū-nadī śyāmā
tathā jambūnadaṁ nāma
suvarṇaṁ bhavati priye

Synonyms

yatra — where ; jambū-nadī — the river Jambu ; śyāmā — dark ; jambū-phala-rasodbhavā — created from the nectar of jambu fruits ; tathā — so ; jambūnadam — Jambunada ; nāma — named ; suvarṇam — gold ; bhavati — is ; priye — O beloved.

Translation

jambū-phala-rasodbhavā O beloved, in that place is a dark jambū-juice river that becomes the golden river named Jambūnada.
Text 23

Verse text

tad-deśe veda-nagaraṁ
dadarśa nārado yogī
divya-nārī-narair vṛtam

Synonyms

tad-deśe — in that place ; veda-nagaram — the city of the Vedas ; ratna-prāsāda-nirmitam — made of jewel palaces ; dadarśa — saw ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; yogī — yogi ; divya-nārī-naraiḥ — with divine men and women ; vṛtam — filled.

Translation

ratna-prāsāda-nirmitam In that place the yogī Nārada saw the city Veda-nagara, which was filled with jewel palaces and divine men and women.
Texts 24 and 25

Verse text

kāṁścid vai pāda-rahitān
vigulphān jānu-varjitān
vijaṅghān jaghanavyaṅgān
kṛśorūn kubja-madhyakān
strī-janān puruṣāṁś cāsāv
aṅga-bhaṅgān dadarśa ha

Synonyms

kāṁścit — some ; vai — indeed ; pāda-rahitān — without feet ; vigulphān — without ankles ; jānu-varjitān — without knees ; vijaṅghān — without legs ; jaghana — hips ; vyaṅgān — disfingured limbs ; kṛśa — withered ; ūrūn — thighs ; kubja — disfigured ; madhyakān — torsos ; ślathat — loose ; danta — teeth ; unnata-skandhān — hunched backs ; nata — bowed ; ānana — heads ; vikandharān — deformed necks ; strī-janān — women ; puruṣān — men ; ca — and ; asau — he ; aṅga-bhaṅgān — broken limbs ; dadarśa — saw ; ha — indeed.

Translation

ślathad-dantonnata-skandhān natānana-vikandharān There he saw the men and women were all deformed. Some had no feet, some no ankles, some no knees, some no legs, some twisted hips, some emaciated thighs, some disfigured torsos, some loosened teeth, some hunched shoulders, some bowed heads, and some no necks.
Text 26

Verse text

aho kim etac citraṁ hi
sarvān dṛṣṭvāvadan muniḥ
sarve yūyaṁ padma-mukhā
divya-dehāḥ śubhāmbarāḥ

Synonyms

ahaḥ — Oh ; kim — what? ; etat — this ; citram — wonder ; hi — indeed ; sarvān — all ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; avadat — said ; muniḥ — the sage ; sarve — all ; yūyam — you ; padma — lotus ; mukhāḥ — faces ; divya — splendid and divine ; dehāḥ — bodies ; śubha — splendid ; ambarāḥ — garments.

Translation

Seeing them all, the sage Nārada said: "What is this wonder? You all have lotus faces, splendid forms, and beautiful garments.
Text 27

Verse text

kiṁ devā upadevā vā
yūyaṁ kiṁ ṛṣi-sattamāḥ
vaditra-sahitāḥ sarve

Synonyms

kim — whether? ; devā — demigods ; upadevā — lesser demigods ; vā — or ; yūyam — you all ; kim — whether? ; ṛṣi-sattamāḥ — great sages ; vaditra-sahitāḥ — with musical instruments ; sarve — all ; ramya-gāna-parāyaṇāḥ — making beautiful music.

Translation

ramya-gāna-parāyaṇāḥ "Are you devas? Are You upadevas? Are you great ṛṣis? You sing and play on your instruments very beautifully.
Text 28

Verse text

aṅga-bhaṅgāḥ kathaṁ yūyaṁ
vadatāśu mamaiva hi
ity uktās tena te sarve
pratyūcur dīna-mānasāḥ

Synonyms

aṅga-bhaṅgāḥ — deformed ; katham — how? ; yūyam — you all ; vadata — please tell ; āśu — at once ; mama — to me ; hi — —indeed ; iti — thus ; uktāḥ — addressed ; tena — by him ; te — they ; sarve — all ; pratyūcuḥ — replied ; dīna-mānasāḥ — dejected.

Translation

"Why are you deformed? Please tell me." Addressed in this way, all the people, unhappy at heart, replied.
Text 29

Verse text

śrī-rāgā ūcuḥ
mahā-duḥkhaṁ mune jātaṁ
asmākaṁ tanuṣu svataḥ
tasyāgre kathanīyaṁ vai
dūrī-kartuṁ ca yaḥ kṣamaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-rāgāḥ ūcuḥ — rthe rāgas said ; mahā-duḥkham — great suffering ; mune — O sage ; jātam — born ; asmākam — of us ; tanuṣu — on the bodies ; svataḥ — personally ; tasya — of that ; agre — in the presence ; kathanīyam — may be sdaid ; vai — indeed ; dūrī-kartum — to throw far away ; ca — and ; yaḥ — who ; kṣamaḥ — is able.

Translation

The rāgas said: O sage, our bodies have suffered terribly. We will tell you how these sufferings may be thrown far away.
Text 30

Verse text

rāgā vayaṁ veda-pure
vasāmaḥ sarvadā mune
aṅga-bhaṅgā vayaṁ jātāḥ
kāraṇaṁ śṛṇu mānada

Synonyms

vayam — we are ; veda-pure — in the city of the Vedas ; vasāmaḥ — we reside ; sarvadā — always ; mune — O sage ; aṅga-bhaṅgā — deformed ; vayam — we ; jātāḥ — born ; kāraṇam — the reason ; śṛṇu — please hear ; mānada — O gentle and humble one.

Translation

O sage, we are rāgas and we live in the city of Veda-nagara. O gentle and humble one, please hear how we became deformed in this way.
Text 31

Verse text

jāto hiraṇyagarbhasya
putro nārada-nāma-bhāk
premonmatto vikālena
gāyan dhruva-padāni ca

Synonyms

jātaḥ — born ; hiraṇyagarbhasya — of Lord Brahmā ; putraḥ — a son ; nārada-nāma-bhāk — named Nārada ; premonmattaḥ — mad with love ; vikālena — at the wrong times ; gāyan — singing ; dhruva-padāni — songs ; ca — and.

Translation

Lord Brahmā has a son named Nārada who, mad with love, sings the wrong melodies at the wrong times.
Text 32

Verse text

vicacāra mahīm etāṁ
svecchayā sa mahā-muniḥ
vikāle tasya gānaiś ca
visvarais tāla-varjitaiḥ vigānaiś ca vayaṁ sarve aṅga-bhaṅgā babhūvima

Synonyms

vicacāra — wandered ; mahīm — the world ; etām — this ; svecchayā — by his own wish ; sa — he ; mahā-muniḥ — a great sage ; vikāle — at the wrong time ; tasya — of him ; gānaiḥ — with songs ; ca — and ; visvaraiḥ — with the worng notes ; tāla-varjitaiḥ — without proper rhythm ; vigānaiḥ — with the wrong songs ; ca — and ; vayam — we ; sarve — all ; aṅga-bhaṅgā — deformed ; babhūvima — became.

Translation

He is a great sage that wanders the words as he wishes. But his singing the wrong songs at the wrong times, with the wrong notes and without a proper rhythm, has broken the limbs of our bodies.
Text 33

Verse text

iti śrutvātha tad-vākyaṁ
nārado vismito 'bhavat
uvāca gata-māno 'sau
rāgān parihasann iva

Synonyms

iti — thus ; śrutvā — hearing ; atha — then ; tad-vākyam — their words ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; vismitaḥ — astonished ; abhavat — became ; uvāca — said ; gata — gone ; mānaḥ — pride ; asau — he ; rāgān — to the rāgas ; parihasann — smiling ; iva — as if.

Translation

Hearing these words, Nārada became astonished. Humbled, and trying to smile, he spoke.
Text 34

Verse text

śrī-munir uvāca
tasya kena prakāreṇa
jṣānaṁ vai kāla-tālayoḥ
bhaved iha svarair yuktaṁ
vadatāśu mamaiva hi

Synonyms

śrī-munir uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; tasya — of that ; kena — by what? ; prakāreṇa — means ; jṣānam — knowledge ; vai — indeed ; kāla — of time ; tālayoḥ — and rhythm ; bhavet — may be ; iha — here ; svaraiḥ — with notes ; yuktam — endowed ; vadata — please tell ; āśu — at once ; mama — to me ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: How can one obtain knowledge of the proper times and proper rhythms of music? Please tell me.
Text 35

Verse text

śrī-rāgā ūcuḥ
vaikuṇṭhasya pateḥ sākṣāt
priyā mukhyā sarasvatī
kuryāc chikṣāṁ yadā tasmai
tadā syāt kāla-vin muniḥ

Synonyms

śrī-rāgāḥ ūcuḥ — the rāgas said ; vaikuṇṭhasya — of Vaikuṇṭha ; pateḥ — of the Lord ; sākṣāt — directly ; priyā — the beloved ; mukhyā — the best ; sarasvatī — Sarasvatī ; kuryāt — is ; śikṣām — teaching ; yadā — when ; tasmai — to him ; tadā — then ; syāt — may be ; kāla-vit — knowing the proper time ; muniḥ — sage.

Translation

The rāgas said: Goddess Sarasvatī is the dearest beloved of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of Vaikuṇṭhaloka. One who learns from her will know the proper times of music.
Text 36

Verse text

teṣāṁ vākyaṁ tataḥ śrutvā
nārado dīna-vatsalaḥ
sarasvatyāḥ prasādārthaṁ
tvaraṁ śubhraṁ giriṁ yayau

Synonyms

teṣām — of them ; vākyam — words ; tataḥ — then ; śrutvā — hearing ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; dīna-vatsalaḥ — kind to the distressed ; sarasvatyāḥ — of sarasvatī ; prasāda — the mercy ; artham — for the purpose ; tvaram — at once ; śubhram — Śubhra ; girim — Mount ; yayau — went.

Translation

After hearing their words, Nārada, who is very kind to the distressed, went to Mount Śubhra to obtrain the mercy of Goddess Sarasvatī.
Text 37

Verse text

divya-varṣa-śataṁ śaśvat
tapas tepe su-duṣkaraṁ
nirannaṁ nirjalaṁ vāṇī-
dhyāna-yuktaṁ vrajeśvari

Synonyms

divya — celestial ; varṣa — years ; śatam — a hundred ; śaśvat — continually ; tapaḥ — austerities ; tepe — performed ; su-duṣkaram — difficult ; nirannam — withotu food ; nirjalam — without water ; vāṇī — on Goddess sarasvatī ; dhyāna-yuktam — meditating ; vrajeśvari — O queen of Vraja.

Translation

O queen of Vraja, for one hundred celestial years Nārada performed austeries. Fasting from food and water, he meditated on Goddess Sarasvatī.
Text 38

Verse text

śubhraṁ nāma visṛjyātha
nārado nāma śailo 'bhūt
tapasā nāradasya ca

Synonyms

śubhram — Mount Subha ; nāma — named ; visṛjya — leaving ; atha — then ; pavitrī-kṛta — purified ; bhū-dharam — mountain ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; nāma — named ; śailaḥ — mountain ; abhūt — became ; tapasā — by the austerities ; nāradasya — of Nārada ; ca — and.

Translation

pavitrī-kṛta-bhū-dharam Purified by Nārada's austerities, that mountain ceased to be called Mount Śubhra. Now it is called Mount Nārada.
Text 39

Verse text

tapo-'nte āgatāṁ sākṣād
vāg-devīṁ śrī-sarasvatīm
viṣṇoḥ priyāṁ divya-varṇāṁ
apaśyan nārado muniḥ

Synonyms

tapo-'nte — at the end of the austerities ; āgatām — arruved ; sākṣāt — directly ; vāg-devīm — the goddess of speech ; śrī-sarasvatīm — Sarasvatī ; viṣṇoḥ — of Lords Viṣṇu ; priyām — the beloved ; divya-varṇām — splendid ; apaśyat — saw ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; muniḥ — the sage.

Translation

When his austerities had come to their end, the sage Nārada personally saw splendid Sarasvatī, the goddess of speech and the beloved of Lord Viṣṇu.
Text 40

Verse text

sahasotthāya tāṁ natvā
parikramya natānanaḥ
stutiṁ cakre munīśvaraḥ

Synonyms

sahasā — at once ; utthāya — rising ; tām — to her ; natvā — bowing ; parikramya — circumambulating ; natānanaḥ — with bowed head ; tad-rūpa — her beauty ; guṇa — virtues ; mādhurya — sweetness ; stutim — prayers ; cakre — did ; munīśvaraḥ — the king of sages.

Translation

tad-rūpa-guṇa-mādhurya- At once standing up, bowing down, and circumambulating Her with bowed head, Nārada, the king of sages, spoke many prayers gloirifying her beauty, virtues, and sweetness.
Text 41

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
navārka-bimba-dyutim udgalaj-jvalat-
namāmi koṭīndu-mukhīṁ sarasvatīm

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; navārka — rising sun ; bimba — bimba fruit ; dyutim — splendor ; udgalat — eclipsing ; jvalat — shining ; tāṭaṅka — earrings ; keyūra — armlets ; kirīṭa — crown ; kaṅkanām — bracelets ; sphurat — glistening ; kvaṇa — tinkling ; nūpura — anklets ; rāva — sound ; ranjitam — charming ; namāmi — I bow down ; koṭi — millions ; indu — of moons ; mukhīm — whose face ; sarasvatīm — Sarasvatī.

Translation

tāṭaṅka-keyūra-kirīṭa-kaṅkanām sphurat-kvaṇan-nūpura-rāva-rañjitāṁ Śrī Nārada said: I offer my respectful obeisances to Goddess Sarasvatī, whose face is more beautiful than millions of moons, whose glistening anklets tinkle melodiously, and whose glistening crown, earrings, bracelets, and armlets eclipse the glory of the bimba fruit and the rising sun.
Text 42

Verse text

vande sadāhaṁ kalahaṁsa udgate
calat-pade cañcala-cañcu-sampuṭe
sandhārayantīṁ śubhagāṁ sarasvatīm

Synonyms

vande — I bow down ; sadā — always ; aham — I ; kalahaṁsa — swan ; udgate — risen ; calat-pade — moving feet ; cañcala — moving ; cañcu-sampuṭe — in the beak ; nirdhauta-muktā-phala — of splendid pearls ; hāra — necklaces ; sa{ — .sy 24cayām—host ; sandhārayantīm — wearing ; śubhagām — beautiful ; sarasvatīm — Sarasvatī.

Translation

nirdhauta-muktā-phala-hāra-sañcayāṁ Again and again I offer my respectful obeisances to beautiful Goddess Sarasvatī, who wears a necklace of pearls splendid as a host of flying swans with restless feet and beaks.
Text 43

Verse text

varābhayaṁ pustaka-vallakī-yutaṁ
paraṁ dadhānaṁ vimale kara-dvaye
namāmy ahaṁ tvāṁ śubhadāṁ sarasvatīṁ
jaganmayīṁ brahmamayīṁ manoharām

Synonyms

vara — blessing ; abhayam — fearlessness ; pustaka — book ; vallakī — lute ; yutam — with ; param — great ; dadhānam — hodling ; vimale — pure ; kara-dvaye — two hands ; namāmi — bow down ; aham — I ; tvām — to you ; śubhadām — the giver of blessings ; sarasvatīm — Sarasvatī ; jaganmayīm — who has come to the material world ; brahmamayīm — spiritual ; manoharām — beautiful.

Translation

I offer my respectful obeisances to you, beautiful Goddess Sarasvatī, who hold in your pure and splendid hands a vīṇā and a book, who grant the blessing of fearlessness, and who have come to this material world in your spiritual form.
Text 44

Verse text

taraṅgita-kṣauma-sitāmbare pare
dehi svara-jṣānam atīva maṅgale
yenādvitīyo hi bhaveyam akṣare
sarvopari syāṁ para-rāga-maṇḍale

Synonyms

taraṅgita — tossed by waves ; kṣauma — silk ; sita — white ; ambare — garments ; pare — —great ; dehi — please give ; svara — of music ; jṣānam — knowledge ; atīva — great ; maṅgale — auspicious ; yena — by which ; advitīyaḥ — without a second ; hi — indeed ; bhaveyam — I may be ; akṣare — in words ; sarvopari — above all ; syām — I may be ; para-rāga-maṇḍale — in the circle of melodies.

Translation

O goddess dressed in white silk tossed by graceful waves as you walk, O auspicious one, please give me knowledge of music. Make me the best of musicians. Make me unrivaled among musicians.
Text 45

Verse text

śrī-bhagavān uvāca
stotraṁ jāḍyāpahaṁ divyaṁ
prātar utthāya yaḥ paṭhet
nāradoktaṁ sarasvatyāḥ
sa vidyāvān bhaved iha

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said ; stotram — prayer ; jāḍya — ignorance ; apaham — removing ; divyam — splendid ; prātaḥ — at sunrise ; utthāya — rising ; yaḥ — who ; paṭhet — recites ; nārada — by Nārada ; uktam — spoken ; sarasvatyāḥ — to Sarasvatī ; sa — he ; vidyāvān — a great scholar ; bhavet — becomes ; iha — in this world.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: A person who rises at sunrise and recites this splendid prayer Nārada spoke to Goddess Sarasvatī, a prayer that removes the numbness of ignorance, becomes a great scholar in this world.
Text 46

Verse text

tataḥ prasannā vāg-devī
nāradāya mahātmane
devadattāṁ dadau vīṇāṁ

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; prasannā — pleased ; vāg-devī — Goddess Sarasvatī ; nāradāya — to Nārada ; mahātmane — the great soul ; devadattām — Devadattā ; dadau — gave ; vīṇām — the vīṇā ; svara-brahma-vibhūṣitām — decorated with spiritual sounds.

Translation

svara-brahma-vibhūṣitām Pleased, Goddess Sarasvatī gave to the great saint Nārada the vīṇā named Devadattā, which was decorated with spiritual sound.
Texts 47-49

Verse text

rāgaiś ca rāgiṇībhiś ca
tat-putraiś ca tathaiva ca
deśa-kālādi-bhedaiś ca
tāla-māna-svaraiḥ saha
antar-bhedair asaṅkhyakaiḥ
grāmair nṛtyaiḥ sa-vāditrair
mūrchana-sahitaiḥ śubhaiḥ
vaikuṇṭhasya pateḥ sākṣāt
priyā mukhyā sarasvatī
svara-gamyaiḥ padaiḥ siddhaiḥ
pāṭhayām āsa nāradam

Synonyms

rāgaiḥ — with the rāgas ; ca — and ; rāgiṇībhiḥ — with the ragiṇīs ; ca — and ; tat-putraiḥ — with their children ; ca — and ; tathā — so ; eva — indeed ; ca — and ; deśa — place ; kāla — time ; ādi — beginning with ; bhedaiḥ — distinctions ; ca — and ; tāla-māna-svaraiḥ — rhythms ; saha — with ; ṣaṭ-pañcāśat-koṭi-bhedaiḥ — with five-hundred and sixty million divisions ; antar-bhedaiḥ — with sub-divisions ; asaṅkhyakaiḥ — countless ; grāmaiḥ — with scales ; nṛtyaiḥ — with dances ; sa-vāditraiḥ — with musical instruments ; mūrchana-sahitaiḥ — with modulation ; śubhaiḥ — beautiful ; vaikuṇṭhasya pateḥ — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Lord of Vaikuṇṭha ; sākṣāt — directly ; priyā — the beloved ; mukhyā — first ; sarasvatī — Sarasvatī ; svara-gamyaiḥ padaiḥ — with notes ; siddhaiḥ — perfect ; pāṭhayām āsa — taught ; nāradam — Nārada.

Translation

ṣaṭ-pañcāśat-koṭi-bhedair Goddess Sarasvatī, the dearest beloved of the Lord of Vaikuṇṭha, then taught Nārada the different rāgas and rāgiṇīs, their derivitives, the proper times and places for the different kinds of music, the different rhythms, the five-hundred-and-sixty-million divisions and numberless sub-divisions of scales, the various dances, the different musical instruments, and the different kinds of modulation.
Text 50

Verse text

advitīyaṁ rāga-karaṁ
kṛtvā taṁ rāsa-maṇḍale
vaikuṇṭhaṁ prāyayau rādhe
vāg-devī viṣṇu-vallabhā

Synonyms

advitīyam — without rival ; rāga-karam — musician ; kṛtvā — making ; tam — him ; rāsa-maṇḍale — in the circle of the musicians ; vaikuṇṭham — to Vaikuṇṭha ; prāyayau — went ; rādhe — O Rādhā ; vāg-devī — Goddess Sarasvatī ; viṣṇu-vallabhā — dear to Lord Viṣṇu.

Translation

In this way Sarasvatī, the goddess of speech and the beloved of Lord Viṣṇu, made Nārada unrivalled in the circle of musicians. Then she returned to the spiritual world of Vaikuṇṭha. .pa Chapter Twenty-two Śrī Nāradopākhyāna The Story of Śrī Nārada
Text 1

Verse text

śrī-bhagavān uvāca
kasmai deyam idaṁ guhyaṁ
rāga-rūpaṁ manoharam
buddhyā vicārayann itthaṁ
gandharva-nagaraṁ yayau

Synonyms

śrī-bhagavān uvāca — the Supreme Personality of Godhead said ; kasmai — to whom? ; deyam — should be guiven ; idam — this ; guhyam — secret ; rāga-rūpam — of the rāgas ; manoharam — beautiful ; buddhyā — with intelligence ; vicārayan — considering ; ittham — thus ; gandharva-nagaram — to the city of the gandharvas ; yayau — went.

Translation

The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Thinking, to whom should I give this beautiful and secret knowledge of music?", Nārada went to the city of the gandharvas.
Text 2

Verse text

tumburuṁ nāma gandharvaṁ
kṛtvā śiṣyaṁ sa nāradaḥ
kalaṁ jagau mad-guṇāṁś ca

Synonyms

tumburum — Tumburu ; nāma — named ; gandharvam — the gandharva ; kṛtvā — making ; śiṣyam — disciple ; sa — he ; nāradaḥ — Nārada ; kalam — sweetly ; jagau — sang ; mad-guṇān — My virtues

Translation

vīṇā-vādya-parāyaṇaḥ Chapter Twenty-four Kola-daitya-vadha The Killing of the Kola Demon
Text 1

Verse text

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca
gopīnāṁ caiva gopānāṁ
dattvā sandarśanaṁ param
mathurāyāṁ kiṁ cakāra
śrī-kṛṣṇo rāma eva ca

Synonyms

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca — Śrī Bahulāśva said ; gopīnām — of the gopīs ; ca — and ; eva — indeed ; gopānām — of gopas ; dattvā — giving ; sandarśanam — sight ; param — then ; mathurāyām — in Mathurā ; kim — what? ; cakāra — did ; śrī-kṛṣṇaḥ — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; rāma — Balarāma ; eva — indeed ; ca — and.

Translation

Śrī Bahulāśva said: After Kṛṣṇa met the gopas and gopīs, what did Kṛṣṇa and Balarāma do in Mathurā City?
Text 2

Verse text

caritraṁ paramaṁ miṣṭaṁ
sarva-pāpa-haraṁ puṇyaṁ

Synonyms

caritram — pastime ; paramam — transcendental ; miṣṭam — sweet ; śrī-kṛṣṇa-baladevayoḥ — of Śrī Kṛṣṇa and Balarāma ; sarva-pāpa — all sins ; haram — removing ; puṇyam — sacred ; catur-varga-phala-pradam — giving the four goals of life.

Translation

śrī-kṛṣṇa-baladevayoḥ catur-varga-phala-pradam Kṛṣṇa and Balarāma's sacred, sweet, and transcendental pastimes remove all sins and grant the four goals of life.
Text 3

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
anyac caritraṁ śṛṇutāc
sarva-pāpa-haraṁ puṇyaṁ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said: ; anyac — another ; caritram — pastrime ; śṛṇutāt — hear ; śrī-kṛṣṇa-baladevayoḥ — of Śrī Kṛṣṇa and Balarāma ; sarva-pāpa-haram — removing all sins ; puṇyam — sacred ; catur-varga-phala-pradam — granting thje four goals of life.

Translation

chrī-kṛṣṇa-baladevayoḥ catur-varga-phala-pradam Śrī Nārada said: Please hear another of Kṛṣṇa and Balarāma's sacred transcendental pastimes, which remove all sins and grant the four goals of life.
Text 4

Verse text

kolena pīḍitā lokāḥ
kauśāravi-purān nṛpa
mathurām āyayuḥ sarve
sa-dvijā dīna-mānasāḥ

Synonyms

kolena — By Kola ; pīḍitā — tormented ; lokāḥ — the people ; kauśāravi-purāt — from Kausaravi-pura ; nṛpa — O king ; mathurām — to Mathurā ; āyayuḥ — came ; sarve — all ; sa-dvijā — with brāhmaṇas ; dīna-mānasāḥ — troubled at heart.

Translation

Harassed by a demon named Kola, all the people of Kauśāravi-pura fled to Mathurā City.
Text 5

Verse text

aśvam āśu samāruhya
rohiṇī-nandano balaḥ
sv-alpaiḥ puraḥ-saraiḥ sārdhaṁ
mṛgayārthī vinirgataḥ

Synonyms

aśvam — a horse ; āśu — at once ; samāruhya — mounting ; rohiṇī-nandanaḥ — Balarāma ; balaḥ — Balarāma ; sv-alpaiḥ — a few ; sārdham — with ; mṛgayārthī — to hunt ; vinirgataḥ — left.

Translation

At that moment Lord Balarāma, riding on horseback and ccompanied by a few attendants, was about to leave on a hunting expedition.
Text 6

Verse text

taṁ natvābhyarcya vidhivat
tad-aṅghryoḥ patitāḥ pathi
kṛtāñjali-puṭā ūcur
harṣa-gadgadayā girā

Synonyms

tam — to Him ; natvā — bowing down ; abhyarcya — worshiping ; vidhivat — properly ; tad-aṅghryoḥ — at His feet ; patitāḥ — fallen ; pathi — on the road ; kṛtāñjali-puṭā — with folded hands ; ūcuḥ — said ; harṣa-gadgadayā — choked with happiness ; girā — with words.

Translation

Bowing down, worshiping Him, and falling at His feet, with folded hands and voices faltering with happines, the people spoke to Lord Balarāma.
Text 7

Verse text

śrī-prajā ūcuḥ
rāma rāma mahā-bāho
deva-deva mahā-bala
kolena pīḍitāḥ sarve
āgatāḥ śaraṇaṁ vayam

Synonyms

śrī-prajā ūcuḥ — the people said ; rāma — O Balarāma ; rāma — OBalarāma ; mahā-bāhaḥ — O mighty-armed ; deva-deva — O Lord of lords ; mahā-bala — O powerful one ; kolena — by Kola ; pīḍitāḥ — distressed ; sarve — all ; āgatāḥ — come ; śaraṇam — to the shelter ; vayam — we.

Translation

The people said: Balarāma! Balarāma! Mighty-armed one! Master of the demigods! Powerful one! We are all harassed by a demon named Kola. We take shalter of You.
Text 8

Verse text

daityaḥ kaṁsa-sakhaḥ kolo
jitvā kauśāraviṁ nṛpam
kauśāraveḥ pure rājyaṁ
karoti sa mahā-balaḥ

Synonyms

daityaḥ — demon ; kaṁsa-sakhaḥ — a friend of Kaṁsa ; kolaḥ — Kola ; jitvā — defeating ; kauśāravim — kausaravi ; nṛpam — King ; kauśāraveḥ — pf Kausaravi ; pure — in the city ; rājyam — kingdom ; karoti — does ; sa — he ; mahā-balaḥ — powerful.

Translation

Kola, a powerful demon-friend of Kaṁsa, defeated the king of Kauśāravi. Now he rules Kauśāravi City.
Text 9

Verse text

kauśāravis tad-bhayād dhi
gaṅgā-tīre gato nṛpaḥ
rājyārthaṁ tvat-padāmbhojaṁ
bhajate su-jitendriyaḥ

Synonyms

kauśāraviḥ — Kausaravi ; tad-bhayāt — out of fear of him ; hi — indeed ; gaṅgā-tīre — to the Gaṅgā's shore ; gataḥ — went ; nṛpaḥ — king ; rājyārtham — for his kingdom ; tvat-padāmbhojam — Your lotus feet ; bhajate — worships ; su-jitendriyaḥ — controlling his senses.

Translation

Out of fear of him, the king of Kauśāravi fled to the Gaṅgā's shore where, controlling his senses, he worships Your lotus feet to regain his kingdom.
Text 10

Verse text

tat-sahāyaṁ kuru vibho
vayaṁ yasya prajāḥ śubhāḥ
putravat pālitās tena

Synonyms

tat-sahāyam — help ; kuru — please givve ; vibhaḥ — O powerful one ; vayam — we ; yasya — of him ; prajāḥ — the subjects ; śubhāḥ — good ; putravat — like sons ; pālitāḥ — protected ; tena — by him ; mahā-saukhya-samanvitāḥ — very happy.

Translation

mahā-saukhya-samanvitāḥ O almighty one, please help him. We are his good subjects. He always protected us as if we were his own children. We were always happy under his rule.
Text 11

Verse text

kolenādyaiva duṣṭena
pīḍitāḥ satataṁ prabho
tralokya-vijayī vīraḥ
kaṁso 'pi nihatas tvayā

Synonyms

kolena — by Kola ; adya — now ; eva — indeed ; duṣṭena — the demon ; pīḍitāḥ — harassed ; satatam — always ; prabhaḥ — O Lord ; tralokya — the three worlds ; vijayī — conquering ; vīraḥ — warrior ; kaṁsaḥ — Kaṁsa ; api — even ; nihataḥ — killed ; tvayā — by You.

Translation

Now we are continually harassed by by the demon Kola. O Lord, You killed even the ferocious Kaṁsa, who had conquered the three worlds.
Text 12

Verse text

kole jīvati devendra
kaṁso 'pi na mṛtaḥ smṛtaḥ
rakṣārthaṁ sa-guṇo 'si tvaṁ
bhaktānāṁ prakṛteḥ paraḥ

Synonyms

kole — as Kola ; jīvati — lives ; devendra — O master of the demigods ; kaṁsaḥ — Kaṁsa ; api — also ; na — not ; mṛtaḥ — dead ; smṛtaḥ — considered ; rakṣārtham — for protection ; sa-guṇaḥ — appearing as an ordinary person subject to the modes of nature ; asi — are ; tvam — You ; bhaktānām — of the devotees ; prakṛteḥ — matter ; paraḥ — beyond.

Translation

O master of the demigods, we think that Kaṁsa is not dead as long as Kola remains alive. O master of the demigods, although You are transcendental, beyond the world of matter, in order to protect Your devotees You have come here, pretending to be a conditioned soul bound by the modes of nature.
Text 13

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
iti śrutvā vacas teṣāṁ
śrī-rāmo bhakta-vatsalaḥ
gaṅgā-yamunayor madhye
kauśāmbīṁ nagarīṁ yayau

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; iti — thus ; śrutvā — hearing ; vacaḥ — words ; teṣām — of them ; śrī-rāmaḥ — Śrī Balarāma ; bhakta — devotees ; vatsalaḥ — loves ; gaṅgā-yamunayoḥ — of the Gaṅgā and Yamunā ; madhye — between ; kauśāmbīm — Kausambi ; nagarīm — City ; yayau — went.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: After hearing these words, Lord Balarāma, who loves His devotees, went to Kauśāravi City in the land between the Gaṅgā and the Yamunā.
Text 14

Verse text

yoddhuṁ samāgataṁ rāmaṁ
śrutvā kolo 'pi nirgataḥ
akṣauhiṇībhir daśābhir
maṇḍitaś caṇḍa-vikramaḥ

Synonyms

yoddhum — to fight ; samāgatam — come ; rāmam — Balarāma ; śrutvā — hearing ; kolaḥ — Kola ; api — also ; nirgataḥ — went ; akṣauhiṇībhiḥ — with aksauhinis ; daśābhiḥ — ten ; maṇḍitaḥ — decorated ; caṇḍa-vikramaḥ — ferocious.

Translation

Hearing that Lord Balarāma had come to fight, ferocious Kola, decorated with ten akṣauhiṇī divisions, went to meet Him.
Texts 15 and 16

Verse text

nadīm ivāgatāṁ senāṁ
vīrāvartāṁ ca tāṁ vīkṣya
baddhvā setuṁ halaṁ balaḥ
ākṛṣya taṁ tad-agreṇa
musalenāhanad dṛḍham

Synonyms

cañcala — restless ; aśva — horses ; taraṅga — waves ; āḍhyam — opulent ; ratha — chariots ; ibha — elephants ; aśva — horses ; timiṅgilam — timingila fish ; nadīm — river ; iva — like ; āgatām — arrived ; senām — army ; pralaya — of devastation ; arṇava — the ocean ; nādinīm — roaring ; vīra — of warriors ; ca — and ; tām — that ; vīkṣya — seeing ; baddhvā — binding ; setum — a bridge ; halam — strong ; balaḥ — Balarāma ; ākṛṣya — pulling ; tam — that ; tad-agreṇa — by the tip ; musalena — by His club ; ahanat — struck ; dṛḍham — hard.

Translation

cañcalāśva-taraṅgāḍhyaṁ rathebhāśva-timiṅgilam pralayārṇava-nādinīm Lord Balarāma gazed at Kola's army, which was like a great river filled with waves of restless horses, timiṅgila fish of chariots, elephants, and horses, whirlpools of ferocious soldiers, and tumultuous roaring like a great ocean of destruction. Then the Lord, in order to make a bridge to cross this river of soldiers, began striking it with His club.
Text 17

Verse text

yugapat tat-prahāreṇa
vīrā aśvā rathā gajāḥ
sarvataḥ koṭiśaḥ petuḥ
peṣitāḥ phalavad raṇe

Synonyms

yugapat — at that moment ; tat-prahāreṇa — by His blows ; vīrā — the warriors ; aśvā — horses ; rathā — chariots ; gajāḥ — elephants ; sarvataḥ — all ; koṭiśaḥ — by the millions ; petuḥ — fell ; peṣitāḥ — crushed ; phalavat — like fruit ; raṇe — in the battle.

Translation

By the force of Lord Balarāma's blows millions of warriors, horses, chariots, and elephants fell, crushed as if they were pieces of fruit thrown on the battlefield.
Text 18

Verse text

śeṣāḥ pradudruvur vīrā
bhayārtā raṇa-maṇḍalāt
ekākī yuyudhe daityaḥ
kolo rāmeṇa śastra-bhṛt

Synonyms

śeṣāḥ — remaining ; pradudruvuḥ — fled ; vīrā — warriors ; bhayārtā — terrified ; raṇa-maṇḍalāt — from the battlefield ; ekākī — alone ; yuyudhe — fought ; daityaḥ — the demon ; kolaḥ — Kola ; rāmeṇa — with Balarāma ; śastra-bhṛt — armed with weapons.

Translation

Terrified, the surviving warriors fled from the battlefield. Then Kola, armed with many weapons, fought a duel with Lord Balarāma.
Texts 19-21

Verse text

kastūrī-patra-bhṛn mukham
sravan-madaṁ catur-dantaṁ
ghaṇṭā-ṭaṅkāra-bhīṣaṇampronnataṁ dig-gajam iva
śitam aṅkuśam ādāya
kola āruhya karṇataḥ
sva-gajaṁ nodayām āsa
baladevāya daitya-rāṭ

Synonyms

go-mutra — urine ; caya — abundance ; sindūra — sindura ; kastūrī-patra-bhṛn — muslk ; mukham — face ; suvarṇa — gold ; śṛṅkhala — chains ; āyuktam — with ; prakhacit-kaṭi-bandhanam — belt ; sravat — flowing ; madam — ichor ; catur-dantam — four tusks ; ghaṇṭā-ṭaṅkāra — tinkling of bells ; bhīṣaṇam — fearful ; pronnatam — great ; dig-gajam — an elephant holding up the directions ; iva — like ; nadat-kāla-ghana-prabham — roaring like thunder ; śitam — sharp ; aṅkuśam — goad ; ādāya — taking ; kola — Kola ; āruhya — mounting ; karṇataḥ — by the ear ; sva-gajam — his own elephant ; nodayām āsa — made it charge ; baladevāya — to Lord Balarāma ; daitya-rāṭ — the king of demons.

Translation

gomutra-caya-sindūra- suvarṇa-śṛṅkhalāyuktaṁ prakhacit-kaṭi-bandhanam nadat-kāla-ghana-prabham Mounting by its ear his four-tusked elephant bound with golden chains, its face decorated with pictures and designs drawn in gomūtra, sindūra, and musk, its ichor flowing, its bells tinkling ominously, and its body enormous as one of the elephants holding up the directions, and making his elephant trumpet like thunder, the demon-king Kola took a sharp goad in his hand and made his elephant charge Lord Balarāma.
Text 22

Verse text

āgataṁ vīkṣya taṁ nāgaṁ
mattaṁ kolena noditam
tatāḍa musalenāsau
vajreṇendro yathā girim

Synonyms

āgatam — coming ; vīkṣya — seeing ; tam — that ; nāgam — elephant ; mattam — maddened ; kolena — bo Kola ; noditam — sent ; tatāḍa — struck ; musalena — with His club ; asau — He ; vajreṇa — with the thunderbolt ; indraḥ — Indra ; yathā — as ; girim — a mountain.

Translation

Seeing the maddened elephant, pressed on by Kola, charging Him, Lord Balarāma struck it with His club as Indra strikes a mountain with his thunderbolt.
Text 23

Verse text

musalasya prahāreṇa
viśīrṇo 'bhūn mahā-gajaḥ
mṛd-ghāto naikadhaivāśu
daṇḍa-ghātena maithila

Synonyms

musalasya — of the club ; prahāreṇa — by the blow ; viśīrṇaḥ — shattered ; abhūt — became ; mahā-gajaḥ — the great elephant ; mṛd-ghātaḥ — a clay pot ; na — not ; ekadhā — one ; eva — indeed ; āśu — at once ; daṇḍa-ghātena — by the blow of a stick ; maithila — O king of Mithilā.

Translation

O king of Mithilā, the elephant was shattered by the blow from Lord Balarāma's club as a small clay pot is shattered by a stick.
Text 24

Verse text

kolaḥ kroḍa-mukho daityo
raktākṣaḥ patito gajāt
śūlaṁ cikṣepa niśitaṁ
mādhavāya mahātmane

Synonyms

kolaḥ — Kola ; kroḍa-mukhaḥ — a great mouth ; daityaḥ — the demon ; raktākṣaḥ — red eyes ; patitaḥ — fallen ; gajāt — from the elephant ; śūlam — spear ; cikṣepa — threw ; niśitam — sharp ; mādhavāya — at Balarāma ; mahātmane — the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

Kola, his eyes red and his mouth wide-open, jumped from the elephant and threw a spear at Lord Balarāma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Text 25

Verse text

musalena tadā rāmas
tac-chūlaṁ śatadhācchinat
kāca-pātraṁ yathā balo
daṇḍena ca videha-rāṭ

Synonyms

musalena — with His club ; tadā — then ; rāmaḥ — Balarāma ; tac-chūlam — the spear ; śatadhā — in a hundred pieces ; acchinat — shattered ; kāca-pātram — a crystal goblet ; yathā — as ; balaḥ — Balarāma ; daṇḍena — with a stick ; ca — and ; videha-rāṭ — O king of Videha.

Translation

O king of Videha, with His club Lord Balarāma shattered that spear into a hundred pieces as one shatters a crystal goblet with an iron rod.
Text 26

Verse text

gadāṁ gurvīṁ pragṛhya ca
balaṁ tatāḍa hṛdaye
jagarja ghanavat khalaḥ

Synonyms

sahasra-bhāra-samyuktām — weighing a thousand bharas ; gadām — club ; gurvīm — heavy ; pragṛhya — taking ; ca — and ; balam — Lord Balarāma ; tatāḍa — struck ; hṛdaye — on the chest ; jagarja — roared ; ghanavat — like a cloud ; khalaḥ — the demon.

Translation

sahasra-bhāra-samyuktāṁ Taking a club heavy as a thousand bhāras, the demon struck Lord Balarāma on the chest and roared like thunder.
Text 27

Verse text

tad-gadāyāḥ prahāreṇa
na cacāla yadūdvahaḥ
paśyatāṁ sarva-lokānāṁ
srajā hata iva dvipaḥ

Synonyms

tad-gadāyāḥ — of the club ; prahāreṇa — by the blow ; na — not ; cacāla — wavered ; yadūdvahaḥ — Balarāma ; paśyatām — looking ; sarva-lokānām — all the people ; srajā — by a garland ; hata — hit ; iva — like ; dvipaḥ — an elephant.

Translation

As everyone could see the blow of the club had no effect on Lord Balarāma. He stood like an elephant struck by a flower garland.
Text 28

Verse text

tam ākṛṣya halāgreṇa
kolaṁ kajjalavat-tanum
musalenāhanan mūrdhni
baladevo mahā-balaḥ

Synonyms

tam — him ; ākṛṣya — dragging ; halāgreṇa — by the tip of His plow ; kolam — Kol ; kajjalavat-tanum — his body like black kajjala ; musalena — by the club ; ahanat — hit ; mūrdhni — on the head ; baladevaḥ — Balarāma ; mahā-balaḥ — very powerful.

Translation

Catching Kola, who was black as mascara, and dragging him about with His plow, powerful Lord Balarāma finally hit him on the head with His club.
Text 29

Verse text

patito raṇa-maṇḍale
muṣṭi-ghātaṁ ghātayitvā

Synonyms

musala — by the club ; āhata — hit ; mūrdhā — on the head ; api — also ; patitaḥ — fallen ; raṇa-maṇḍale — in the battlefield ; muṣṭi-ghātam — a punch ; ghātayitvā — throwing ; tatra — there ; eva — indeed ; antaradhīyata — disappeared.

Translation

musalāhata-mūrdhāpi tatraivāntaradhīyata His head struck by the Lord's club, Kola fell on the battleground. Then he clapped his hands and suddenly disappeared.
Text 30

Verse text

cakāra māyāṁ māyāvī
daiteyīm ati-bhīṣaṇām
pralaya-prabhavair meghair
mahā-vāta-praṇoditaiḥ andhakāraṁ prakurvadbhir abhūd ācchāditaṁ nabhaḥ

Synonyms

cakāra — did ; māyām — magic ; māyāvī — a magician ; daiteyīm — demonic ; ati-bhīṣaṇām — very fearful ; pralaya-prabhavaiḥ — with the power of destruction ; meghaiḥ — with clouds ; mahā-vāta-praṇoditaiḥ — send by great winds ; andhakāram — blinding darkness ; prakurvadbhiḥ — making ; abhūt — did ; ācchāditam — covered ; nabhaḥ — the sky.

Translation

Kola, a great magician, made very terrifying and demonic illusions. Bringing devastating clouds pushed by hurricane winds, he covered the sky with a blinding darkness.
Text 31

Verse text

japā-puṣpa-samān bindūn
ajasraṁ rudhirasya ca
mocayitvātha bībhatsa-
varṣāś cakrur ghanāghanāḥ

Synonyms

japā-puṣpa-samān — like roses ; bindūn — drops ; ajasram — at once ; rudhirasya — of blood ; ca — and ; mocayitvā — releasing ; atha — then ; bībhatsa — terrifying ; varṣāḥ — rains ; cakruḥ — did ; ghanāghanāḥ — great clouds.

Translation

The great clouds made a terrifying monsoon rain of blood drops big as roses.
Text 32

Verse text

dṛṣṭvā tābhiś ca varṣābhir
hā-hā-kāro babhūva ha

Synonyms

pūya — pus ; medaḥ — fat ; ati-viṭ — great stool ; mūtra — urine ; surā — wine ; māṁsa — flesh ; samanvitāḥ — with ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; tābhiḥ — with them ; ca — and ; varṣābhiḥ — rains ; hā-hā-kāraḥ — alas! alas! ; babhūva — was ; ha — indeed.

Translation

pūya-medo-'ti-viṇ-mūtra- surā-māṁsa-samanvitāḥ Then it rained pus, fat, stool, urine, wine, and flesh. There was a great cry of {Alas! Alas!"
Texts 33 and 34

Verse text

jṣātvātha tat-kṛtāṁ māyāṁ
baladevo mahā-prabhuḥ
cikṣepa musalaṁ dīrghaṁ
sarvāstra-ghātakaṁ svacchaṁ
aṣṭa-dhātu-mayaṁ dṛḍham

Synonyms

jṣātvā — knowing ; atha — then ; tat-kṛtām — done by him ; māyām — magic ; baladevaḥ — Balarāma ; mahā-prabhuḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; cikṣepa — thre ; musalam — His club ; dīrgham — great ; para-sainya-vidāraṇam — breaking the enemy's army ; sarva — all ; astra — weapons ; ghātakam — blow ; svaccham — clear ; aṣṭa-dhātu-mayam — made of eight metals ; dṛḍham — firm ; śata-yojana-vistīrṇam — 800 miles long ; pralayāgni-sama-prabham — splendid as the fire of cosmic devastation.

Translation

para-sainya-vidāraṇam śata-yojana-vistīrṇaṁ pralayāgni-sama-prabham Aware that this was all a magical illusion, Lord Balarāma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, threw His great eight-hundred-mile club, the best of weapons, which was made of eight metals, splendid as the fires at the time of cosmic devastation, and able to cut to pieces any enemy's army.
Text 35

Verse text

balāstraṁ musalaṁ reje
bhramad daśa-dig-antare
vidārayad ghanān vyomni
nīhāraṁ ca yathā raviḥ

Synonyms

bala — Lord Balarāma's ; astram — weapon ; musalam — club ; reje — shone ; bhramat — wandering ; daśa-dig-antare — the ten directions ; vidārayat — cutting apart ; ghanān — the clouds ; vyomni — in the sky ; nīhāram — fog ; ca — and ; yathā — as ; raviḥ — the sun.

Translation

Lord Balarāma's club circled the ten directions, cutting away the clouds as the the sun cuts away the morning fog.
Text 36

Verse text

tad-vyomni pragataṁ dṛṣṭvā
halāstraṁ ca svataḥ prabhuḥ
samutpatyākṛṣya balān
madhye tān vidadāra ha

Synonyms

tad-vyomni — in the sky ; pragatam — gone ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; halāstram — Lord Balarāma's plow ; ca — and ; svataḥ — own ; prabhuḥ — the Lord ; samutpatya — lifting ; ākṛṣya — dragging ; balān — by force ; madhye — in the middle ; tān — them ; vidadāra — cut ; ha — indeed.

Translation

Seeing that His club was still in the sky, the Lord took up His plow weapon and continued to break apart the clouds.
Text 37

Verse text

nāśaṁ gatāyāṁ māyāyāṁ
baladevo mahā-balaḥ
gṛhītvā bhuja-daṇḍābhyāṁ
bhuja-daṇḍe madotkaṭe

Synonyms

nāśam — to destruction ; gatāyām — gone ; māyāyām — the magic ; baladevaḥ — Lord Balarāma ; mahā-balaḥ — very powerful ; gṛhītvā — taking ; bhuja-daṇḍābhyām — with both arms ; bhuja-daṇḍe — the arms ; madotkaṭe — ferocious.

Translation

When the magical illusion was completely dispelled, with both hands powerful Lord Balarāma grabbed the ferocious demon's arm.
Text 38

Verse text

bhrāmayan bāla iva taṁ
pratūlaṁ sa itas tataḥ
pātayām āsa bhū-pṛṣṭhe
kamaṇḍalum ivārbhakaḥ

Synonyms

bhrāmayan — whirling about ; bāla — a child ; iva — like ; tam — him ; pratūlam — cotton ; sa — he ; itaḥ — here ; tataḥ — and there ; pātayām āsa — threw ; bhū-pṛṣṭhe — to the ground ; kamaṇḍalum — a kamandalu ; iva — like ; arbhakaḥ — a child.

Translation

Whirling him around and around as a child whirls a cotton swab, Lord Balarāma threw the demon to the ground as a child throws a kamaṇḍalu.
Text 39

Verse text

tasya daityasya pātena
sābdhi-śaila-vanaiḥ saha
cakampe nāḍikā-mātraṁ
sarvaṁ bhū-khaṇḍa-maṇḍalam

Synonyms

tasya — of him ; daityasya — the demon ; pātena — by the fall ; sābdhi-śaila-vanaiḥ — with oceans, mountains, and forests ; saha — with ; cakampe — trembled ; nāḍikā-mātram — tube ; sarvam — all ; bhū-khaṇḍa-maṇḍalam — the circle of the earth.

Translation

When the demon fell the entire earth, with its oceans, mountains, and forests, shook.
Text 40

Verse text

bhagna-dantaś calan-netro
mūrchito nidhanaṁ yayau
kolo nāma mahā-daityo
vṛtro vajra-hato yathā

Synonyms

bhagna-dantaḥ — broken teeth ; calan-netraḥ — moving eyes ; mūrchitaḥ — fainted ; nidhanam — death ; yayau — attained ; kolaḥ — Kola ; nāma — named ; mahā-daityaḥ — the great demon ; vṛtraḥ — Vṛtra ; vajra — by the thunderbolt ; hataḥ — struck ; yathā — as.

Translation

His teeth broken and his eyes moving, the great demon named Kola fainted and died, as Vṛtra did when he was hit by Indra's thunderbolt.
Text 41

Verse text

tadā jaya-jayārāvo
divi bhūmau babhūva ha
deva-dundubhayo neduḥ
puṣpa-varṣāḥ suraiḥ kṛtāḥ

Synonyms

tadā — then ; jaya-jayārāvaḥ — sounds of "Victory! Victory!" ; divi — in the sky ; bhūmau — on the earth ; babhūva — was ; ha — indeed ; deva-dundubhayaḥ — the dundubhis of the demigods ; neduḥ — sounded ; puṣpa-varṣāḥ — showers of flowers ; suraiḥ — by the demigods ; kṛtāḥ — done.

Translation

At that moment there was a great tumult of "Victory! Victory!" in both the heaven and earth, the celestial dundubhi drums sounded, and the demigods showered flowers.
Text 42

Verse text

itthaṁ kolaṁ ghātayitvā
baladevo 'cyutāgrajaḥ
dattvātha kauśāravaye
kauśāmbīṁ ca purīṁ tataḥ

Synonyms

ittham — thus ; kolam — Kola ; ghātayitvā — killing ; baladevaḥ — Lord Balarāma ; acyutāgrajaḥ — the elder brother of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead ; dattvā — giving ; atha — then ; kauśāravaye — to King Kauśāravi ; kauśāmbīm — Kauśāravi City ; ca — and ; purīm — the city ; tataḥ — then.

Translation

Having killed the demon Kola, Lord Balarāma, the elder brother of the infallible Supreme Personality of Godhead, returned Kauśāravi City to King Kauśāravi.
Text 43

Verse text

snātuṁ bhāgirathīṁ prāgād
gargācāryādibhir vṛtaḥ
lokānāṁ saṅgrahaṁ kartuṁ
sarva-doṣa-kṣayāya ca

Synonyms

snātum — to bathe ; bhāgirathīm — in the Gaṅgā ; prāgāt — went ; gargācāryādibhiḥ — headed by Garga MUni ; vṛtaḥ — surrounded ; lokānām — of the people ; saṅgraham — protection ; kartum — to do ; sarva-doṣa-kṣayāya — to remove all sins ; ca — and.

Translation

Then, to remove all sins and to protect all the worlds, Lord Balarāma, accompanied by Garga Muni and a host of great sages, went to bathe in the Gaṅgā.
Text 44

Verse text

snāpayāṁ cakrur āryās te
gaṅgāyāṁ mādhavaṁ balam
veda-mantrair maṅgalaiś ca
gargācāryādayo dvijāḥ

Synonyms

snāpayāṁ cakruḥ — bathes ; āryāḥ — the saints ; te — they ; gaṅgāyām — in the Gaṅgā ; mādhavam — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; balam — Balarāma ; veda — of the Vedas ; mantraiḥ — with mantras ; maṅgalaiḥ — auspicious ; ca — and ; gargācāryādayaḥ — headed by garga Muni ; dvijāḥ — the brāhmaṇas.

Translation

Chanting auspicious Vedic mantras, the saintly brāhmaṇas headed by Garga Muni performed a ritual bathing of Lord Balarāma, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, in the waters of the Gaṅgā.
Texts 45 and 46

Verse text

lakṣaṁ gajānāṁ vaideha
syandanānāṁ dvi-lakṣakam
hayānāṁ ca tathā koṭiṁ
dhenūnām arbudaṁ daśa
śatārbhudaṁ ca ratnānāṁ
bhāraṁ jambūnadāvṛtam
rāmo dattvā brāhmaṇebhyaḥ
prayayau mathurāṁ purīm

Synonyms

lakṣam — a hundred thousand ; gajānām — elkephants ; vaideha — O king of Videha ; syandanānām — of chariots ; dvi-lakṣakam — two hundred thousand ; hayānām — of horses ; ca — and ; tathā — so ; koṭim — ten million ; dhenūnām — of cows ; arbudam — a hundred million ; daśa — ten ; śatārbhudam — ten billion ; ca — and ; ratnānām — of jewels ; bhāram — abundance ; jambūnadāvṛtam — covered with gold ; rāmaḥ — Lord Balarāma ; dattvā — giving ; brāhmaṇebhyaḥ — to the brāhmaṇas ; prayayau — went ; mathurām — to Mathurā ; purīm — City.

Translation

O king of Videha, after giving a hundred thousand elephants, two hundred thousand chariots, ten million horses, one billion cows, and ten billion ornaments of gold and jewels in charity to the brāhmaṇas, Lord Balarāma returned to Mathurā City.
Text 47

Verse text

yatra rāmeṇa gaṅgāyāṁ
kṛtaṁ snānaṁ videha-rāḍ
tatra tīrthaṁ mahā-puṇyaṁ
rāma-tīrthaṁ vidur budhāḥ

Synonyms

yatra — where ; rāmeṇa — with Balarāma ; gaṅgāyām — in the Ganges ; kṛtam — done ; snānam — bath ; videha-rāḍ — O king of Videha ; tatra — there ; tīrtham — holy place ; mahā-puṇyam — very sacred ; rāma-tīrtham — Rāma-tīrtha ; viduḥ — know ; budhāḥ — the wise

Translation

O king of Videha, this very sacred place, where Rāma bathed in the Ganges, the wise know as Rāma-tīrtha. Note: Texts 47-60 are quoted by Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura in His Śrī Navadvīpa-dhāma-māhātmya, Pramāṇa-khaṇḍa.
Text 48

Verse text

kārttikyāṁ kārttike snatvā
ramatīrthe tu jāhnavīm
haridvārāc chata-guṇaṁ
puṇyaṁ vai labhate janaḥ

Synonyms

kārttikyām — on the full-moon day ; kārttike — in the month of Kārttika ; snatvā — having bathed ; ramatīrthe — at Rāma-tīrtha ; tu — indeed ; jāhnavīm — in the Ganges ; haridvārāt — from Hardwar ; śata — a hundred times ; guṇam — multiplied ; puṇyam — piety ; vai — indeed ; labhate — attains ; janaḥ — a person.

Translation

A person who on the full-moon day of the month of Kārttika bathes in the Ganges at Rāma-tīrtha attains piety a hundred times greater than at Hardwar.
Text 49

Verse text

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca
kausambāc ca kiyad dūraṁ
sthale kasmin mahā-mune
ramatīrthaṁ mahā-puṇyaṁ mahyaṁ vaktuṁ tvam arhasi

Synonyms

śrī-bahulāśvaḥ — Śrī Bahulāśva ; uvāca — said ; kausambāt — from Kusanagara ; ca — and ; kiyat — how much? ; dūram — far ; sthale — place ; kasmin — in what? ; mahā-mune — O great sage ; ramatīrtham — Rāma-tīrtha ; mahā-puṇyam — great piety ; mahyam — to me ; vaktum — to speak ; tvam — you ; arhasi — desrve.

Translation

Śrī Bahulāśva said: How far, and in what direction from Kauśāravi City, is very sacred Rāma-tīrtha? Please tell me.
Text 50

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
kausambāc ca tad īśānyāṁ
catur-yojanam eva hi
vayasyaṁ sūkara-kṣetrāc
catur-yojanaṁ eva ca

Synonyms

śrī-nāradaḥ — Śrī Nārada ; uvāca — said ; kausambāt — from Kusanagara ; ca — and ; tat — that ; īśānyām — north ; catur-yojanam — four yojanas (32 miles) ; eva — indeed ; hi — indeed ; vayasyam — northwest ; sūkara-kṣetrat — from Koladvīpa ; ca — and ; catur-yojanam — four yojanas ; eva — indeed ; ca — and.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: It is 32 miles north of Kauśāravi City and 32 miles northwest of Koladvīpa.
Text 51

Verse text

karṇakṣetrāc ca ṣaṭ-krośair
nalakṣetrāc ca pañcabhiḥ
āgneyyāṁ diśi rājendra
rāma-tīrthaṁ vadanti hi

Synonyms

karṇakṣetrāt — from Kurukṣetra ; ca — and ; ṣaṭ — six ; krośaiḥ — krośas ; nalakṣetrāt — from Nalakṣetra ; ca — and ; pañcabhiḥ — with five ; agneyyām — in the southeast ; diśi — direction ; rājendra — O great king ; rāmatīrtham — Rāma-tīrtha ; vadanti — say ; hi — indeed.

Translation

O great king, they say that Rāma-tīrtha 12 miles southeast of Kurukṣetra and 10 miles southeast of Nalakṣetra.
Text 52

Verse text

bilvakeśavanāt punaḥ
pūrvasyāṁ ca tribhiḥ krośai
rāmatīrthaṁ vidur budhāḥ

Synonyms

vṛddha-keśī-siddha-pīṭhat — from Vṛddha-keśī-siddha-pīṭha ; bilvakeśavanāt — from Bilvakeśavana ; punaḥ — again ; pūrvasyām — in the east ; ca — and ; tribhiḥ krośaiḥ — with three krośas ; rāmatīrtham — Rāma-tīrtha ; viduḥ — know ; budhāḥ — the wise

Translation

vṛddha-keśī-siddha-pīṭhad The wise know that Rāma-tīrtha is 6 miles east of Vṛddha-keśī-siddha-pīṭha and Bilvakeśavana.
Text 53

Verse text

dṛḍhāśvo vaṅga-rājo 'bhūt
kurūpaṁ lomaśa-muniṁ
dṛṣṭvā jahāsa satataṁ
taṁ śaśāpa mahā-muniḥ

Synonyms

dṛḍhāśvaḥ — Dṛḍhāśva ; vaṅga-rājaḥ — the king of Bengal ; abhūt — was ; kurūpam — deformed ; lomasa-munim — Lomaśa Muni ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; jahāsa — laughed ; satatam — always ; tam — him ; śaśāpa — cursed ; mahā-muniḥ — the great sage.

Translation

There was a king of Bengal named Dṛḍhāśva who always laughed at deformed Lomaśa Muni. The great sage Lomaśa cursed him:
Text 54

Verse text

vikarālaḥ kroḍa-mukho
'suro 'bhavan mahā-khalaḥ
itthaṁ sa muni-śāpena
kolaḥ kroda-mukho 'bhavat

Synonyms

vikarālaḥ — horrible ; kroḍa-mukhaḥ — with the face of a pig ; asuraḥ — demon ; bhava — become ; mahā-khalaḥ — a great demon ; ittham — in this way ; saḥ — he ; muni-śāpena — by the sage's curse ; kolaḥ — Kola ; kroḍa-mukhaḥ — with the face of a pig ; abhavat — became.

Translation

"Now become a horrible demon with the face of a pig!" By the sage's curse the king became a pig-faced demon named Kola.
Text 55

Verse text

tyaktvā svam āsurīṁ tanum
kolo nāma mahā-daityaḥ paraṁ kṣetraṁ jagāma ha

Synonyms

baladeva — of Lord Balarāma ; prahāreṇa — by the blows ; tyaktvā — abandoning ; svam — his ; āsurīm — demon ; tanum — body ; kolaḥ — Kola ; nāma — name ; mahā-daityaḥ — the great demon ; paraṁ kṣetram — to the supreme abode ; jagāma — went ; ha — indeed.

Translation

baladeva-prahāreṇa Killed by Lord Baladeva, the great demon Kola gave up his demon body and went to the spiritual world.
Text 56

Verse text

tato rāmo mantribhiś ca
uddhavādibhir anvitaḥ
jahnu-tīrthaṁ jagāmāśu
yatra dakṣaḥ śruter abhūt

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; rāmaḥ — Balarāma ; mantribhiḥ — with advisors ; ca — and ; uddhava-ādibhiḥ — headed by Uddhava ; anvitaḥ — with ; jahnu-tīrtham — to Jahnu-tīrtha ; jagāma — went ; āśu — at once ; yatra — where ; dakṣaḥ — expert ; śruteḥ — in the Vedas ; abhūt — was.

Translation

Then Lord Balarāma, accompanied by Uddhava and other advisers, at once went to Jahnu-tīrtha, where He became learned in the Vedas.
Text 57

Verse text

gaṅgā brāhmaṇa-mukhyasya
jāhnavī yena kathyate
datvā dānaṁ dvijātibhya
uṣu rātrau janaiḥ saha

Synonyms

gaṅgā — Ganges ; brāhmaṇa-mukhyasya — of the best of brāhmaṇas ; jāhnavī — Jāhnavī ; yena — by whom ; kathyate — is called ; datvā — giving ; dānam — charity ; dvijātibhyaḥ — to the brāhmaṇas ; uṣuḥ — resided ; rātrau — at night ; janaiḥ — people ; saha — with.

Translation

Jahnu is the great Brāhmaṇa after whom the Ganges is called Jāhnavī. There Lord Balarāma gave chairty ot the brāhmaṇas and then stayed the night with His associates.
Text 58

Verse text

tatas taṁ pāścime bhāge
pāṇḍavānām ati-priyam
āhāra-sthānakaṁ prāpya rātrau vāsaṁ cakāra ha

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; tam — that ; pāścime bhāge — in the west ; pāṇḍavānām — to the Pāṇḍavas ; ati-priyam — very dear ; āhāra-sthānakam — Āhāra-sthāna ; prāpya — attained ; rātrau — at night ; vāsam — residence ; cakāra — made ; ha — indeed.

Translation

Going west, He reached Āhāra-sthāna, which is very dear to the Pāṇḍavas, where He stayed the night.
Text 59

Verse text

tatra dānaṁ dvijātibhyo
datvā sad-guṇa-bhojanam
tato yojanaṁ ekaṁ ca
devaṁ māṇḍūka-samjṣakam

Synonyms

tatra — there ; dānam — charity ; dvijātibhyaḥ — to the brāhmaṇas ; datvā — giving ; sad-guṇa-bhojanam — delicious food ; tataḥ — then ; yojanaṁ ekam — one yojana ; ca — and ; devam — the Deity ; maṇḍuka-samjṣakam — named Maṇḍuka.

Translation

There He gave delicious foods in charity to the brāhmaṇas. Then He went eight miles away to the devotee named Māṇḍūkadeva.
Text 60

Verse text

tapas taptaṁ mahat tena
cānte deva-kṛpāptaye
tad-arthaṁ sva-samājena
baladevo jagāma ha

Synonyms

tapas taptam — performed austerities ; mahat — great ; tena — by Him ; ca — and ; ante — in the end ; deva — of the Diety ; kṛpā — mercy ; āptaye — to attain ; tad-artham — for that purpose ; sva-samājena — with His group ; baladevaḥ — Balarāma ; jagāma — went ; ha — indeed.

Translation

Māṇḍūkadeva had performed great austerities to attain the mercy of the Lord. That is the reason Lord Balarāma went there with His associates.
Texts 61 and 62

Verse text

ūrdhvāsyam eka-pāda-sthaṁ
sva-bhaktaṁ hṛdaya-sthaṁ svaṁ
taṁ jahāra tadānantas
tato bāhye dadarśa ha
sa dṛṣṭvānanta-devasya
rūpaṁ parama-sundaram

Synonyms

ūrdhvāsyam — his head raised ; eka-pāda-stham — standing on one foot ; dhyāna-stimita-locanam — his eyes closed in meditation ; sva-bhaktam — His devotee ; hṛdaya-stham — situated in the heart ; svam — own ; mūrti-darśana-lolupam — eager to see the form ; tam — him ; jahāra — embracing ; tadā — then ; anantaḥ — the limitless Lord ; tataḥ — then ; bāhye — outside ; dadarśa — saw ; ha — Oh ; sa — he ; dṛṣṭvā — seeing ; ananta-devasya — of Lord Ananta ; rūpam — the form ; parama-sundaram — very handsome.

Translation

dhyāna-stimita-locanam mūrti-darśana-lolupam Standing on one foot, his head up, and his eyes closed, Māṇḍūkadeva meditated on the Lord, whom he could see in his heart. Still, Māṇḍūkadeva yearned to see the Lord's form with his eyes open. When Lord Balarāma, now in His form of Lord Ananta, embraced him, Māṇḍūkadeva opened his eyes and saw before him the sublimely handsome form of Lord Ananta.
Text 63

Verse text

sragvy-eka-kuṇḍalaṁ gauraṁ
stutvā paramayā bhaktyā
papāta caraṇau punaḥ

Synonyms

sragvī — wearing a garland ; eka-kuṇḍalam — one earring ; gauram — fair ; tālāṅka-ratha-samyutam — His chariot marked with the insignia of a palm tree ; stutvā — offering prayers ; paramayā — with great ; bhaktyā — devotion ; papāta — fell ; caraṇau — at the feet ; punaḥ — again and again.

Translation

tālāṅka-ratha-samyutam Lord Ananta had a fair complexion. He wore a flower garland and a single earring, and His chariot bore the insignia of a palm tree. Offering prayers with great devotion, Māṇḍūkadeva fell again and again at His feet.
Texts 64 and 65

Verse text

tasya śiṛṣṇā karaṁ datvā
varaṁ brūhīty uvāca ha
yadi prasanno bhagavān
anugrahyo 'smi vā yadi
sarvottamāṁ bhāgavatīṁ
saṁhitāṁ śuka-vaktrataḥ
nirgatāṁ dehi māṁ svāmin
kali-doṣa-harāṁ parām

Synonyms

tasya — of Him ; śiṛṣṇā — head ; karam — hands ; datvā — placing ; varam — benediction ; brūhī — please give ; iti — thus ; uvāca — said ; ha — indeed ; yadi — if ; prasannaḥ — pleased ; bhagavān — the Lord ; anugrahyaḥ — the object of mercy ; asmi — I am ; vā — or ; yadi — if ; sarva — of all ; uttamām — the best ; bhāgavatīṁ saṁhitām — Śrī Bhāgavatī-saṁhitā ; śuka-vaktrataḥ — from the mouth of Śukadeva Gosvāmī ; nirgatām — come ; dehi — please give ; mām — me ; – svamin — O LOrd ; kali — of Kali-yuga ; doṣa — the faults ; harām — removing ; parām — transcendental.

Translation

Placing a hand on His devotee's head, Lord Balarāma, Ask for a benedcition." Māṇḍūkadeva said, "If the Lord is pleased wth Me, or if the Lord feels compassion on Me, then, O Lord, please give me the Bhāgavatī-saṁhitā, which has come from the mouth of Śukadeva Gosvāmī, and which removes the evils of the age of Kali." Note: Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura quotes these two verses in His Śrī Navadvīpa-dhāma-māhātmya, Pramāṇa-khaṇḍa.
Text 66

Verse text

śrī-baladeva uvāca
uddhava-dvārataḥ prāptir
bhaviṣyati tavānagha
śrīmad-bhagavatī kīrtir
adhikā ya kalau yuge

Synonyms

śrī-baladeva uvāca — Śrī Balarāma said ; uddhava-dvārataḥ — by Uddhava ; prāptiḥ — attained ; bhaviṣyati — will be ; tava — of you ; anagha — O sinless one ; śrīmad-bhagavatī — Śrīmad-bhagavatī ; kīrtiḥ — the glory ; adhikā — great ; ya — which ; kalau yuge — in Kali-yuga.

Translation

Śrī Balarāma said: O sinless one, from Uddhava you will learn the Śrīmad Bhāgavatī-samhitā, which is gloriously manifest in the age of Kali.
Text 67

Verse text

śrī-māṇḍūka uvāca
kathaṁ bhagavatā dattā
mukhyā tasyādhikāritā
kadā yogaṁ mama svasmin
kuru sandeha-bhañjanam

Synonyms

śrī-māṇḍūka uvāca — Śrī Māṇḍūkadeva said ; katham — how? ; bhagavatā — by the Lord ; dattā — given ; mukhyā — first ; tasya — of that ; adhikāritā — superiority ; kadā — when? ; yogam — meeting ; mama — of me ; svasmin — own ; kuru — please do ; sandeha-bhañjanam — removing doubts.

Translation

Śrī Māṇḍūkadeva said: Why is this scripture given by the Lord so great? When will I learn it? O Lord, please break apart my doubts.
Text 68

Verse text

śrī-baladeva uvāca
kathayāmi paraṁ gopyaṁ
rahasyaṁ paramādbhutam
adyāpi mama sāmīpye
uddhavo 'yaṁ virājate

Synonyms

śrī-baladeva uvāca — Śrī Balarāma said ; kathayāmi — I will tell ; param — agreat ; gopyam — secret ; rahasyam — confidential ; paramādbhutam — very wonderful ; adya — today ; api — also ; mama — of Me ; sāmīpye — near ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava ; ayam — he ; virājate — is manifested.

Translation

Śrī Balarāma said: I will tell you a great secret. Even now, Uddhava is nearby.
Text 69

Verse text

tad-darśanaṁ kuru paraṁ
adya tīrthasya yatrāyāṁ
upadeśo na te bhavet

Synonyms

tad-darśanam — the sight of him ; kuru — do ; param — great ; ācārya-sampradāyikam — the community of gurus ; adya — now ; tīrthasya — of the holy place ; yatrāyām — in pilgrimage ; upadeśaḥ — teaching ; na — not ; te — of you ; bhavet — may be.

Translation

ācārya-sampradāyikam Go and see him, a great ācārya in the disciplic succession. I will not teach you further, for now I am going on pilgrimage.
Text 70

Verse text

yathopadeṣṭa bhavati
tena te kathayāmy aham
uddhavaḥ sthāpitaḥ śrīmad-
ācāryaḥ saṁhitāmayaḥ

Synonyms

yathopadeṣṭa — as taught ; bhavati — is ; tena — by him ; te — to you ; kathayāmi — I tell ; aham — I ; uddhavaḥ — Uddhava ; sthāpitaḥ — placed ; śrīmad-ācāryaḥ — the teacher ; saṁhitāmayaḥ — learning in that saṁhitā.

Translation

I tell you Uddhava is a great teacher of Śrīmad Bhāgavatī-samhitā.
Texts 71-73

Verse text

gopīnāṁ prītaye kṛtaḥ
sva-svarūpaṁ parikaraṁ
yat kiñcit bhagavattamam
kṛṣṇena paramātmanā
uddhavaṁ caiva svātmānaṁ
eka evācirād vibhuḥ
sākṣāt-kāraṁ cakārādau
na svīyam antaraṁ kvacit
śrī-kṛṣṇam eva te jṣātvā
pūjayām āsur ādarāt

Synonyms

nandādi-vraja-vāsīnām — the people of Vraja, headed by nanda ; gopīnām — of the gopīs ; prītaye — to please ; kṛtaḥ — done ; sva-svarūpam — own form ; yat — what ; kiñcit — something ; bhagavattamam — very exalted ; sarva-svabhāva-guṇakam — with all virtues ; kṛṣṇena — —by Lord Kṛṣṇa ; paramātmanā — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; uddhavam — Uddhava ; ca — and ; eva — certainly ; svātmānam — self ; eka — one ; eva — indeed ; acirāt — quickly ; vibhuḥ — the Lord ; sākṣāt-kāram — directky manifest ; cakāra — did ; ādau — at the first ; na — not ; svīyam — own ; antaram — then ; kvacit — sometime ; śrī-kṛṣṇam — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; eva — indeed ; te — they ; jṣātvā — understanding ; pūjayām āsuḥ — worshiped ; ādarāt — with reverence.

Translation

nandādi-vraja-vāsīnāṁ sarva-svabhāva-guṇakaṁ To please Nanda, the gopīs, and the other people of Vraja, Lord Kṛṣṇa sent to them His personal associate Uddhava, who is very virtuous and exalted, and who has a transcendental form like that of the Lord Himself. Lord Kṛṣṇa did not directly appear to them at first. First he sent Uddhava. Then, when they understood the true nature of Kṛṣṇa, the people of Vraja worshiped Him with great reverence.
Text 74

Verse text

vasantartuś ca grīṣmo 'pi
sa cakāra vrajātmakau
śamayām āsa rādhāyaḥ
śokaṁ tat-kuṇḍa-pārśvajaḥ

Synonyms

vasantartuḥ — spring ; ca — and ; grīṣme — in summer ; api — even ; sa — not ; cakāra — did ; vrajātmakau — the two Lords of Vraja ; śamayām āsa — pacified ; rādhāyaḥ — of Rādhā ; śokam — the grief ; tat-kuṇḍa-pārśvajaḥ — by the side of Her lake.

Translation

Staying at Rādhā-kuṇḍa during the spring and summer seasons, Uddhava pacified Śrī Rādhā's grief.
Text 75

Verse text

sarvaṁ bhū-maṇḍalaṁ tatra
vicacāra vrajānugaiḥ
viyogārti-haraḥ prokto
gavāṁ nandādi-gopinām

Synonyms

sarvam — all ; bhū-maṇḍalam — the earth ; tatra — there ; vicacāra — considered ; vrajānugaiḥ — with the followers of Vraja ; viyogārti — the sufferings of separation ; haraḥ — removing ; proktaḥ — said ; gavām — of the cows ; nandādi-gopinām — the gopas headed by Nanda.

Translation

Uddhava wandered the earth with devotees that were followers of the people of Vraja. He removed the sufferings Nanda, the gopas, and the cows felt in Lord Kṛṣṇa's absence.
Text 76

Verse text

sarvaḥ parikarāgraṇīḥ
bhagavān dharma-gup-tanuḥ

Synonyms

mantrādhikāra-kuśalāḥ — an excpert counselor ; sarvaḥ — all ; parikarāgraṇīḥ — the best of the Lord's assocuates ; atha — then ; antardhāna-velāyām — when He had disdappeared ; bhagavān — the Lord ; dharma-gup-tanuḥ — the protector of religion.

Translation

mantrādhikāra-kuśalaḥ athāntardhāna-velāyāṁ He is the best of counselors and the first of the Lord's personal associates. When Lord Kṛṣṇa is absent, he becomes the protector of the true religion.
Text 77

Verse text

tasmai sva-tejasam api
dāsyate paramādbhutam
mudrādhikāraṁ sarvatra
sarvadaiva virājate

Synonyms

tasmai — to him ; sva-tejasam — His own power ; api — also ; dāsyate — will give ; paramādbhutam — very wonderful ; mudrādhikāram — able to teach ; sarvatra — everywhere ; sarvadā — always ; eva — indeed ; virājate — shines.

Translation

The Supreme Lord will give His own very wonderful transcendental potency to him. In this way he will be glorious in all times and all places.
Text 78

Verse text

antardhāne tu sva-sthāne
dattā tasyādhikāritā
badarī-sthaṁ sa-parikaram
dharmajaṁ bodhayiṣyati

Synonyms

antardhāne — disappeared ; tu — indeed ; sva-sthāne — to His own abode ; dattā — given ; tasya — of him ; adhikāritā — uathority ; badarī-stham — in Badarikasrama ; sa-parikaram — with associates ; dharmajam — nārāyaṇ Ṛṣni ; bodhayiṣyati — will teach.

Translation

When in the future the Lord leaves this world and returns to His own transcendental abode, Uddhava, empowered by Him, will go to Badarikāśrama. There he will teach Nārāyaṇa Ṛṣi and His followers.
Text 79

Verse text

hārī saiva bhaviṣyati
vajranābho yādavānāṁ
māthure sambhaviṣyati

Synonyms

arjunādi — headed by Arjuna ; viyogārti — the sufferings of separation ; hārī — removing ; sa — that ; eva — indeed ; bhaviṣyati — will be ; vajranābhaḥ — Vajrabnābha ; yādavānām — of the Yādavas ; māthure — in Mathurā ; sambhaviṣyati — will be.

Translation

arjunādi-viyogārti- Uddhava will remove the sufferings Arjuna and the other devotees feel in Lord Kṛṣṇa's absence. After him, a devotee named Vajranābha will take birth in the Yādava dynasty in Mathurā.
Text 80

Verse text

śrī-kṛṣṇasyaiva pautreṣu
mahā-rājṣī-gaṇeṣu ca
viyogārti-haraś caiva
sthāpyate śrī-hariḥ svayam

Synonyms

śrī-kṛṣṇasya — of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; eva — indeed ; pautreṣu — among the grandchildren ; mahā-rājṣī-gaṇeṣu — among the queens ; ca — and ; viyogārti-haraḥ — removing the sufferings of separation ; ca — and ; eva — indeed ; sthāpyate — is establ ; śrī-hariḥ — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; svayam — Himself.

Translation

He will be like Lord Kṛṣṇa Himself, come to relieve the sufferings the Lord's grandsons and their wives feel in Lord Kṛṣṇa's absence.
Text 81

Verse text

kauravāṇāṁ kule rājā
parīkṣid it viśrutaḥ
tasya putro 'ti-tejasvī
vikhyāto janamejayaḥ

Synonyms

kauravāṇām — of the Kauravas ; kule — in the dynasty ; rājā — the king ; pasrīkṣit — Rapīkṣit ; it — thus ; viśrutaḥ — famous ; tasya — of him ; putraḥ — the son ; ati — very ; tejasvī — powerfgul ; vikhyātaḥ — famous ; janamejayaḥ — Janamejaya.

Translation

In the Kaurava dynasty King Parīkṣit will be famous. His very powerful son Janamejaya will also be famous.
Text 82

Verse text

pituḥ śatru-hanaṁ yajṣaṁ
kariṣyati na saṁśayaḥ
tasyāpi sarva-sāmagrī
hy uddhava-dvārato bhavet

Synonyms

śatru-hanam — killing the enemies ; yajṣam — a yajna ; kariṣyati — will do ; na — no ; saṁśayaḥ — doubt ; tasya — of him ; api — also ; sarva-sāmagrī — all things ; hi — indeed ; uddhava-dvārataḥ — by Uddhava ; bhavet — may be.

Translation

He will perform a yajṣa to kill his father's enemies. Uddhava will bring the ingredients for that yajṣa.
Text 83

Verse text

śrīmad-bhāgavataṁ divyaṁ
purāṇaṁ vacanaṁ tadā
gaurānvayasya samprāptir
bhaviṣyati na saṁśayaḥ

Synonyms

śrīmad-bhāgavatam — Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam ; divyam — transcendental ; purāṇam — Purāṇa ; vacanam — words ; tadā — then ; gaura-anvayasya — of Lord Gaura ; samprāptiḥ — attainment ; bhaviṣyati — will be ; na — no ; saṁśayaḥ — doubt

Translation

Then he wil hear the splendid Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam Purāṇa, which predicts that the Supreme Personality of Godhead will appear here in a fair-complexioned form. Of this there is no doubt. Note: Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura quotes this verse in His Śrī Navadvīpa-dhāma-māhātmya, Pramāṇa-khaṇḍa.
Text 84

Verse text

śrīmat-prasādād viprarṣer
tad-dvārā sarva-yajṣasya
nivṛttiḥ sambhaviṣyati

Synonyms

śrīmat-prasādāt — by the mercy ; viprarṣeḥ — of the brāhmaṇa sage ; mahā-bhāgavatottamāt — the best of devotees ; tad-dvārā — by that ; sarva-yajṣasya — of the yajna ; nivṛttiḥ — the cessation ; sambhaviṣyati — will be.

Translation

mahā-bhāgavatottamāt By the mercy of a great brāhmaṇa-sage that yajṣa will be stopped.
Text 85

Verse text

brāhmaṇānāṁ ca pūjanam
sa dāsyati mahā-rāja
grāmāṇāṁ śatakaṁ tadā

Synonyms

yajṣa-saṁskāra-kartṛṇām — of the performers of the yajna ; brāhmaṇānām — the brāhmaṇas ; ca — and ; pūjanam — worship ; saḥ — he ; dāsyati — willgive ; mahā-rāja — O great king ; grāmāṇām — of villages ; śatakam — a hundred ; tadā — then.

Translation

yajṣa-saṁskāra-kartṛṇāṁ O great king, then he will worship the brāhmaṇas that performed the yajṣa and he will give them a hundred villages in charity.
Text 86

Verse text

tatas tv ācārya-varyasya
śrī-prasādasya cājṣayā
sa gantā sūkara-kṣetraṁ
māsām ekaṁ sthito 'bhavat

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; tv — indeed ; ācārya-varyasya — o fthe great acarya ; śrī-prasādasya — of the mercy ; ca — and ; ājṣayā — by the order ; sa — he ; gantā — will go ; sūkara-kṣetram — to Sukara-ksetra ; māsam — month ; ekam — one ; sthitaḥ — staying ; abhavat — was.

Translation

Then, by the order of the merciful ācārya, he will go to Sūkara-kṣetra and stay there for one month.
Text 87

Verse text

dattvā danāny anekāni
ratnaṁ vāso brāhmaṇebhyo
bhojanaṁ ca yad-icchayā

Synonyms

dattvā — giving ; danāni — charities ; anekāni — many ; go-mahī-gaja-vāhinaḥ — cows, land, elephants, and chariots ; ratnam — jewels ; vāsaḥ — homes ; brāhmaṇebhyaḥ — to the brāhmaṇa ; bhojanam — food ; ca — and ; yad-icchayā — as they wished.

Translation

go-mahī-gaja-vāhinaḥ Then he will give to the brāhmaṇas many gifts. He will give them cows, land, elephants, chariots, jewels, houses, and food, as much as they desired.
Text 88

Verse text

tatas tasmāt sthalāt so 'pi
nivartya guruṇā saha
gaṅgā-tīra-sthalān paśyann
āgamiṣyati sad-vṛtaḥ

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; tasmāt — from that ; sthalāt — place ; saḥ — he ; api — also ; nivartya — turning ; guruṇā — guru ; saha — with ; gaṅgā — of the Gaṅgā ; tīra-sthalān — the shore ; paśyann — seeing ; āgamiṣyati — will come ; sad-vṛtaḥ — witb the saintly sages.

Translation

Then he will leave that place. Accompanied by his guru and the great sages, he will see the Gaṅgā's shore and then return.
Text 89

Verse text

śayana-nagare saṁsthāṁ
kariṣyati sahānugaḥ
śrī-guror ājṣayā tatra
sāmagrīṁ sādhanaiḥ saha

Synonyms

śayana-nagare — in Sayana-nagara ; saṁsthām — situation ; kariṣyati — will do ; sahānugaḥ — with followers ; śrī-guroḥ — of his guru ; ājṣayā — by the order ; tatra — there ; sāmagrīm — things ; sādhanaiḥ — spiritual practices ; saha — with.

Translation

He and his followers will stay in Śayana-nagara. By his guru's order he will accumulate the ingredients for a yajṣa.
Text 90

Verse text

aśvamedhaṁ karoti sma
sarva-jetā bhaviṣyati
eka-cchatra-dharo bhūtvā
śrī-guroḥ śaraṇaṁ gataḥ

Synonyms

aśvamedham — an asvamedha-yajna ; karoti — does ; sma — indeed ; sarva-jetā — all-victorious ; bhaviṣyati — will be ; eka-cchatra-dharaḥ — the sole emperor ; bhūtvā — becoming ; śrī-guroḥ — of the guru ; śaraṇam — shelter ; gataḥ — gone.

Translation

He will perform an aśvamedha-yajṣa and then he will conquer all directions. By following his guru's orders he will become the sole ruler of the earth.
Text 91

Verse text

tato gaṅgā-taṭe ramye
pūrvasyāṁ krośa-pañcake
sevanaṁ tat kariṣyati

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; gaṅgā-taṭe — on the Gaṅgā's shore ; ramye — beautiful ; pūrvasyām — in the east ; krośa-pañcake — 40 miles ; paramaikānta-rūpeṇa — woith single-pointed ocncentration ; sevanam — worship ; tat — that ; kariṣyati — will do.

Translation

paramaikānta-rūpeṇa Forty miles to the east, with single-pointed concentration he will worship a sacred place on the beautiful shore of the Gaṅgā.
Text 92

Verse text

tatra bhāgavatī vārtā
bhaviṣyati mudā yuktā
samājeṣu sudhārmiṇām

Synonyms

tatra — there ; bhāgavatī — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; vārtā — the description ; bhava-rogi-vināśinī — which cures the disease of repeated birth and death ; bhaviṣyati — will be ; mudā — happily ; yuktā — engaged ; samājeṣu — in the assembly ; sudhārmiṇām — of the pious.

Translation

bhava-rogi-vināśinī In that place, in an assembly of the pious, there will be a blissful telling of the Supreme Personality of Godhead's pastimes, a telling that cures the disease of repeated birth and death.
Text 93

Verse text

tatra pūrṇa-samājeṣu
teṣāṁ madhye bhavān api
śṛṇoṣi bhagavad-dharmaṁ
gantā śrī-nirmalaṁ padam

Synonyms

tatra — there ; pūrṇa-samājeṣu — ijn the assembly ; teṣām — of them ; madhye — in the midst ; bhavān — you ; api — also ; śṛṇoṣi — will hear ; bhagavad-dharmam — the science of devotional service ; gantā — will go ; śrī-nirmalam padam — to the Lord's transcendental abode.

Translation

You will also hear about the Lord in that assembly. In the end you will go to the Lord's transcendental abode.
Text 94

Verse text

tapas taptaṁ mad-arthaṁ te
tasmād etat prakāśitam
evaṁ devaṁ varaṁ dattvā
gato rāmaḥ sahānugaḥ

Synonyms

tapaḥ — austerity ; taptam — performed ; mad-artham — for My sake ; te — of you ; tasmāt — therefore ; etat — this ; prakāśitam — manifested ; evam — thus ; devam — the Lord ; varam — blessing ; dattvā — given ; gataḥ — gone ; rāmaḥ — Balarāma ; sahānugaḥ — with His followers.

Translation

This will happen because you have performed austerities to please Me. After giving this blessing to Māṇḍūkadeva, Lord Balarāma, accompanied by His followers, departed.
Text 95

Verse text

śayana-nagarāc chuddhād
īśānyāṁ diśi saṁsthitam
sthānaṁ gaṅgā-taṭe ramyaṁ
kaṇṭakād uttare 'bhavat

Synonyms

śayana-nagarāt — from Śayana-nagara ; śuddhāt — pure ; īśānyām — to the north ; diśi — direction ; saṁsthitam — situated ; sthānam — place ; gaṅgā-taṭe — on the Gaṅgā's shore ; ramyam — beautiful ; kaṇṭakāt — from Kaṇṭaka ; uttare — north ; abhavat — was.

Translation

To the north of Śayana-nagara and Kaṇṭhaka-tīrtha is a beautiful place on the Gaṅgā shore.
Text 96

Verse text

puṣpavatyā dakṣiṇe tu
krośaikaṁ vistareṇa ca
tatra saṅkarṣaṇo devaḥ
sthitvā dāna-paro 'bhavat

Synonyms

puṣpavatyā — of Puṣpavatī ; dakṣiṇe — to the south ; tu — indeed ; krośaikam — two miles ; vistareṇa — across ; ca — and ; tatra — there ; saṅkarṣaṇo devaḥ — Lord Saṅkarṣaṇa ; sthitvā — staying ; dāna-paraḥ — giving charity ; abhavat — did

Translation

In a place two miles south of Paṣpavatī, Lord Balarāma gave charity.
Text 97

Verse text

ghoṭakaṁ daśa-sāhasraṁ
rathānāṁ śatakaṁ tathā
dvipaṁ sahasraṁ gāś caiva
dik-sahasraṁ dadau mudā

Synonyms

ghoṭakam — horses ; daśa-sāhasram — tne thousand ; rathānām — chariots ; śatakam — a hundred ; tathā — then ; dvipam — elephants ; sahasram — a thousand ; gāḥ — cows ; ca — and ; eva — indeed ; dik-sahasram — ten thousand ; dadau — gave ; mudā — happily.

Translation

He happily gave ten thousand horses, one thousand chariots, one thousand elephants, and ten thousand cows.
Text 98

Verse text

tatra saṅkarṣaṇaṁ devaṁ
pūjayām āsur ādarāt
devāḥ samāyayuḥ sarve
ṛṣayaś ca tapo-dhanāḥ

Synonyms

tatra — there ; saṅkarṣaṇam — Lord Balarāma ; devam — the Lord ; pūjayām āsuḥ — worshiped ; ādarāt — with respect ; devāḥ — the demigods ; samāyayuḥ — came ; sarve — all ; ṛṣayaḥ — the sages ; ca — and ; tapo-dhanāḥ — wealthy in austerity.

Translation

Then all the demigods and the austere sages came there and respectfully worshiped Lord Balarāma. They said:
Text 99

Verse text

namaḥ koleśa-ghātāya
halāyudha namas te 'stu
musalāstrāya te namaḥ namaḥ saundarya-rūpāya tālāṅkāya namo namaḥ

Synonyms

namaḥ — obeisances ; koleśa-ghātāya — to the killer of Kola ; surāsura-vighātine — victorious over the demigods and the demons ; halāyudha — O Lord who carry a plow-weapon ; namaḥ — obeisances ; te — to You ; astu — is ; musalāstrāya — who carry a club-weapon ; te — to You ; namaḥ — obeisances ; namaḥ — obeisances ; saundarya-rūpāya — handsome ; tālāṅkāya — who holds the insignia of a tala tree ; namaḥ — obeisances ; namaḥ — obeisances.

Translation

surāsura-vighātine Obeisances to the killer of Kola! Obesiances to He who defeats the demigods and demons! Obeisances to You, O Lord carrying a plow-weapon! Obeisances to You, the Lord carrying a club-weapon! Obeisances, obeisances, obeisances to You, the handsome Lord carrying a palm-tree flag!
Text 100

Verse text

iti śrutvā stutiṁ teṣāṁ
saṅkarṣaṇa uvāca ha
varaṁ bruvantuvaḥ sarve
bhavatāṁ yad-abhīpsitam

Synonyms

iti — thus ; śrutvā — hearing ; stutim — the prayer ; teṣām — of them ; saṅkarṣaṇa — Balarāma ; uvāca — said ; ha — Oh ; varam — blessing ; bruvantuvaḥ — say ; sarve — all ; bhavatām — of You ; yad-abhīpsitam — what is desired.

Translation

Hearing their prayers, Lord Balarāma said, "You may ask for the benedictions you desire."
Text 101

Verse text

śrī-dvija-devā ūcuḥ
yadā yadā vayaṁ yuktāḥ
smarāmo bhavataḥ padam
bhavāmaś ca tavājṣayā

Synonyms

śrī-dvija-devā ūcuḥ — the demigods and brāhmaṇas said ; yadā yadā — whenever ; vayam — we ; yuktāḥ — engaged ; smarāmaḥ — remember ; bhavataḥ — of You ; padam — the feet ; sarva-bādha-vinirmuktā — free of all impediemtns ; bhavāmaḥ — we become ; ca — and ; tava — of You ; ājṣayā — by the order.

Translation

sarva-bādha-vinirmuktā The demigods and brāhmaṇas said: Please free us from all troubles when we remember Your feet.
Text 102

Verse text

śrī-rāma uvāca
yadā yadā māṁ smaratha
tadāhaṁ śaraṇāgatān
rakṣitā syāṁ kalau nūnaṁ
iti satyaṁ vaco mama

Synonyms

śrī-rāma — Śrī Balarāma ; uvāca — said ; yadā yadā — whenevr ; mām — Me ; smaratha — remember ; tadā — then ; aham — I ; śaraṇāgatān — to they who take shelter ; rakṣitā — the protector ; syām — will be ; kalau — in Kali-yuga ; nūnam — indeed ; iti — thus ; satyam — truth ; vacaḥ — words ; mama — of Mine.

Translation

Śrī Balarāma said: In Kali-yuga, whenever you remember Me and take shelter of Me, I will protect you. This is My promise.
Text 103

Verse text

atra sthale varaṁ prāptaṁ
pūjitaṁ muni-puṅgavaiḥ
ataḥ saṅkarṣaṇa-sthānaṁ
bhaviṣyati kalau yuge

Synonyms

atra — here ; sthale — in the place ; varam — blessing ; prāptam — attained ; pūjitam — worshiped ; muni-puṅgavaiḥ — by the great sages ; ataḥ — then ; saṅkarṣaṇa-sthānam — the place of Lord Balarāma ; bhaviṣyati — will be ; kalau — in Kali ; yuge — yuga.

Translation

This place, where the great sages worshiped Lord Balarāma and obtained a boon from Him, in Kali-yuga will be known as Saṅkarṣaṇa-sthāna.
Texts 104 and 105

Verse text

yasmin snāsyanti gaṅgāyāṁ
devān sampūjayanti ye
dāsyanti dānaṁ viprebhyo
bhojanaṁ kārayanti ye
viṣṇuṁ sampūjayanti sma
sa-phalaṁ jīvitaṁ kṣitau
te yānti daivata-sthānaṁ
kāmī prāpnoti kāmanam

Synonyms

yasmin — where ; snāsyanti — will bathe ; gaṅgāyām — in the Gaṅgā ; devān — demigods ; sampūjayanti — will worship ; ye — who ; dāsyanti — will give ; dānam — charity ; viprebhyaḥ — to the brāhmaṇas ; bhojanam — food ; kārayanti — will do ; ye — who ; viṣṇum — Lord Viṣṇu ; sampūjayanti — worship ; sma — indeed ; sa-phalam — with the result ; jīvitam — living ; kṣitau — on the earth ; te — they ; yānti — go ; daivata — of the Lord ; sthānam — to the place ; kāmi — desiring ; prāpnoti — attain ; kāmanam — desire.

Translation

They who bathe in the Gaṅgā at this place, worship the demigods, feed the brāhmaṇas, give them charity, and worship Lord Viṣṇu, attain the real goal of life. They go to the divine abode. They attain their desires.
Text 106

Verse text

tataḥ parivṛto rāmaḥ
svāṁ purīṁ sañjagāma ha
kola-rakṣo-vadhaṁ kṛtvā
snātvā viṣṇu-padī-jale

Synonyms

tataḥ — then ; parivṛtaḥ — accompoanied ; rāmaḥ — Lord Balarāma ; svām — to His won ; purīm — city ; sa 24jagāma — went ; ha — indeed ; kola-rakṣo-vadham — the killing of the demon Kola ; kṛtvā — having done ; snātvā — bathing ; viṣṇu-padī-jale — in the water that had washed Lord Viṣṇu's feet.

Translation

In this way, after killing the Kola demon, and after bathing in the Gaṅgā, which is a stream that has washed Lord Viṣṇu's feet, Lord Balarāma, accompanied by His associates, returned to His city.
Text 107

Verse text

rāmasya baladevasya
kathāṁ yaḥ śṛṇuyān naraḥ
sa yāti paramāṁ gatim

Synonyms

rāmasya baladevasya — of Lord Balarāma ; kathām — narration ; yaḥ — one who ; śṛṇuyāt — hears ; naraḥ — a pearson ; sarva-pāpa — from all sins ; vinirmuktaḥ — freed ; sa — he ; yāti — goes ; paramām — to the supreme ; gatim — abode.

Translation

sarva-pāpa-vinirmuktaḥ A person who hears these pastimes of Lord Balarāma becomes free from all sins and goes to the Lord's supreme abode. .pa Chapter Twenty-five Śrī Mathurā-māhātmya The Glories of Śrī Mathurā
Text 1

Verse text

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca
akasmād āgate rāme
tatra tīrtham idaṁ śrutam
aho madhu-purī dhanyā
yatra sannihitaś ca saḥ

Synonyms

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca — Śrī Bahulāśva said ; akasmāt — suddenly ; āgate — arrived ; rāme — Lord Balarāma ; tatra — there ; tīrtham — holy place ; idam — this ; śrutam — heard ; ahaḥ — Oh ; madhu-purī — Mathurā ; dhanyā — glorious ; yatra — where ; sannihitaḥ — staying ; ca — and ; saḥ — He.

Translation

Śrī Bahulāśva said: I have heard that Lord Balarāma quickly returned to glorious Mathurā City, where He stays eternally.
Text 2

Verse text

mathurāyās tu ko devaḥ
kaḥ kṣattā kaś ca rakṣati
kaś cāraḥ ko mantri-varaḥ
kair bhūmis tatra sevitā

Synonyms

mathurāyāḥ — of Mathurā ; tu — indeed ; kaḥ — who? ; devaḥ — the Deity ; ka — who? ; kṣatta — the gatekeeper ; kaḥ — who? ; ca — and ; rakṣati — protects ; kaḥ — who? ; cāraḥ — the spy ; kaḥ — who? ; mantri-varaḥ — the counselor ; kaiḥ — by whom? ; bhūmiḥ — the ground ; tatra — there ; sevitā — is served.

Translation

Who is the Deity of Mathurā? Who is Mathurā's gatekeeper? Who protects Mathurā? Who brings news to Mathurā? Who is the counselor in Mathurā? Who worships the ground of Mathurā?
Text 3

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
paripūrṇatamaḥ sākṣāc
chrī-kṛṣṇo bhagavān hariḥ
svayaṁ hi mathurā-nāthaḥ
keśavaḥ kleśa-nāsanaḥ

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; paripūrṇatamaḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; sākṣāc — directly ; chrī-kṛṣṇaḥ — Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; bhagavān — the Lord ; hariḥ — Hari ; svayam — personally ; hi — indeed ; mathurā-nāthaḥ — the Lord of Mathurā ; keśavaḥ — Kṛṣṇa ; kleśa-nāsanaḥ — the destroyer of sufferings.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, who destroys all sufferings, is the Deity of Mathurā.
Text 4

Verse text

sākṣād bhagavatā prāptaḥ
kapilāya dvijāya ca
kapilaḥ pradadau yaṁ vai
prasannaḥ śata-manyave

Synonyms

sākṣāt — directly ; bhagavatā — by ther Supreme Personality of Godhead ; prāptaḥ — attained ; kapilāya — to Kapila ; dvijāya — the brāhmaṇa ; ca — and ; kapilaḥ — Kapila ; pradadau — gave ; yam — the Deity ; vai — indeed ; prasannaḥ — happy ; śata-manyave — to Śatamanyu.

Translation

The Lord Himself gave this Deity to the brāhmaṇa Kapila, and kind Kapila gave the Deity to Śatamanyu.
Text 5

Verse text

jitvā devān rākṣasendro
rāvaṇo loka-rāvaṇaḥ
yaṁ stutvā puṣpake sthāpya
laṅkāyāṁ tam apūjayat

Synonyms

jitvā — conquering ; devān — the demigods ; rākṣasendraḥ — the king of the demons ; rāvaṇaḥ — Rāvaṇa ; loka-rāvaṇaḥ — who made the entire world cry ; yam — Whom ; stutvā — offering prayers ; puṣpake — on a flower chariot ; sthāpya — placing ; laṅkāyām — in Lankā ; tam — Him ; apūjayat — worshiped.

Translation

After he had conquered the demiogds, the demon-king Rāvaṇa, who made the world cry, offered prayers to this Deity, placed Him on a flower-airplane, and worshiped Him in Laṅkā.
Text 6

Verse text

jitvā laṅkāṁ rāghavendras
tam ānīya prayatnataḥ
ayodhyāyāṁ ca vārāhaṁ
arcayām āsa maithila

Synonyms

jitvā — conquering ; laṅkām — Laṅkā ; rāghavendraḥ — Lord Rāmacandra ; tam — Him ; ānīya — taking ; prayatnataḥ — carefully ; ayodhyāyām — in Ayodhyā ; ca — and ; vārāham — in Varāha-kalpa ; arcayām āsa — worshiped ; maithila — O king of Mithilā.

Translation

O king of Mithilā, when He conquered Laṅkā, Lord Rāmacandra carefully took this Deity of Lord Varāha and worshiped Him in Ayodhyā.
Text 7

Verse text

stutvā rāmaṁ ca śatrughno
yam ānīya prayatnataḥ
mathurāyāṁ mahā-puryāṁ
sthāpayitvā nanāma ha

Synonyms

stutvā — offering prayers ; rāmam — to Lord Rāmacandra ; ca — and ; śatrughnaḥ — Śatrughna ; yam — whom ; ānīya — taking ; prayatnataḥ — carefully ; mathurāyām — to Mathurā ; mahā-puryām — the great city ; sthāpayitvā — establishing ; nanāma — bowed down ; ha — indeed.

Translation

After offering prayers to Lord Rāmacandra, Śatrughna carefully took this Deity, placed Him in the great city of Mathurā, and bowed down to offer His respects.
Text 8

Verse text

sevito māthuraiḥ sarvaiḥ
sarveṣāṁ ca vara-pradaḥ
sākṣāt kapila-vārāhaḥ
so 'yaṁ mantri-varaḥ smṛtaḥ

Synonyms

sevitaḥ — served ; māthuraiḥ — by the people of Mathurā ; sarvaiḥ — all ; sarveṣām — to all ; ca — and ; vara-pradaḥ — granting benedictions ; sākṣāt — directly ; saḥ — he ; ayam — he ; mantri-varaḥ — the best counselor ; smṛtaḥ — is considered.

Translation

All the people of Mathurā worship this Deity. This Deity gives blessings to all. Kapila-Varāha is the counselor of Mathurā.
Text 9

Verse text

kṣattā śrī-mathurāyāś ca
nāmnā bhūteśvaraḥ śivaḥ
dattvā daṇḍaṁ pātakine
bhakty-arthān mantratāṁ vrajat

Synonyms

kṣattā — the gatekeeper ; śrī-mathurāyāḥ — of Śrī Mathurā ; ca — and ; nāmnā — by name ; bhūteśvaraḥ — Bhūteśvara ; śivaḥ — Śiva ; dattvā — giving ; daṇḍam — a stick ; pātakine — to a sinner ; bhakty-arthān — for the devotees ; mantratām — advice ; vrajat — going.

Translation

The gatekeeper of Śrī Mathurā is an incarnation of Lord Śiva named Bhūteśvara. He punishes the sinful and instructs the devotees.
Text 10

Verse text

caṇḍikā tu mahā-vidyā
devī durgārti-nāśinī
siṁhārūḍha sadā rakṣāṁ
mathurāyāḥ karoti hi

Synonyms

caṇḍikā — ferocious ; tu — indeed ; mahā-vidyā — the great philosopher ; devī — the goddess ; durgā — Durgā ; arti — sufferings ; nāśinī — destroying ; siṁhārūḍha — riding on a lion ; sadā — always ; rakṣām — protection ; mathurāyāḥ — of Mathurā ; karoti — does ; hi — indeed.

Translation

Ferocious Goddess Durgā, who is the personification of transcendental knowledge and who destroys all sufferings, rides a lion and eternally protects Mathurā.
Text 11

Verse text

cāro 'haṁ mathurāyāś ca
paśyal lokān itas tataḥ
vadāmi vārtāṁ sarveṣāṁ
śrī-kṛṣṇāya mahātmane

Synonyms

cāraḥ — messenger ; aham — I am ; mathurāyāḥ — of Mathurā ; ca — and ; paśyan — seeing ; lokān — the worlds ; itaḥ — here ; tataḥ — and there ; vadāmi — I tell ; vārtām — the news ; sarveṣām — of all ; śrī-kṛṣṇāya — to Lord Kṛṣṇa ; mahātmane — the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Translation

I bring news to Mathurā. I observe what happens in the different planets, and I tell Lord Kṛṣṇa all the news.
Text 12

Verse text

madhye vai mathurā devī
śubhadā karuṇāmayī
bubhukṣitebhyaḥ sarvebhyo
dadāty annaṁ videha-rāṭ

Synonyms

madhye — in the middle ; vai — indeed ; mathurā — Mathurā ; devī — Goddess ; śubhadā — auspciious ; karuṇāmayī — merciful ; bubhukṣitebhyaḥ — to the hungry ; sarvebhyaḥ — all ; dadāti — gives ; annam — food ; videha-rāṭ — O king of Videha.

Translation

O king of Videha, in the middle of the city is auspicious and kind Goddess Mathurā, who feeds all that are hungry.
Text 13

Verse text

catur-bhujā śyāmalāṅgā
vrajanti pravrajanti ca
mathurāyāṁ mṛtaṁ netuṁ
vimānaiḥ kṛṣṇa-parṣadāḥ

Synonyms

catur-bhujā — with four arms ; śyāmalāṅgā — dark forms ; vrajanti — go ; pravrajanti — comes ; ca — and ; mathurāyām — in Mathurā ; mṛtam — dead ; netum — to bring ; vimānaiḥ — with airplanes ; kṛṣṇa — of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; parṣadāḥ — the associates.

Translation

Dark-complexioned four-armed associates of Lord Kṛṣṇa go here and there in Mathurā to bring anyone who dies there to the spiritual world.
Text 14

Verse text

mathurā vai mahā-purī
yasya darśana-mātreṇa
naro yāti kṛtārthatām

Synonyms

śrī-kṛṣṇasya — of Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; aṅga — from the body ; sambhūtā — manifested ; mathurā — Mathurā ; vai — indeed ; mahā-purī — the great city ; yasya — of which ; darśana-mātreṇa — simply by seeing ; naraḥ — a person ; yāti — attains ; kṛtārthatām — the goal of life.

Translation

śrī-kṛṣṇasyāṅga-sambhūtā Simply by seeing Mathurā City, which was manifested from Lord Kṛṣṇa's transcendental form, one attains the goal of life.
Text 15

Verse text

purā vidhiḥ śrī-mathurām upetya
taptvā tapo varṣa-śataṁ nirannaḥ
japan hariṁ brahma paraṁ svayambhūḥ
svāyambhuvaṁ prāpa sutaṁ pravīnam

Synonyms

purā — previously ; vidhiḥ — Brahmā ; śrī-mathurām — to Śrī Mathurā ; upetya — going ; taptvā — performed ; tapaḥ — austerities ; varṣa-śatam — for a hundred years ; nirannaḥ — without food ; japan — chanting ; harim — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; brahma — Brahmā ; param — then ; svayambhūḥ — the self-born ; svāyambhuvam — to Svayambhuva Manu ; prāpa — attained ; sutam — sun ; pravīnam — intelligent.

Translation

In the past the demigod Brahmā went to Śrī Mathurā, where for a hundred years he performed austerities, constantly chanting the holy names of Lord Kṛṣṇa, and not eating anything. The result of these austerities was that he fathered a very intelligent son: Svāyambhuva Manu.
Text 16

Verse text

bhūteśvaro deva-varaḥ satī-patis
taptvā tapo divya-śaran-madhor vane
kṛṣṇa-prasādān nṛpa-rāja sa-tvaraṁ
tasyāḥ pure mathurā-maṇḍalasya

Synonyms

bhūteśvaraḥ — Lord Śiva ; deva-varaḥ — the best of the demigods ; satī-patiḥ — the husband of Satī ; taptvā — perfoming ; tapaḥ — austerities ; divya-śarat — for an autumn of the demigods ; madhor vane — in Mathurā ; kṛṣṇa-prasādān — Lord Kṛṣṇa's mercy ; nṛpa-rāja — O king of kings ; sa-tvaram — quickly ; tasyāḥ — of that ; pure — in the city ; mathurā-maṇḍalasya — of Mathurā.

Translation

O king of kings, Lord Śiva, who is the husband of Satī and the best of the demigods, performed austerities in Mathurā for an autumn of the demigods. In this way He attained Lord Kṛṣṇa's mercy and became the gatekeeper of Mathurā.
Text 17

Verse text

kṛṣṇa-prasādād aham eva cāro
bhraman sadā māthura-maṇḍalasya
tathā hi durgā mathurāṁ prayāti
śrī-kṛṣṇa-dāsyaṁ prakaroti nūnam

Synonyms

kṛṣṇa-prasādāt — by Lord Kṛṣṇa's mercy ; aham — I ; eva — indeed ; cāraḥ — the messenger ; bhraman — wandering ; sadā — always ; māthura-maṇḍalasya — of Mathurā ; tathā — so ; hi — indeed ; durgā — Durgā ; mathurām — to Mathurā ; prayāti — goes ; śrī-kṛṣṇa-dāsyam — service to Lord Kṛṣṇa ; prakaroti — does ; nūnam — indeed.

Translation

By Lord Kṛṣṇa's mercy I wander everywhere as the person that carries news to Mathurā. By Lord Kṛṣṇa's mercy Goddess Durgā comes to Mathurā and serves Lord Kṛṣṇa.
Text 18

Verse text

taptvā tapaḥ śakra-padaṁ ca śakraḥ
sūryo manuṁ nitya-nidhiṁ kuveraḥ
pāśī ca pāśaṁ samavāpya samyaṅ
madhor vane viṣṇu-padaṁ dhruvaś ca

Synonyms

taptvā tapaḥ — performing austerities ; śakra-padam — the post of Indra ; ca — and ; śakraḥ — Indra ; sūryaḥ — Surya ; manum — Manu ; nitya-nidhim — eternal wealth ; kuveraḥ — Kuvera ; pāśī — varuṇa ; ca — and ; pāśam — ropes ; samavāpya — attaining ; samyak — completely ; madhor vane — in Mathurā ; viṣṇu-padam — the abode of Lord Viṣṇu ; dhruvaḥ — Dhruva ; ca — and.

Translation

By performing austerities in Mathurā, Indra attained his heavenly post, Sūrya attained Vaivasvata Manu as his son, Kuvera attained eternal wealth, Varuṇa attained his ropes, and Dhruva attained the realm of Lord Viṣṇu.
Text 19

Verse text

tathāmbarīṣaḥ samavāpa muktiṁ
somo 'kṣayaṁ vā lavānāj jayaṁ ca
raghuś ca siddhiṁ kila citraketus
taptvā tapo 'traiva madhor vane ca

Synonyms

tathā — so ; ambarīṣaḥ — Ambarīśa ; samavāpa — attained ; muktim — liberation ; somaḥ — Soma ; akṣayam — inviciblitiy ; vā — or ; lavānāt — from Lavana ; jayam — victory ; ca — and ; raghuḥ — Raghu ; ca — and ; siddhim — perfection ; kila — indeed ; citraketuḥ — Citraketu ; taptvā tapaḥ — perfomring austerities ; atra — here ; eva — indeed ; madhor vane — in Mathurā ; ca — and.

Translation

By performing austerities in Mathurā, Ambarīṣa attained liberation, Rāmacandra became invincible and defated the demon Lavaṇa, Raghu attained perfection, and Citraketu also attained perfection.
Text 20

Verse text

taptvā tapo 'traiva madhor vane śubhe
bhūtvā baliṣṭhaś ca madhur mahāsuraḥ
śrī-mādhave māsi ca mādhavena
yuyodha yuddhe madhusūdanena saḥ

Synonyms

taptvā tapaḥ — performing austerities ; atra — here ; eva — indeed ; madhor vane — in Mathurā ; śubhe — beautiful ; bhūtvā — becoming ; baliṣṭhaḥ — powerful ; ca — and ; madhuḥ — Madhu ; mahāsuraḥ — the great demon ; śrī-mādhave māsi — in the month of mādhava ; ca — and ; mādhavena — with Kṛṣṇa ; yuyodha — fought ; yuddhe — in battle ; madhusūdanena — the killer of Madhu ; saḥ — he.

Translation

By performing austerities in beautiful Mathurā, the great demon Madhu became very powerful. In the month of Mādhava (April-May), he fought with Lord Kṛṣṇa, who later became known as Madhusūdana (the killer of Madhu).
Text 21

Verse text

saptarṣayaḥ śrī-mathurāṁ sametya
taptvā tapo 'traiva ca yoga-siddhim
prāpuḥ pare vai munayaḥ samantād
gokarṇa-vaiśyo 'pi mahā-nidhiṁ ca

Synonyms

saptarṣayaḥ — the seven sages ; śrī-mathurām — to Śrī Mathurā ; sametya — going ; taptvā tapaḥ — performed austerities ; atra — here ; eva — indeed ; ca — and ; yoga-siddhim — yogic perfections ; prāpuḥ — attained ; pare — other ; vai — indeed ; munayaḥ — sages ; samantāt — completely ; gokarṇa-vaiśyaḥ — the vaiśya Gokarṇa ; api — also ; mahā-nidhim — great wealth ; ca — and.

Translation

By performing austerities in Mathurā, the seven sages and other sages also attained the perfection of yoga, the vaiśya named Gokarṇa attained great wealth.
Text 22

Verse text

taptvā tapo 'traiva madhor vane śubhe
vijitya devān divi loka-rāvaṇaḥ
nidhāya rakṣāṁsi vidhāya mandiraṁ
āsthāya laṅkāṁ virarāja rāvaṇaḥ

Synonyms

taptvā tapaḥ — performed austerities ; atra — here ; eva — indeed ; madhor vane — in Mathurā ; śubhe — beautiful ; vijitya — conquering ; devān — the demigods ; divi — in heaven ; loka-rāvaṇaḥ — making the worlds scream ; nidhāya — placing ; rakṣāṁsi — demons ; vidhāya — placing ; mandiram — a palace ; āsthāya — placing ; laṅkām — Laṅkā ; virarāja — shone ; rāvaṇaḥ — Ravana.

Translation

By performing austerities in beautiful Mathurā, the demon Rāvaṇa conquered the demigods, made the wrolds scream in pain, conquered the demons, and built a great city in Laṅkā.
Text 23

Verse text

taptvā tapo 'traiva madhor vane śubhe
gajāhvayeśo mithileśaḥ śantanuḥ
lebhe sutaṁ bhīṣmam atīva sattamaṁ
tattvārtha-vārān nidhi-karṇadhārakam

Synonyms

taptvā tapaḥ — performed austerities ; atra — here ; eva — indeed ; madhor vane — in Mathurā ; śubhe — beautiful ; gajāhvayeśaḥ — the king of Hastināpura ; mithileśaḥ — the king of Mithilā ; śantanuḥ — Śantanu ; lebhe — attained ; sutam — a son ; bhīṣmam — Bhīṣma ; atīva — very ; sattamam — exalted ; tattvā — of truth ; artha — the meaning ; vārān — the waters ; nidhi-karṇadhārakam — the captain.

Translation

By performing austerities in beautiful Mathurā, Śantanu, the king of Mithilā and Hastināpura, attained as his son the great saint Bhīṣma, who was the captain of the ship to cross the ocean of truth.
Text 24

Verse text

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca
mathurāyāś ca māhātmyaṁ
vada devarṣi-sattama
nivāse kiṁ phalaṁ proktaṁ mathurāyāḥ satāṁ nṛṇām

Synonyms

śrī-bahulāśva uvāca — Śrī Bahulāśva said ; mathurāyāḥ — of Mathurā ; ca — and ; māhātmyam — the glory ; vada — tell ; devarṣi-sattama — O best of the demigod-sages ; nivāse — in the home ; kim — what? ; phalam — reult ; proktam — said ; mathurāyāḥ — of Mathurā ; satām — of the devotees ; nṛṇām — people.

Translation

Śrī Bahulāśva said: O best of the demigod-sages, please tell me the glories of Mathurā. What result do the devotees obtain by living in Mathurā?
Text 25

Verse text

śrī-nārada uvāca
ādau varāho dhāraṇīṁ nimagnāṁ
mahā-jale projjhita-vīci-śaṅke
sva-daṁstryoddhṛtya karīva padmaṁ
kareṇa māhātmyam idaṁ jagāda

Synonyms

śrī-nārada uvāca — Śrī Nārada said ; ādau — in the beginning ; varāhaḥ — Lord Varāha ; dhāraṇīm — the earth ; nimagnām — plunged ; mahā-jale — in the great ocean ; projjhita-vīci-śaṅke — filled with waves ; sva-daṁstryā — by His tusk ; uddhṛtya — lifting ; karī — an elephant ; iva — like ; padmam — a lotus ; kareṇa — with its trunk ; māhātmyam — the glory ; idam — thus ; jagāda — said.

Translation

Śrī Nārada said: As an elephant holds a lotus flower in its trunk, so in the beginning of creation Lord Varāha lifted with His tusks the earth plunged in the great ocean filled with waves. Lord Varāha then spoke the glories of Mathurā.
Text 26

Verse text

bruvan jano nāma phalaṁ harer labhec
chṛṇval labhet kṛṣṇa-kathā-phalaṁ naraḥ
spṛśan satāṁ sparśana-jaṁ madhoḥ puri
jighraṁs tulasyā dala-gandha-jaṁ phalam

Synonyms

bruvan — speaking ; janaḥ — Jana ; nāma — name ; phalam — the result ; hareḥ — of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; labhet — may attain ; śṛṇvan — hearing ; labhet — may attain ; kṛṣṇa — of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; kathā — of the topics ; phalam — the result ; naraḥ — a person ; spṛśan — touching ; satām — of the devotees ; sparśana-jam — manifested from touching ; madhoḥ purī — Mathurā ; jighran — smelling ; tulasyā — of Tulasī ; dala-gandha-jam — the fragrance of the leaves ; phalam — the result.

Translation

By speaking the name "Mathurā" one attains the same result as chanting the holy name of Lord Kṛṣṇa. By hearing the glories of Mathurā one attains the same result as hearing the glories of Lord Kṛṣṇa. By touching Mathurā one attains the same result as touching the great devotees. By smelling the fragrance of Mathurā one attains the same result as smelling the fragrance of Śrīmatī Tulasī-devī's leaves.
Text 27

Verse text

paśyan harer darśana-jaṁ phalaṁ svato
bhakṣāṁś ca naivedya-bhāvaṁ ramā-pateḥ
kurvan bhujābhyāṁ hari-sevayā phalaṁ
gacchal labhet tīrtha-phalaṁ pade pade

Synonyms

paśyan — seeing ; hareḥ — of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; darśana-jam — manifested from seeing ; phalam — the result ; svataḥ — voulntarily ; ca — and ; naivedya-bhāvam — "rasadam ; ramā-pateḥ — of the husband of the goddess of fortune ; kurvan — doing ; bhujābhyām — with both arms ; hari-sevayā — by service to Lord Kṛṣṇa ; phalam — the result ; gacchal — going ; labhet — attains ; tīrtha-phalam — the result of pilgrimage ; pade — step ; pade — after step.

Translation

By seeing Mathurā one attains the same result as seeing Lord Kṛṣṇa. By eating prasādam in Mathurā one attains the same result as eating prasādam offered to Lord Kṛṣṇa, the husband of the goddess of fortune. By serving Mathurā with one's arms one attains the same result as serving Lord Kṛṣṇa. By walking in Mathurā one attains at every step the same result as visiting many holy places of pilgrimage.
Text 28

Verse text

rājendra-hantā nija-gotra-ghātakī
trailokya-hantāpi ca koṭi-janmasu
rājan chṛṇu tvaṁ mathurā-nivāsato
yogīśvarāṇāṁ gatim āpnuyān naraḥ

Synonyms

rājendra-hantā — killer of the greatest opf kings ; nija-gotra-ghātakī — killer of his own relatives ; trailokya-hantā — a killer of the three worlds ; api — even ; ca — and ; koṭi-janmasu — in millions of births ; rājan — O king ; śṛṇu — please hear ; tvam — you ; mathurā-nivāsataḥ — by living in Mathurā ; yogīśvarāṇām — of the kings of the yogis ; gatim — the destination ; āpnuyāt — attains ; naraḥ — a person.

Translation

O king please listen. A sinner who in millions of lives again and again kills many saintly kings, his own relatives, and numberless other victims in the three worlds, by residing in Mathurā attains the destination of the kings of the yogīs.
Text 29

Verse text

pādau ca dhig yau na gatu madhor vande
dṛśau ca dhig ye na kadāpi paśyataḥ
karṇau ca dhig yau śṛṇuto na maithila
vācaṁ ca dhig yā na karoty alaṁ manāk

Synonyms

pādau — feet ; ca — and ; dhig — fie ; yau — which ; na — not ; gatu — gone ; madhor vande — in Mathurā ; dṛśau — eyes ; ca — and ; dhig — fie ; ye — which ; na — not ; kadāpi — ever ; paśyataḥ — see ; karṇau — the ears ; ca — and ; dhig — fie ; yau — ehich ; śṛṇutaḥ — hear ; na — not ; maithila — O king of Mithilā ; vācam — words ; ca — and ; dhik — fie ; yā — which ; na — not ; karoti — does ; alam — greatly ; manā — slightly.

Translation

Pitiable are the feet that have never walked in Mathurā! Pitiable are the eyes that have never seen Mathurā! Pitiable are the ears that have never heard of Mathurā! Pitiable is the voice that will not glorify Mathurā!
Text 30

Verse text

dvi-sapta-koṭīni vanāni yatra
tīrthāni vaideha samāsthitāni
ekaikam eteṣu vimukti-dāni
vadāmi sākṣān mathurāṁ namāmi

Synonyms

dvi-sapta-koṭīni — fourteen ; vanāni — forests ; yatra — where ; tīrthāni — holy places ; vaideha — O king of Videha ; samāsthitāni — established ; ekaikam — one by one ; eteṣu — in them ; vimukti-dāni — giving liberation ; vadāmi — I tell ; sākṣān — directly ; mathurām — to Mathurā ; namāmi — I offer obeisances.

Translation

I tell you that in Mathurā are fourteen forests that contain many holy places. Each of these holy places grants liberation. I bow down to offer my respectful obeisances to Śrī Mathurā.
Text 31

Verse text

goloka-nāthaḥ paripūrṇa-devaḥ
sākṣād asaṅkhyāṇḍa-patiḥ svayaṁ hi
śrī-kṛṣṇa-candro 'vatatāra yasyāṁ
tasyai namo 'nyāśu purīsu kiṁ vā

Synonyms

goloka — of Goloka ; nāthaḥ — the master ; paripūrṇa-devaḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; sākṣāt — directly ; asaṅkhyāṇḍa-patiḥ — the master of numerless universes ; svayam — personally ; hi — indeed ; śrī-kṛṣṇa-candraḥ — Śrī Kṛṣṇacandra ; avatatāra — descrneded ; yasyam — in which ; tasyai — to it ; namaḥ — obeisances ; anyāsu — other ; purīsu — cities ; kim — whether? ; vā — or.

Translation

Śrī Kṛṣṇacandra, who is the perfect Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of Goloka-dhāma, and the master of numberless universes, personally descended to this world in the city of Mathurā. I offer my repsectful obeisances to Śrī Mathurā. What other city can compare with Mathurā?
Text 32

Verse text

yan-nāma pāpaṁ vinihanti tat-kṣaṇaṁ
bhavaty alaṁ yaṁ gṛṇuto 'pi muktayaḥ
vīthiṣu vīthiṣu ca muktir asyās
tasmād imaṁ śreṣṭhatamaṁ vidur budhāḥ

Synonyms

yan-nāma — the name of which ; pāpam — sin ; vinihanti — kills ; tat-kṣaṇam — that moment ; bhavati — becomes ; alam — greatky ; yam — what ; gṛṇutaḥ — chanting ; api — even ; muktayaḥ — the liberations ; vīthiṣu — on the path ; vīthiṣu — after path ; ca — and ; muktiḥ — liberation ; asyāḥ — others ; tasmāt — therefore ; imam — this ; śreṣṭhatamam — the best ; viduḥ — know ; budhāḥ — the wise.

Translation

The holy name of Mathurā kills all sins in an instant. One who chants the name of Mathurā finds liberation waiting for him on every path. For this reason the wise say Mathurā is the best of holy places.
Text 33

Verse text

kāśy-ādi-puryo yadi santi loke
tāsāṁ tu madhye mathuraiva dhanyā
yā janma-mauñjī-vrata-mṛtyu-dāhair
nṛṇāṁ caturdhā vidadhāti muktim

Synonyms

kāśy-ādi-puryaḥ — the holy cities headed by Varanasi ; yadi — if ; santi — are ; loke — in the world ; tāsām — of them ; tu — indeed ; madhye — in the middle ; mathurā — Mathurā ; eva — indeed ; dhanyā — glorious ; yā — which ; janma — birth ; mauñjī-vrata — the sacred-thread ceremony ; mṛtyu — death ; dāhaiḥ — cremation ; nṛṇām — of people ; caturdhā — four kinds ; vidadhāti — gives ; muktim — liberation.

Translation

If Vārāṇasī and the other holy cities of the world were to meet, Mathurā would be the most glorious of them. Mathurā gives liberation to they who are born, accept spiritual initiation, die, or are cremated within her borders.
Text 34

Verse text

purīśvarīṁ kṛṣṇa-purīṁ vrajeśvarīṁ
tīrtheśvarīṁ yajṣa-tapo-nidhīśvarīm
mokṣa-pradāṁ dharma-dhurandharāṁ parāṁ
madhor vane śrī-mathurāṁ namāmy aham

Synonyms

purīśvarīm — the queen of cities ; kṛṣṇa-purīm — the city of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; vrajeśvarīm — the queen of Vraja ; tīrtheśvarīm — the queen of holy places ; yajṣā-tapo-nidhīśvarīm — the queen of yajnas, austerities, and opulences ; mokṣa-pradām — teh giver of liberation ; dharma-dhurandharām — the upholder of the principles of religion ; parām — great ; madhor vane — in the forest of Madhuvana ; śrī-mathurām — Śrī Mathurā ; namāmi — bow down ; aham — I.

Translation

I offer my respectful obeisances to exalted Śrī Mathurā, the queen of cities, the city of Lord Kṛṣṇa, the queen of Vraja, the queen of holy places, the queen of yajṣas, austerities, and opulences, the giver of liberation, the protector of religion.
Text 35

Verse text

śṛṇvanti māhātmyam idaṁ madhoḥ pure
kṛṣṇaika-cittā niyataś ca yatra ye
vrajanti te tatra parikramāt phalaṁ
vaideha rājendra na cātra saṁśayaḥ

Synonyms

śṛṇvanti — hear ; māhātmyam — the glory ; idam — this ; madhoḥ pure — in Mathurā ; kṛṣṇaika-cittā — their thoughts placed on Lord Kṛṣṇa ; niyataḥ — self-controlled ; ca — and ; yatra — where ; ye — who ; vrajanti — go ; te — they ; tatra — there ; parikramāt — by circumambulating ; phalam — the result ; vaideha — O king of Videha ; rājendra — O king of kings ; na — not ; ca — and ; atra — here ; saṁśayaḥ — doubt.

Translation

O master of Videha, O king of kings, they who, controlling their senses and fixing their thoughts on Lord Kṛṣṇa, hear this description of Mathurā's glories, attain the same result attained by circumambulating Śrī Mathurā. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 36

Verse text

khaṇḍaṁ tv idaṁ śrī-mathurā-purasya ye
śṛṇvanti gāyanti paṭhanti sarvataḥ
ihaiva teṣāṁ hi samṛddhi-siddhayo
bhavanti vaideha nisargataḥ sadā

Synonyms

khaṇḍam — canto ; tv — indeed ; idam — this ; śrī-mathurā-purasya — of Śrī Mathurā City ; ye — who ; śṛṇvanti — hear ; gāyanti — sing ; paṭhanti — read ; sarvataḥ — in all respects ; iha — here ; eva — indeed ; teṣām — of them ; hi — indeed ; samṛddhi-siddhayaḥ — perfections ; bhavanti — are ; vaideha — O king of Videha ; nisargataḥ — naturally ; sadā — always.

Translation

They who hear, chant, or read this Śrī Mathurā-khaṇḍa become eternally perfect.
Text 37

Verse text

triḥ-sapta-kṛtvo bahu-vaibhavārthinaḥ śṛṇvanti cainaṁ niyataś ca ye bhṛśam
teṣāṁ gṛha-dvāram alaṅkaroti hi
bhṛṅgāvalī kuñjara-karṇa-tāḍitā

Synonyms

triḥ-sapta — twenty-one times ; kṛtvaḥ — doing ; bahu-vaibhavārthinaḥ — desiring great wealth ; śṛṇvanti — hear ; ca — and ; enam — this ; niyataḥ — controlling the senses ; ca — and ; ye — who ; bhṛśam — greatly ; teṣām — of them ; gṛha-dvāram — the doorway ; alaṅkaroti — decorates ; hi — indeed ; bhṛṅgāvalī — a swarm of bees ; kuñjara-karṇa-tāḍitā — striking an elephant's ear.

Translation

They who, desiring great wealth, control their senses and twenty-one times hear this Śrī Mathurā-khaṇḍa, find an elephant's ear of of the bees of transcendental wealth and opulences decorating their doorways.
Text 38

Verse text

vipro 'tha vidvān vijayī nṛpātmajo
vaiśyo nidhiśo vṛṣalo 'pi nirmalaḥ
śrutvedam ārāc ca manoratho bhavet
strīṇāṁ janānām ati-durlabho 'pi hi

Synonyms

vipraḥ — a brāhmaṇa ; atha — then ; vidvān — learned ; vijayī — victorious ; nṛpātmajaḥ — a kṣatriya ; vaiśyaḥ — a vaiśya ; nidhiśaḥ — the master of great wealth ; vṛṣalaḥ — a śūdra ; api — also ; nirmalaḥ — pure ; śrutvā — hearing ; idam — this ; ārāt — nearby ; ca — and ; manorathaḥ — desire ; bhavet — may be ; strīṇām — of women ; janānām — of men ; ati-durlabhaḥ — difficult to attain ; api — also ; hi — indeed.

Translation

By hearing this Śrī Mathurā-khaṇḍa a brāhmaṇa becames wise and learned, a kṣatriya becomes victorious in battle, a vaiśya becomes the master of great wealth, and a śūdra becomes pure-hearted. Whatever difficult-to-attain thing any man or woman desires, they will attain.
Text 39

Verse text

niṣkāraṇo bhakti-yuto mahī-tale
śṛṇoti cedaṁ hari-lagna-mānasaḥ
vijitya vighnān pravijitya nākapān
goloka-dhāma-pravaraṁ prayāti saḥ

Synonyms

niṣkāraṇaḥ — causeless ; bhakti-yutaḥ — devotee ; mahī-tale — on the earth ; śṛṇoti — hears ; ca — and ; idam — this ; hari — on Lord Kṛṣṇa ; lagna — placed ; mānasaḥ — thoughts ; vijitya — overcoming ; vighnān — obstacles ; pravijitya — surpassing ; nākapān — the demigods ; goloka-dhāma-pravaram — the transcendental abode of Goloka ; prayāti — goes ; saḥ — he.

Translation

A person on this earth who is engaged in unmotivated devotional service, whose thoughts rest on Lord Kṛṣṇa, and who hears this Śrī Mathurā-khaṇḍa, travels past the homes of the demigods and enters the transcendental abode of Śrī Goloka.